Title: 'Amazon Web Services' Storage Services
Version: 0.9.0
Description: Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' storage services, including 'Simple Storage Service' ('S3') and more https://aws.amazon.com/.
License: Apache License (≥ 2.0)
URL: https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.storage
BugReports: https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues
Imports: paws.common (≥ 0.8.0)
Suggests: testthat
Encoding: UTF-8
RoxygenNote: 7.3.2
Collate: 'backup_service.R' 'backup_interfaces.R' 'backup_operations.R' 'dlm_service.R' 'dlm_interfaces.R' 'dlm_operations.R' 'ebs_service.R' 'ebs_interfaces.R' 'ebs_operations.R' 'efs_service.R' 'efs_interfaces.R' 'efs_operations.R' 'finspacedata_service.R' 'finspacedata_interfaces.R' 'finspacedata_operations.R' 'fsx_service.R' 'fsx_interfaces.R' 'fsx_operations.R' 'glacier_service.R' 'glacier_interfaces.R' 'glacier_operations.R' 'omics_service.R' 'omics_interfaces.R' 'omics_operations.R' 'recyclebin_service.R' 'recyclebin_interfaces.R' 'recyclebin_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' 's3_service.R' 's3_operations.R' 's3_custom.R' 's3_interfaces.R' 's3control_service.R' 's3control_interfaces.R' 's3control_operations.R' 's3outposts_service.R' 's3outposts_interfaces.R' 's3outposts_operations.R' 's3tables_service.R' 's3tables_interfaces.R' 's3tables_operations.R' 'storagegateway_service.R' 'storagegateway_interfaces.R' 'storagegateway_operations.R'
NeedsCompilation: no
Packaged: 2025-03-14 09:23:43 UTC; dyfanjones
Author: David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph]
Maintainer: Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com>
Repository: CRAN
Date/Publication: 2025-03-14 17:10:02 UTC

AWS Backup

Description

Backup

Backup is a unified backup service designed to protect Amazon Web Services services and their associated data. Backup simplifies the creation, migration, restoration, and deletion of backups, while also providing reporting and auditing.

Usage

backup(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- backup(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

cancel_legal_hold Removes the specified legal hold on a recovery point
create_backup_plan Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules
create_backup_selection Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan
create_backup_vault Creates a logical container where backups are stored
create_framework Creates a framework with one or more controls
create_legal_hold Creates a legal hold on a recovery point (backup)
create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied
create_report_plan Creates a report plan
create_restore_testing_plan Creates a restore testing plan
create_restore_testing_selection This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully
delete_backup_plan Deletes a backup plan
delete_backup_selection Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId
delete_backup_vault Deletes the backup vault identified by its name
delete_backup_vault_access_policy Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault
delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name
delete_backup_vault_notifications Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault
delete_framework Deletes the framework specified by a framework name
delete_recovery_point Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID
delete_report_plan Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name
delete_restore_testing_plan This request deletes the specified restore testing plan
delete_restore_testing_selection Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name
describe_backup_job Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId
describe_backup_vault Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name
describe_copy_job Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource
describe_framework Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName
describe_global_settings Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup
describe_protected_resource Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource
describe_recovery_point Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle
describe_region_settings Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region
describe_report_job Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId
describe_report_plan Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region
describe_restore_job Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID
disassociate_recovery_point Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS
disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point
export_backup_plan_template Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template
get_backup_plan Returns BackupPlan details for the specified BackupPlanId
get_backup_plan_from_json Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error
get_backup_plan_from_template Returns the template specified by its templateId as a backup plan
get_backup_selection Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan
get_backup_vault_access_policy Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault
get_backup_vault_notifications Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault
get_legal_hold This action returns details for a specified legal hold
get_recovery_point_index_details This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point
get_recovery_point_restore_metadata Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup
get_restore_job_metadata This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job
get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings
get_restore_testing_plan Returns RestoreTestingPlan details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName
get_restore_testing_selection Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan
get_supported_resource_types Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup
list_backup_jobs Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days
list_backup_job_summaries This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days
list_backup_plans Lists the active backup plans for the account
list_backup_plan_templates Lists the backup plan templates
list_backup_plan_versions Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs
list_backup_selections Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan
list_backup_vaults Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them
list_copy_jobs Returns metadata about your copy jobs
list_copy_job_summaries This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days
list_frameworks Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region
list_indexed_recovery_points This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account
list_legal_holds This action returns metadata about active and previous legal holds
list_protected_resources Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type
list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault
list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault
list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold This action returns recovery point ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the specified legal hold
list_recovery_points_by_resource The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
list_report_jobs Returns details about your report jobs
list_report_plans Returns a list of your report plans
list_restore_jobs Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process
list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource
list_restore_job_summaries This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days
list_restore_testing_plans Returns a list of restore testing plans
list_restore_testing_selections Returns a list of restore testing selections
list_tags Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault
put_backup_vault_access_policy Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault
put_backup_vault_lock_configuration Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault
put_backup_vault_notifications Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events
put_restore_validation_result This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results
start_backup_job Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource
start_copy_job Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource
start_report_job Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan
start_restore_job Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
stop_backup_job Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource
tag_resource Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
untag_resource Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)
update_backup_plan Updates the specified backup plan
update_framework Updates the specified framework
update_global_settings Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup
update_recovery_point_index_settings This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index
update_recovery_point_lifecycle Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point
update_region_settings Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region
update_report_plan Updates the specified report plan
update_restore_testing_plan This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan
update_restore_testing_selection Updates the specified restore testing selection

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- backup()
svc$cancel_legal_hold(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Description

Removes the specified legal hold on a recovery point. This action can only be performed by a user with sufficient permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_cancel_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_cancel_legal_hold(
  LegalHoldId,
  CancelDescription,
  RetainRecordInDays = NULL
)

Arguments

LegalHoldId

[required] The ID of the legal hold.

CancelDescription

[required] A string the describes the reason for removing the legal hold.

RetainRecordInDays

The integer amount, in days, after which to remove legal hold.


Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules

Description

Creates a backup plan using a backup plan name and backup rules. A backup plan is a document that contains information that Backup uses to schedule tasks that create recovery points for resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_backup_plan(
  BackupPlan,
  BackupPlanTags = NULL,
  CreatorRequestId = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupPlan

[required] The body of a backup plan. Includes a BackupPlanName and one or more sets of Rules.

BackupPlanTags

The tags to assign to the backup plan.

CreatorRequestId

Identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. If the request includes a CreatorRequestId that matches an existing backup plan, that plan is returned. This parameter is optional.

If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.


Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan

Description

Creates a JSON document that specifies a set of resources to assign to a backup plan. For examples, see Assigning resources programmatically.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_backup_selection(
  BackupPlanId,
  BackupSelection,
  CreatorRequestId = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] The ID of the backup plan.

BackupSelection

[required] The body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan.

CreatorRequestId

A unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional.

If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.


Creates a logical container where backups are stored

Description

Creates a logical container where backups are stored. A create_backup_vault request includes a name, optionally one or more resource tags, an encryption key, and a request ID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_backup_vault(
  BackupVaultName,
  BackupVaultTags = NULL,
  EncryptionKeyArn = NULL,
  CreatorRequestId = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. They consist of letters, numbers, and hyphens.

BackupVaultTags

The tags to assign to the backup vault.

EncryptionKeyArn

The server-side encryption key that is used to protect your backups; for example, ⁠arn:aws:kms:us-west-2:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠.

CreatorRequestId

A unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional.

If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.


Creates a framework with one or more controls

Description

Creates a framework with one or more controls. A framework is a collection of controls that you can use to evaluate your backup practices. By using pre-built customizable controls to define your policies, you can evaluate whether your backup practices comply with your policies and which resources are not yet in compliance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_framework/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_framework(
  FrameworkName,
  FrameworkDescription = NULL,
  FrameworkControls,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL,
  FrameworkTags = NULL
)

Arguments

FrameworkName

[required] The unique name of the framework. The name must be between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_).

FrameworkDescription

An optional description of the framework with a maximum of 1,024 characters.

FrameworkControls

[required] The controls that make up the framework. Each control in the list has a name, input parameters, and scope.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to CreateFrameworkInput. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.

FrameworkTags

The tags to assign to the framework.


Description

Creates a legal hold on a recovery point (backup). A legal hold is a restraint on altering or deleting a backup until an authorized user cancels the legal hold. Any actions to delete or disassociate a recovery point will fail with an error if one or more active legal holds are on the recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_legal_hold(
  Title,
  Description,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL,
  RecoveryPointSelection = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

Title

[required] The title of the legal hold.

Description

[required] The description of the legal hold.

IdempotencyToken

This is a user-chosen string used to distinguish between otherwise identical calls. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.

RecoveryPointSelection

The criteria to assign a set of resources, such as resource types or backup vaults.

Tags

Optional tags to include. A tag is a key-value pair you can use to manage, filter, and search for your resources. Allowed characters include UTF-8 letters, numbers, spaces, and the following characters: + - = . _ : /.


Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied

Description

Creates a logical container to where backups may be copied.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_logically_air_gapped_backup_vault(
  BackupVaultName,
  BackupVaultTags = NULL,
  CreatorRequestId = NULL,
  MinRetentionDays,
  MaxRetentionDays
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Logically air-gapped backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created.

BackupVaultTags

The tags to assign to the vault.

CreatorRequestId

The ID of the creation request.

This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.

MinRetentionDays

[required] This setting specifies the minimum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points.

The minimum value accepted is 7 days.

MaxRetentionDays

[required] The maximum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points.


Creates a report plan

Description

Creates a report plan. A report plan is a document that contains information about the contents of the report and where Backup will deliver it.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_report_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_report_plan(
  ReportPlanName,
  ReportPlanDescription = NULL,
  ReportDeliveryChannel,
  ReportSetting,
  ReportPlanTags = NULL,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ReportPlanName

[required] The unique name of the report plan. The name must be between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_).

ReportPlanDescription

An optional description of the report plan with a maximum of 1,024 characters.

ReportDeliveryChannel

[required] A structure that contains information about where and how to deliver your reports, specifically your Amazon S3 bucket name, S3 key prefix, and the formats of your reports.

ReportSetting

[required] Identifies the report template for the report. Reports are built using a report template. The report templates are:

RESOURCE_COMPLIANCE_REPORT | CONTROL_COMPLIANCE_REPORT | BACKUP_JOB_REPORT | COPY_JOB_REPORT | RESTORE_JOB_REPORT

If the report template is RESOURCE_COMPLIANCE_REPORT or CONTROL_COMPLIANCE_REPORT, this API resource also describes the report coverage by Amazon Web Services Regions and frameworks.

ReportPlanTags

The tags to assign to the report plan.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to CreateReportPlanInput. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.


Creates a restore testing plan

Description

Creates a restore testing plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_restore_testing_plan(
  CreatorRequestId = NULL,
  RestoreTestingPlan,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

CreatorRequestId

This is a unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retriedwithout the risk of running the operation twice. This parameter is optional. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.

RestoreTestingPlan

[required] A restore testing plan must contain a unique RestoreTestingPlanName string you create and must contain a ScheduleExpression cron. You may optionally include a StartWindowHours integer and a CreatorRequestId string.

The RestoreTestingPlanName is a unique string that is the name of the restore testing plan. This cannot be changed after creation, and it must consist of only alphanumeric characters and underscores.

Tags

The tags to assign to the restore testing plan.


This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully

Description

This request can be sent after CreateRestoreTestingPlan request returns successfully. This is the second part of creating a resource testing plan, and it must be completed sequentially.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_create_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_create_restore_testing_selection(
  CreatorRequestId = NULL,
  RestoreTestingPlanName,
  RestoreTestingSelection
)

Arguments

CreatorRequestId

This is an optional unique string that identifies the request and allows failed requests to be retried without the risk of running the operation twice. If used, this parameter must contain 1 to 50 alphanumeric or '-_.' characters.

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Input the restore testing plan name that was returned from the related CreateRestoreTestingPlan request.

RestoreTestingSelection

[required] This consists of RestoreTestingSelectionName, ProtectedResourceType, and one of the following:

  • ProtectedResourceArns

  • ProtectedResourceConditions

Each protected resource type can have one single value.

A restore testing selection can include a wildcard value ("*") for ProtectedResourceArns along with ProtectedResourceConditions. Alternatively, you can include up to 30 specific protected resource ARNs in ProtectedResourceArns.


Deletes a backup plan

Description

Deletes a backup plan. A backup plan can only be deleted after all associated selections of resources have been deleted. Deleting a backup plan deletes the current version of a backup plan. Previous versions, if any, will still exist.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_plan(BackupPlanId)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.


Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId

Description

Deletes the resource selection associated with a backup plan that is specified by the SelectionId.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_selection(BackupPlanId, SelectionId)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.

SelectionId

[required] Uniquely identifies the body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan.


Deletes the backup vault identified by its name

Description

Deletes the backup vault identified by its name. A vault can be deleted only if it is empty.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_vault(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.


Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault

Description

Deletes the policy document that manages permissions on a backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created. They consist of lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens.


Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name

Description

Deletes Backup Vault Lock from a backup vault specified by a backup vault name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of the backup vault from which to delete Backup Vault Lock.


Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault

Description

Deletes event notifications for the specified backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_backup_vault_notifications(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created.


Deletes the framework specified by a framework name

Description

Deletes the framework specified by a framework name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_framework/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_framework(FrameworkName)

Arguments

FrameworkName

[required] The unique name of a framework.


Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID

Description

Deletes the recovery point specified by a recovery point ID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_recovery_point(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.


Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name

Description

Deletes the report plan specified by a report plan name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_report_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_report_plan(ReportPlanName)

Arguments

ReportPlanName

[required] The unique name of a report plan.


This request deletes the specified restore testing plan

Description

This request deletes the specified restore testing plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlanName)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan you wish to delete.


Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name

Description

Input the Restore Testing Plan name and Restore Testing Selection name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_delete_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_delete_restore_testing_selection(
  RestoreTestingPlanName,
  RestoreTestingSelectionName
)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan that contains the restore testing selection you wish to delete.

RestoreTestingSelectionName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing selection you wish to delete.


Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId

Description

Returns backup job details for the specified BackupJobId.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_backup_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_backup_job(BackupJobId)

Arguments

BackupJobId

[required] Uniquely identifies a request to Backup to back up a resource.


Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name

Description

Returns metadata about a backup vault specified by its name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_backup_vault(BackupVaultName, BackupVaultAccountId = NULL)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

BackupVaultAccountId

The account ID of the specified backup vault.


Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource

Description

Returns metadata associated with creating a copy of a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_copy_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_copy_job(CopyJobId)

Arguments

CopyJobId

[required] Uniquely identifies a copy job.


Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName

Description

Returns the framework details for the specified FrameworkName.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_framework/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_framework(FrameworkName)

Arguments

FrameworkName

[required] The unique name of a framework.


Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup

Description

Describes whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup. Returns an error if the account is not a member of an Organizations organization. Example: ⁠describe-global-settings --region us-west-2⁠

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_global_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_global_settings()

Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource

Description

Returns information about a saved resource, including the last time it was backed up, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), and the Amazon Web Services service type of the saved resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_protected_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_protected_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type.


Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle

Description

Returns metadata associated with a recovery point, including ID, status, encryption, and lifecycle.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_recovery_point(
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn,
  BackupVaultAccountId = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.

BackupVaultAccountId

The account ID of the specified backup vault.


Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region

Description

Returns the current service opt-in settings for the Region. If service opt-in is enabled for a service, Backup tries to protect that service's resources in this Region, when the resource is included in an on-demand backup or scheduled backup plan. Otherwise, Backup does not try to protect that service's resources in this Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_region_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_region_settings()

Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId

Description

Returns the details associated with creating a report as specified by its ReportJobId.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_report_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_report_job(ReportJobId)

Arguments

ReportJobId

[required] The identifier of the report job. A unique, randomly generated, Unicode, UTF-8 encoded string that is at most 1,024 bytes long. The report job ID cannot be edited.


Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Returns a list of all report plans for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_report_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_report_plan(ReportPlanName)

Arguments

ReportPlanName

[required] The unique name of a report plan.


Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID

Description

Returns metadata associated with a restore job that is specified by a job ID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_describe_restore_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_describe_restore_job(RestoreJobId)

Arguments

RestoreJobId

[required] Uniquely identifies the job that restores a recovery point.


Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS

Description

Deletes the specified continuous backup recovery point from Backup and releases control of that continuous backup to the source service, such as Amazon RDS. The source service will continue to create and retain continuous backups using the lifecycle that you specified in your original backup plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_disassociate_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_disassociate_recovery_point(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The unique name of an Backup vault.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies an Backup recovery point.


This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point

Description

This action to a specific child (nested) recovery point removes the relationship between the specified recovery point and its parent (composite) recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_disassociate_recovery_point_from_parent(
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where the child (nested) recovery point is stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the child (nested) recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45.⁠


Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template

Description

Returns the backup plan that is specified by the plan ID as a backup template.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_export_backup_plan_template/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_export_backup_plan_template(BackupPlanId)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.


Returns BackupPlan details for the specified BackupPlanId

Description

Returns BackupPlan details for the specified BackupPlanId. The details are the body of a backup plan in JSON format, in addition to plan metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_plan(BackupPlanId, VersionId = NULL)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.

VersionId

Unique, randomly generated, Unicode, UTF-8 encoded strings that are at most 1,024 bytes long. Version IDs cannot be edited.


Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error

Description

Returns a valid JSON document specifying a backup plan or an error.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan_from_json/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_plan_from_json(BackupPlanTemplateJson)

Arguments

BackupPlanTemplateJson

[required] A customer-supplied backup plan document in JSON format.


Returns the template specified by its templateId as a backup plan

Description

Returns the template specified by its templateId as a backup plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_plan_from_template/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_plan_from_template(BackupPlanTemplateId)

Arguments

BackupPlanTemplateId

[required] Uniquely identifies a stored backup plan template.


Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan

Description

Returns selection metadata and a document in JSON format that specifies a list of resources that are associated with a backup plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_selection(BackupPlanId, SelectionId)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.

SelectionId

[required] Uniquely identifies the body of a request to assign a set of resources to a backup plan.


Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault

Description

Returns the access policy document that is associated with the named backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.


Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault

Description

Returns event notifications for the specified backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_backup_vault_notifications(BackupVaultName)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.


Description

This action returns details for a specified legal hold. The details are the body of a legal hold in JSON format, in addition to metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_legal_hold(LegalHoldId)

Arguments

LegalHoldId

[required] The ID of the legal hold.


This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point

Description

This operation returns the metadata and details specific to the backup index associated with the specified recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_recovery_point_index_details/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_recovery_point_index_details(BackupVaultName, RecoveryPointArn)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created.

Accepted characters include lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.


Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup

Description

Returns a set of metadata key-value pairs that were used to create the backup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_recovery_point_restore_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_recovery_point_restore_metadata(
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn,
  BackupVaultAccountId = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.

BackupVaultAccountId

The account ID of the specified backup vault.


This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job

Description

This request returns the metadata for the specified restore job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_job_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_restore_job_metadata(RestoreJobId)

Arguments

RestoreJobId

[required] This is a unique identifier of a restore job within Backup.


This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings

Description

This request returns the minimal required set of metadata needed to start a restore job with secure default settings. BackupVaultName and RecoveryPointArn are required parameters. BackupVaultAccountId is an optional parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_restore_testing_inferred_metadata(
  BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn
)

Arguments

BackupVaultAccountId

The account ID of the specified backup vault.

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web ServicesRegion where they are created. They consist of letters, numbers, and hyphens.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.


Returns RestoreTestingPlan details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName

Description

Returns RestoreTestingPlan details for the specified RestoreTestingPlanName. The details are the body of a restore testing plan in JSON format, in addition to plan metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlanName)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan.


Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan

Description

Returns RestoreTestingSelection, which displays resources and elements of the restore testing plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_restore_testing_selection(
  RestoreTestingPlanName,
  RestoreTestingSelectionName
)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing plan.

RestoreTestingSelectionName

[required] Required unique name of the restore testing selection.


Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup

Description

Returns the Amazon Web Services resource types supported by Backup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_get_supported_resource_types/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_get_supported_resource_types()

This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days

Description

This is a request for a summary of backup jobs created or running within the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, MessageCategory, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_job_summaries/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_job_summaries(
  AccountId = NULL,
  State = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  MessageCategory = NULL,
  AggregationPeriod = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

Returns the job count for the specified account.

If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned.

Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts from all accounts within the authenticated organization, then returns the sum.

State

This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state.

The the value ANY returns count of all states.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all states and returns the sum.

⁠Completed with issues⁠ is a status found only in the Backup console. For API, this status refers to jobs with a state of COMPLETED and a MessageCategory with a value other than SUCCESS; that is, the status is completed but comes with a status message. To obtain the job count for ⁠Completed with issues⁠, run two GET requests, and subtract the second, smaller number:

GET /audit/backup-job-summaries?AggregationPeriod=FOURTEEN_DAYS&State=COMPLETED

GET /audit/backup-job-summaries?AggregationPeriod=FOURTEEN_DAYS&MessageCategory=SUCCESS&State=COMPLETED

ResourceType

Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request get_supported_resource_types to obtain strings for supported resource types.

The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all resource types and returns the sum.

The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database.

MessageCategory

This parameter returns the job count for the specified message category.

Example accepted strings include AccessDenied, Success, and InvalidParameters. See Monitoring for a list of accepted MessageCategory strings.

The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all message categories and returns the sum.

AggregationPeriod

The period for the returned results.

  • ONE_DAY - The daily job count for the prior 14 days.

  • SEVEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for the prior 7 days.

  • FOURTEEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for prior 14 days.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of resources, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.


Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days

Description

Returns a list of existing backup jobs for an authenticated account for the last 30 days. For a longer period of time, consider using these monitoring tools.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_jobs(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ByResourceArn = NULL,
  ByState = NULL,
  ByBackupVaultName = NULL,
  ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
  ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
  ByResourceType = NULL,
  ByAccountId = NULL,
  ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
  ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
  ByParentJobId = NULL,
  ByMessageCategory = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

ByResourceArn

Returns only backup jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ByState

Returns only backup jobs that are in the specified state.

⁠Completed with issues⁠ is a status found only in the Backup console. For API, this status refers to jobs with a state of COMPLETED and a MessageCategory with a value other than SUCCESS; that is, the status is completed but comes with a status message.

To obtain the job count for ⁠Completed with issues⁠, run two GET requests, and subtract the second, smaller number:

GET /backup-jobs/?state=COMPLETED

GET /backup-jobs/?messageCategory=SUCCESS&state=COMPLETED

ByBackupVaultName

Returns only backup jobs that will be stored in the specified backup vault. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

ByCreatedBefore

Returns only backup jobs that were created before the specified date.

ByCreatedAfter

Returns only backup jobs that were created after the specified date.

ByResourceType

Returns only backup jobs for the specified resources:

  • Aurora for Amazon Aurora

  • CloudFormation for CloudFormation

  • DocumentDB for Amazon DocumentDB (with MongoDB compatibility)

  • DynamoDB for Amazon DynamoDB

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • EC2 for Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud

  • EFS for Amazon Elastic File System

  • FSx for Amazon FSx

  • Neptune for Amazon Neptune

  • RDS for Amazon Relational Database Service

  • Redshift for Amazon Redshift

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

  • ⁠SAP HANA on Amazon EC2⁠ for SAP HANA databases on Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud instances

  • ⁠Storage Gateway⁠ for Storage Gateway

  • Timestream for Amazon Timestream

  • VirtualMachine for VMware virtual machines

ByAccountId

The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only backup jobs associated with the specified account ID.

If used from an Organizations management account, passing * returns all jobs across the organization.

ByCompleteAfter

Returns only backup jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByCompleteBefore

Returns only backup jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByParentJobId

This is a filter to list child (nested) jobs based on parent job ID.

ByMessageCategory

This is an optional parameter that can be used to filter out jobs with a MessageCategory which matches the value you input.

Example strings may include AccessDenied, SUCCESS, AGGREGATE_ALL, and InvalidParameters.

View Monitoring

The wildcard () returns count of all message categories.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all message categories and returns the sum.


Lists the backup plan templates

Description

Lists the backup plan templates.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plan_templates/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_plan_templates(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to return.


Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs

Description

Returns version metadata of your backup plans, including Amazon Resource Names (ARNs), backup plan IDs, creation and deletion dates, plan names, and version IDs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plan_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_plan_versions(
  BackupPlanId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


Lists the active backup plans for the account

Description

Lists the active backup plans for the account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_plans/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_plans(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  IncludeDeleted = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

IncludeDeleted

A Boolean value with a default value of FALSE that returns deleted backup plans when set to TRUE.


Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan

Description

Returns an array containing metadata of the resources associated with the target backup plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_selections/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_selections(
  BackupPlanId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] Uniquely identifies a backup plan.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them

Description

Returns a list of recovery point storage containers along with information about them.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_backup_vaults/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_backup_vaults(
  ByVaultType = NULL,
  ByShared = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

ByVaultType

This parameter will sort the list of vaults by vault type.

ByShared

This parameter will sort the list of vaults by shared vaults.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days

Description

This request obtains a list of copy jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, MessageCategory, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_copy_job_summaries/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_copy_job_summaries(
  AccountId = NULL,
  State = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  MessageCategory = NULL,
  AggregationPeriod = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

Returns the job count for the specified account.

If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned.

Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts from all accounts within the authenticated organization, then returns the sum.

State

This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state.

The the value ANY returns count of all states.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all states and returns the sum.

ResourceType

Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request get_supported_resource_types to obtain strings for supported resource types.

The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all resource types and returns the sum.

The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database.

MessageCategory

This parameter returns the job count for the specified message category.

Example accepted strings include AccessDenied, Success, and InvalidParameters. See Monitoring for a list of accepted MessageCategory strings.

The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all message categories and returns the sum.

AggregationPeriod

The period for the returned results.

  • ONE_DAY - The daily job count for the prior 14 days.

  • SEVEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for the prior 7 days.

  • FOURTEEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for prior 14 days.

MaxResults

This parameter sets the maximum number of items to be returned.

The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of resources, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.


Returns metadata about your copy jobs

Description

Returns metadata about your copy jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_copy_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_copy_jobs(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ByResourceArn = NULL,
  ByState = NULL,
  ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
  ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
  ByResourceType = NULL,
  ByDestinationVaultArn = NULL,
  ByAccountId = NULL,
  ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
  ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
  ByParentJobId = NULL,
  ByMessageCategory = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

ByResourceArn

Returns only copy jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ByState

Returns only copy jobs that are in the specified state.

ByCreatedBefore

Returns only copy jobs that were created before the specified date.

ByCreatedAfter

Returns only copy jobs that were created after the specified date.

ByResourceType

Returns only backup jobs for the specified resources:

  • Aurora for Amazon Aurora

  • CloudFormation for CloudFormation

  • DocumentDB for Amazon DocumentDB (with MongoDB compatibility)

  • DynamoDB for Amazon DynamoDB

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • EC2 for Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud

  • EFS for Amazon Elastic File System

  • FSx for Amazon FSx

  • Neptune for Amazon Neptune

  • RDS for Amazon Relational Database Service

  • Redshift for Amazon Redshift

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

  • ⁠SAP HANA on Amazon EC2⁠ for SAP HANA databases on Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud instances

  • ⁠Storage Gateway⁠ for Storage Gateway

  • Timestream for Amazon Timestream

  • VirtualMachine for VMware virtual machines

ByDestinationVaultArn

An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a source backup vault to copy from; for example, arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:backup-vault:aBackupVault.

ByAccountId

The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only copy jobs associated with the specified account ID.

ByCompleteBefore

Returns only copy jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByCompleteAfter

Returns only copy jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByParentJobId

This is a filter to list child (nested) jobs based on parent job ID.

ByMessageCategory

This is an optional parameter that can be used to filter out jobs with a MessageCategory which matches the value you input.

Example strings may include AccessDenied, SUCCESS, AGGREGATE_ALL, and INVALIDPARAMETERS.

View Monitoring for a list of accepted strings.

The the value ANY returns count of all message categories.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all message categories and returns the sum.


Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Returns a list of all frameworks for an Amazon Web Services account and Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_frameworks/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_frameworks(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data.

NextToken

An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list.


This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account

Description

This operation returns a list of recovery points that have an associated index, belonging to the specified account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_indexed_recovery_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_indexed_recovery_points(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  SourceResourceArn = NULL,
  CreatedBefore = NULL,
  CreatedAfter = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  IndexStatus = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned recovery points.

For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of indexed recovery points, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of resource list items to be returned.

SourceResourceArn

A string of the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies the source resource.

CreatedBefore

Returns only indexed recovery points that were created before the specified date.

CreatedAfter

Returns only indexed recovery points that were created after the specified date.

ResourceType

Returns a list of indexed recovery points for the specified resource type(s).

Accepted values include:

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

IndexStatus

Include this parameter to filter the returned list by the indicated statuses.

Accepted values: PENDING | ACTIVE | FAILED | DELETING

A recovery point with an index that has the status of ACTIVE can be included in a search.


Description

This action returns metadata about active and previous legal holds.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_legal_holds/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_legal_holds(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of resources, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of resource list items to be returned.


Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type

Description

Returns an array of resources successfully backed up by Backup, including the time the resource was saved, an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource, and a resource type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_protected_resources/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_protected_resources(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault

Description

This request lists the protected resources corresponding to each backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_protected_resources_by_backup_vault(
  BackupVaultName,
  BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The list of protected resources by backup vault within the vault(s) you specify by name.

BackupVaultAccountId

The list of protected resources by backup vault within the vault(s) you specify by account ID.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault

Description

Returns detailed information about the recovery points stored in a backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_recovery_points_by_backup_vault(
  BackupVaultName,
  BackupVaultAccountId = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ByResourceArn = NULL,
  ByResourceType = NULL,
  ByBackupPlanId = NULL,
  ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
  ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
  ByParentRecoveryPointArn = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

Backup vault name might not be available when a supported service creates the backup.

BackupVaultAccountId

This parameter will sort the list of recovery points by account ID.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

ByResourceArn

Returns only recovery points that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ByResourceType

Returns only recovery points that match the specified resource type(s):

  • Aurora for Amazon Aurora

  • CloudFormation for CloudFormation

  • DocumentDB for Amazon DocumentDB (with MongoDB compatibility)

  • DynamoDB for Amazon DynamoDB

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • EC2 for Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud

  • EFS for Amazon Elastic File System

  • FSx for Amazon FSx

  • Neptune for Amazon Neptune

  • RDS for Amazon Relational Database Service

  • Redshift for Amazon Redshift

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

  • ⁠SAP HANA on Amazon EC2⁠ for SAP HANA databases on Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud instances

  • ⁠Storage Gateway⁠ for Storage Gateway

  • Timestream for Amazon Timestream

  • VirtualMachine for VMware virtual machines

ByBackupPlanId

Returns only recovery points that match the specified backup plan ID.

ByCreatedBefore

Returns only recovery points that were created before the specified timestamp.

ByCreatedAfter

Returns only recovery points that were created after the specified timestamp.

ByParentRecoveryPointArn

This returns only recovery points that match the specified parent (composite) recovery point Amazon Resource Name (ARN).


Description

This action returns recovery point ARNs (Amazon Resource Names) of the specified legal hold.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_recovery_points_by_legal_hold(
  LegalHoldId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

LegalHoldId

[required] The ID of the legal hold.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of resources, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of resource list items to be returned.


The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN)

Description

The information about the recovery points of the type specified by a resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_recovery_points_by_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_recovery_points_by_resource(
  ResourceArn,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ManagedByAWSBackupOnly = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

Amazon RDS requires a value of at least 20.

ManagedByAWSBackupOnly

This attribute filters recovery points based on ownership.

If this is set to TRUE, the response will contain recovery points associated with the selected resources that are managed by Backup.

If this is set to FALSE, the response will contain all recovery points associated with the selected resource.

Type: Boolean


Returns details about your report jobs

Description

Returns details about your report jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_report_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_report_jobs(
  ByReportPlanName = NULL,
  ByCreationBefore = NULL,
  ByCreationAfter = NULL,
  ByStatus = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ByReportPlanName

Returns only report jobs with the specified report plan name.

ByCreationBefore

Returns only report jobs that were created before the date and time specified in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). For example, the value 1516925490 represents Friday, January 26, 2018 12:11:30 AM.

ByCreationAfter

Returns only report jobs that were created after the date and time specified in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). For example, the value 1516925490 represents Friday, January 26, 2018 12:11:30 AM.

ByStatus

Returns only report jobs that are in the specified status. The statuses are:

CREATED | RUNNING | COMPLETED | FAILED

MaxResults

The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data.

NextToken

An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list.


Returns a list of your report plans

Description

Returns a list of your report plans. For detailed information about a single report plan, use describe_report_plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_report_plans/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_report_plans(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The number of desired results from 1 to 1000. Optional. If unspecified, the query will return 1 MB of data.

NextToken

An identifier that was returned from the previous call to this operation, which can be used to return the next set of items in the list.


This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days

Description

This request obtains a summary of restore jobs created or running within the the most recent 30 days. You can include parameters AccountID, State, ResourceType, AggregationPeriod, MaxResults, or NextToken to filter results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_job_summaries/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_restore_job_summaries(
  AccountId = NULL,
  State = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  AggregationPeriod = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

Returns the job count for the specified account.

If the request is sent from a member account or an account not part of Amazon Web Services Organizations, jobs within requestor's account will be returned.

Root, admin, and delegated administrator accounts can use the value ANY to return job counts from every account in the organization.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts from all accounts within the authenticated organization, then returns the sum.

State

This parameter returns the job count for jobs with the specified state.

The the value ANY returns count of all states.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all states and returns the sum.

ResourceType

Returns the job count for the specified resource type. Use request get_supported_resource_types to obtain strings for supported resource types.

The the value ANY returns count of all resource types.

AGGREGATE_ALL aggregates job counts for all resource types and returns the sum.

The type of Amazon Web Services resource to be backed up; for example, an Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) volume or an Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) database.

AggregationPeriod

The period for the returned results.

  • ONE_DAY - The daily job count for the prior 14 days.

  • SEVEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for the prior 7 days.

  • FOURTEEN_DAYS - The aggregated job count for prior 14 days.

MaxResults

This parameter sets the maximum number of items to be returned.

The value is an integer. Range of accepted values is from 1 to 500.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned resources. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of resources, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.


Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process

Description

Returns a list of jobs that Backup initiated to restore a saved resource, including details about the recovery process.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_restore_jobs(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ByAccountId = NULL,
  ByResourceType = NULL,
  ByCreatedBefore = NULL,
  ByCreatedAfter = NULL,
  ByStatus = NULL,
  ByCompleteBefore = NULL,
  ByCompleteAfter = NULL,
  ByRestoreTestingPlanArn = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

ByAccountId

The account ID to list the jobs from. Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified account ID.

ByResourceType

Include this parameter to return only restore jobs for the specified resources:

  • Aurora for Amazon Aurora

  • CloudFormation for CloudFormation

  • DocumentDB for Amazon DocumentDB (with MongoDB compatibility)

  • DynamoDB for Amazon DynamoDB

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • EC2 for Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud

  • EFS for Amazon Elastic File System

  • FSx for Amazon FSx

  • Neptune for Amazon Neptune

  • RDS for Amazon Relational Database Service

  • Redshift for Amazon Redshift

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

  • ⁠SAP HANA on Amazon EC2⁠ for SAP HANA databases on Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud instances

  • ⁠Storage Gateway⁠ for Storage Gateway

  • Timestream for Amazon Timestream

  • VirtualMachine for VMware virtual machines

ByCreatedBefore

Returns only restore jobs that were created before the specified date.

ByCreatedAfter

Returns only restore jobs that were created after the specified date.

ByStatus

Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified job status.

ByCompleteBefore

Returns only copy jobs completed before a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByCompleteAfter

Returns only copy jobs completed after a date expressed in Unix format and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

ByRestoreTestingPlanArn

This returns only restore testing jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).


This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource

Description

This returns restore jobs that contain the specified protected resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_restore_jobs_by_protected_resource(
  ResourceArn,
  ByStatus = NULL,
  ByRecoveryPointCreationDateAfter = NULL,
  ByRecoveryPointCreationDateBefore = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] Returns only restore jobs that match the specified resource Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ByStatus

Returns only restore jobs associated with the specified job status.

ByRecoveryPointCreationDateAfter

Returns only restore jobs of recovery points that were created after the specified date.

ByRecoveryPointCreationDateBefore

Returns only restore jobs of recovery points that were created before the specified date.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request ismade to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


Returns a list of restore testing plans

Description

Returns a list of restore testing plans.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_testing_plans/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_restore_testing_plans(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the nexttoken.


Returns a list of restore testing selections

Description

Returns a list of restore testing selections. Can be filtered by MaxResults and RestoreTestingPlanName.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_restore_testing_selections/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_restore_testing_selections(
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  RestoreTestingPlanName
)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the nexttoken.

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] Returns restore testing selections by the specified restore testing plan name.


Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault

Description

Returns the tags assigned to the resource, such as a target recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_list_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_list_tags(ResourceArn, NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the type of resource. Valid targets for list_tags are recovery points, backup plans, and backup vaults.

NextToken

The next item following a partial list of returned items. For example, if a request is made to return MaxResults number of items, NextToken allows you to return more items in your list starting at the location pointed to by the next token.

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to be returned.


Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault

Description

Sets a resource-based policy that is used to manage access permissions on the target backup vault. Requires a backup vault name and an access policy document in JSON format.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_put_backup_vault_access_policy(BackupVaultName, Policy = NULL)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

Policy

The backup vault access policy document in JSON format.


Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault

Description

Applies Backup Vault Lock to a backup vault, preventing attempts to delete any recovery point stored in or created in a backup vault. Vault Lock also prevents attempts to update the lifecycle policy that controls the retention period of any recovery point currently stored in a backup vault. If specified, Vault Lock enforces a minimum and maximum retention period for future backup and copy jobs that target a backup vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_put_backup_vault_lock_configuration(
  BackupVaultName,
  MinRetentionDays = NULL,
  MaxRetentionDays = NULL,
  ChangeableForDays = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the name of the backup vault it protects.

MinRetentionDays

The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the minimum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. This setting can be useful if, for example, your organization's policies require you to retain certain data for at least seven years (2555 days).

This parameter is required when a vault lock is created through CloudFormation; otherwise, this parameter is optional. If this parameter is not specified, Vault Lock will not enforce a minimum retention period.

If this parameter is specified, any backup or copy job to the vault must have a lifecycle policy with a retention period equal to or longer than the minimum retention period. If the job's retention period is shorter than that minimum retention period, then the vault fails that backup or copy job, and you should either modify your lifecycle settings or use a different vault. The shortest minimum retention period you can specify is 1 day. Recovery points already saved in the vault prior to Vault Lock are not affected.

MaxRetentionDays

The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the maximum retention period that the vault retains its recovery points. This setting can be useful if, for example, your organization's policies require you to destroy certain data after retaining it for four years (1460 days).

If this parameter is not included, Vault Lock does not enforce a maximum retention period on the recovery points in the vault. If this parameter is included without a value, Vault Lock will not enforce a maximum retention period.

If this parameter is specified, any backup or copy job to the vault must have a lifecycle policy with a retention period equal to or shorter than the maximum retention period. If the job's retention period is longer than that maximum retention period, then the vault fails the backup or copy job, and you should either modify your lifecycle settings or use a different vault. The longest maximum retention period you can specify is 36500 days (approximately 100 years). Recovery points already saved in the vault prior to Vault Lock are not affected.

ChangeableForDays

The Backup Vault Lock configuration that specifies the number of days before the lock date. For example, setting ChangeableForDays to 30 on Jan. 1, 2022 at 8pm UTC will set the lock date to Jan. 31, 2022 at 8pm UTC.

Backup enforces a 72-hour cooling-off period before Vault Lock takes effect and becomes immutable. Therefore, you must set ChangeableForDays to 3 or greater.

Before the lock date, you can delete Vault Lock from the vault using delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration or change the Vault Lock configuration using put_backup_vault_lock_configuration. On and after the lock date, the Vault Lock becomes immutable and cannot be changed or deleted.

If this parameter is not specified, you can delete Vault Lock from the vault using delete_backup_vault_lock_configuration or change the Vault Lock configuration using put_backup_vault_lock_configuration at any time.


Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events

Description

Turns on notifications on a backup vault for the specified topic and events.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_backup_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_put_backup_vault_notifications(
  BackupVaultName,
  SNSTopicArn,
  BackupVaultEvents
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

SNSTopicArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that specifies the topic for a backup vault’s events; for example, arn:aws:sns:us-west-2:111122223333:MyVaultTopic.

BackupVaultEvents

[required] An array of events that indicate the status of jobs to back up resources to the backup vault.

For common use cases and code samples, see Using Amazon SNS to track Backup events.

The following events are supported:

  • BACKUP_JOB_STARTED | BACKUP_JOB_COMPLETED

  • COPY_JOB_STARTED | COPY_JOB_SUCCESSFUL | COPY_JOB_FAILED

  • RESTORE_JOB_STARTED | RESTORE_JOB_COMPLETED | RECOVERY_POINT_MODIFIED

  • S3_BACKUP_OBJECT_FAILED | S3_RESTORE_OBJECT_FAILED

The list below includes both supported events and deprecated events that are no longer in use (for reference). Deprecated events do not return statuses or notifications. Refer to the list above for the supported events.


This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results

Description

This request allows you to send your independent self-run restore test validation results. RestoreJobId and ValidationStatus are required. Optionally, you can input a ValidationStatusMessage.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_put_restore_validation_result/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_put_restore_validation_result(
  RestoreJobId,
  ValidationStatus,
  ValidationStatusMessage = NULL
)

Arguments

RestoreJobId

[required] This is a unique identifier of a restore job within Backup.

ValidationStatus

[required] The status of your restore validation.

ValidationStatusMessage

This is an optional message string you can input to describe the validation status for the restore test validation.


Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource

Description

Starts an on-demand backup job for the specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_backup_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_start_backup_job(
  BackupVaultName,
  ResourceArn,
  IamRoleArn,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL,
  StartWindowMinutes = NULL,
  CompleteWindowMinutes = NULL,
  Lifecycle = NULL,
  RecoveryPointTags = NULL,
  BackupOptions = NULL,
  Index = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

ResourceArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the resource type.

IamRoleArn

[required] Specifies the IAM role ARN used to create the target recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/S3Access⁠.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to start_backup_job. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.

StartWindowMinutes

A value in minutes after a backup is scheduled before a job will be canceled if it doesn't start successfully. This value is optional, and the default is 8 hours. If this value is included, it must be at least 60 minutes to avoid errors.

This parameter has a maximum value of 100 years (52,560,000 minutes).

During the start window, the backup job status remains in CREATED status until it has successfully begun or until the start window time has run out. If within the start window time Backup receives an error that allows the job to be retried, Backup will automatically retry to begin the job at least every 10 minutes until the backup successfully begins (the job status changes to RUNNING) or until the job status changes to EXPIRED (which is expected to occur when the start window time is over).

CompleteWindowMinutes

A value in minutes during which a successfully started backup must complete, or else Backup will cancel the job. This value is optional. This value begins counting down from when the backup was scheduled. It does not add additional time for StartWindowMinutes, or if the backup started later than scheduled.

Like StartWindowMinutes, this parameter has a maximum value of 100 years (52,560,000 minutes).

Lifecycle

The lifecycle defines when a protected resource is transitioned to cold storage and when it expires. Backup will transition and expire backups automatically according to the lifecycle that you define.

Backups transitioned to cold storage must be stored in cold storage for a minimum of 90 days. Therefore, the “retention” setting must be 90 days greater than the “transition to cold after days” setting. The “transition to cold after days” setting cannot be changed after a backup has been transitioned to cold.

Resource types that can transition to cold storage are listed in the Feature availability by resource table. Backup ignores this expression for other resource types.

This parameter has a maximum value of 100 years (36,500 days).

RecoveryPointTags

The tags to assign to the resources.

BackupOptions

The backup option for a selected resource. This option is only available for Windows Volume Shadow Copy Service (VSS) backup jobs.

Valid values: Set to "WindowsVSS":"enabled" to enable the WindowsVSS backup option and create a Windows VSS backup. Set to ⁠"WindowsVSS""disabled"⁠ to create a regular backup. The WindowsVSS option is not enabled by default.

Index

Include this parameter to enable index creation if your backup job has a resource type that supports backup indexes.

Resource types that support backup indexes include:

  • EBS for Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • S3 for Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3)

Index can have 1 of 2 possible values, either ENABLED or DISABLED.

To create a backup index for an eligible ACTIVE recovery point that does not yet have a backup index, set value to ENABLED.

To delete a backup index, set value to DISABLED.


Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource

Description

Starts a job to create a one-time copy of the specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_copy_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_start_copy_job(
  RecoveryPointArn,
  SourceBackupVaultName,
  DestinationBackupVaultArn,
  IamRoleArn,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL,
  Lifecycle = NULL
)

Arguments

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point to use for the copy job; for example, arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45.

SourceBackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical source container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

DestinationBackupVaultArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a destination backup vault to copy to; for example, arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:backup-vault:aBackupVault.

IamRoleArn

[required] Specifies the IAM role ARN used to copy the target recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/S3Access⁠.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to start_copy_job. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.

Lifecycle

Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan

Description

Starts an on-demand report job for the specified report plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_report_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_start_report_job(ReportPlanName, IdempotencyToken = NULL)

Arguments

ReportPlanName

[required] The unique name of a report plan.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to StartReportJobInput. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.


Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)

Description

Recovers the saved resource identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_start_restore_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_start_restore_job(
  RecoveryPointArn,
  Metadata,
  IamRoleArn = NULL,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  CopySourceTagsToRestoredResource = NULL
)

Arguments

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.

Metadata

[required] A set of metadata key-value pairs.

You can get configuration metadata about a resource at the time it was backed up by calling get_recovery_point_restore_metadata. However, values in addition to those provided by get_recovery_point_restore_metadata might be required to restore a resource. For example, you might need to provide a new resource name if the original already exists.

For more information about the metadata for each resource, see the following:

IamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that Backup uses to create the target resource; for example: ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/S3Access⁠.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to start_restore_job. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.

ResourceType

Starts a job to restore a recovery point for one of the following resources:

  • Aurora - Amazon Aurora

  • DocumentDB - Amazon DocumentDB

  • CloudFormation - CloudFormation

  • DynamoDB - Amazon DynamoDB

  • EBS - Amazon Elastic Block Store

  • EC2 - Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud

  • EFS - Amazon Elastic File System

  • FSx - Amazon FSx

  • Neptune - Amazon Neptune

  • RDS - Amazon Relational Database Service

  • Redshift - Amazon Redshift

  • ⁠Storage Gateway⁠ - Storage Gateway

  • S3 - Amazon Simple Storage Service

  • Timestream - Amazon Timestream

  • VirtualMachine - Virtual machines

CopySourceTagsToRestoredResource

This is an optional parameter. If this equals True, tags included in the backup will be copied to the restored resource.

This can only be applied to backups created through Backup.


Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource

Description

Attempts to cancel a job to create a one-time backup of a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_stop_backup_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_stop_backup_job(BackupJobId)

Arguments

BackupJobId

[required] Uniquely identifies a request to Backup to back up a resource.


Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)

Description

Assigns a set of key-value pairs to a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the type of the tagged resource.

ARNs that do not include backup are incompatible with tagging. tag_resource and untag_resource with invalid ARNs will result in an error. Acceptable ARN content can include arn:aws:backup:us-east. Invalid ARN content may look like arn:aws:ec2:us-east.

Tags

[required] Key-value pairs that are used to help organize your resources. You can assign your own metadata to the resources you create. For clarity, this is the structure to assign tags: ⁠[{"Key":"string","Value":"string"}]⁠.


Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)

Description

Removes a set of key-value pairs from a recovery point, backup plan, or backup vault identified by an Amazon Resource Name (ARN)

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeyList)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a resource. The format of the ARN depends on the type of the tagged resource.

ARNs that do not include backup are incompatible with tagging. tag_resource and untag_resource with invalid ARNs will result in an error. Acceptable ARN content can include arn:aws:backup:us-east. Invalid ARN content may look like arn:aws:ec2:us-east.

TagKeyList

[required] The keys to identify which key-value tags to remove from a resource.


Updates the specified backup plan

Description

Updates the specified backup plan. The new version is uniquely identified by its ID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_backup_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_backup_plan(BackupPlanId, BackupPlan)

Arguments

BackupPlanId

[required] The ID of the backup plan.

BackupPlan

[required] The body of a backup plan. Includes a BackupPlanName and one or more sets of Rules.


Updates the specified framework

Description

Updates the specified framework.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_framework/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_framework(
  FrameworkName,
  FrameworkDescription = NULL,
  FrameworkControls = NULL,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL
)

Arguments

FrameworkName

[required] The unique name of a framework. This name is between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_).

FrameworkDescription

An optional description of the framework with a maximum 1,024 characters.

FrameworkControls

The controls that make up the framework. Each control in the list has a name, input parameters, and scope.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to UpdateFrameworkInput. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.


Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup

Description

Updates whether the Amazon Web Services account is opted in to cross-account backup. Returns an error if the account is not an Organizations management account. Use the describe_global_settings API to determine the current settings.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_global_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_global_settings(GlobalSettings = NULL)

Arguments

GlobalSettings

A value for isCrossAccountBackupEnabled and a Region. Example: ⁠update-global-settings --global-settings isCrossAccountBackupEnabled=false --region us-west-2⁠.


This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index

Description

This operation updates the settings of a recovery point index.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_recovery_point_index_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_recovery_point_index_settings(
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn,
  IamRoleArn = NULL,
  Index
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Region where they are created.

Accepted characters include lowercase letters, numbers, and hyphens.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An ARN that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.

IamRoleArn

This specifies the IAM role ARN used for this operation.

For example, arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/S3Access

Index

[required] Index can have 1 of 2 possible values, either ENABLED or DISABLED.

To create a backup index for an eligible ACTIVE recovery point that does not yet have a backup index, set value to ENABLED.

To delete a backup index, set value to DISABLED.


Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point

Description

Sets the transition lifecycle of a recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_recovery_point_lifecycle/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_recovery_point_lifecycle(
  BackupVaultName,
  RecoveryPointArn,
  Lifecycle = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupVaultName

[required] The name of a logical container where backups are stored. Backup vaults are identified by names that are unique to the account used to create them and the Amazon Web Services Region where they are created.

RecoveryPointArn

[required] An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a recovery point; for example, ⁠arn:aws:backup:us-east-1:123456789012:recovery-point:1EB3B5E7-9EB0-435A-A80B-108B488B0D45⁠.

Lifecycle

The lifecycle defines when a protected resource is transitioned to cold storage and when it expires. Backup transitions and expires backups automatically according to the lifecycle that you define.

Backups transitioned to cold storage must be stored in cold storage for a minimum of 90 days. Therefore, the “retention” setting must be 90 days greater than the “transition to cold after days” setting. The “transition to cold after days” setting cannot be changed after a backup has been transitioned to cold.


Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region

Description

Updates the current service opt-in settings for the Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_region_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_region_settings(
  ResourceTypeOptInPreference = NULL,
  ResourceTypeManagementPreference = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceTypeOptInPreference

Updates the list of services along with the opt-in preferences for the Region.

If resource assignments are only based on tags, then service opt-in settings are applied. If a resource type is explicitly assigned to a backup plan, such as Amazon S3, Amazon EC2, or Amazon RDS, it will be included in the backup even if the opt-in is not enabled for that particular service. If both a resource type and tags are specified in a resource assignment, the resource type specified in the backup plan takes priority over the tag condition. Service opt-in settings are disregarded in this situation.

ResourceTypeManagementPreference

Enables or disables full Backup management of backups for a resource type. To enable full Backup management for DynamoDB along with Backup's advanced DynamoDB backup features, follow the procedure to enable advanced DynamoDB backup programmatically.


Updates the specified report plan

Description

Updates the specified report plan.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_report_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_report_plan(
  ReportPlanName,
  ReportPlanDescription = NULL,
  ReportDeliveryChannel = NULL,
  ReportSetting = NULL,
  IdempotencyToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ReportPlanName

[required] The unique name of the report plan. This name is between 1 and 256 characters, starting with a letter, and consisting of letters (a-z, A-Z), numbers (0-9), and underscores (_).

ReportPlanDescription

An optional description of the report plan with a maximum 1,024 characters.

ReportDeliveryChannel

The information about where to deliver your reports, specifically your Amazon S3 bucket name, S3 key prefix, and the formats of your reports.

ReportSetting

The report template for the report. Reports are built using a report template. The report templates are:

RESOURCE_COMPLIANCE_REPORT | CONTROL_COMPLIANCE_REPORT | BACKUP_JOB_REPORT | COPY_JOB_REPORT | RESTORE_JOB_REPORT

If the report template is RESOURCE_COMPLIANCE_REPORT or CONTROL_COMPLIANCE_REPORT, this API resource also describes the report coverage by Amazon Web Services Regions and frameworks.

IdempotencyToken

A customer-chosen string that you can use to distinguish between otherwise identical calls to UpdateReportPlanInput. Retrying a successful request with the same idempotency token results in a success message with no action taken.


This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan

Description

This request will send changes to your specified restore testing plan. RestoreTestingPlanName cannot be updated after it is created.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_restore_testing_plan/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_restore_testing_plan(RestoreTestingPlan, RestoreTestingPlanName)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlan

[required] Specifies the body of a restore testing plan.

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] The name of the restore testing plan name.


Updates the specified restore testing selection

Description

Updates the specified restore testing selection.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/backup_update_restore_testing_selection/ for full documentation.

Usage

backup_update_restore_testing_selection(
  RestoreTestingPlanName,
  RestoreTestingSelection,
  RestoreTestingSelectionName
)

Arguments

RestoreTestingPlanName

[required] The restore testing plan name is required to update the indicated testing plan.

RestoreTestingSelection

[required] To update your restore testing selection, you can use either protected resource ARNs or conditions, but not both. That is, if your selection has ProtectedResourceArns, requesting an update with the parameter ProtectedResourceConditions will be unsuccessful.

RestoreTestingSelectionName

[required] The required restore testing selection name of the restore testing selection you wish to update.


Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager

Description

With Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager, you can manage the lifecycle of your Amazon Web Services resources. You create lifecycle policies, which are used to automate operations on the specified resources.

Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager supports Amazon EBS volumes and snapshots. For information about using Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager with Amazon EBS, see Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager in the Amazon EC2 User Guide.

Usage

dlm(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- dlm(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_lifecycle_policy Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy
delete_lifecycle_policy Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified
get_lifecycle_policies Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies
get_lifecycle_policy Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy
list_tags_for_resource Lists the tags for the specified resource
tag_resource Adds the specified tags to the specified resource
untag_resource Removes the specified tags from the specified resource
update_lifecycle_policy Updates the specified lifecycle policy

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- dlm()
svc$create_lifecycle_policy(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy

Description

Creates an Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager lifecycle policy. Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager supports the following policy types:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_create_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_create_lifecycle_policy(
  ExecutionRoleArn,
  Description,
  State,
  PolicyDetails = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DefaultPolicy = NULL,
  CreateInterval = NULL,
  RetainInterval = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  ExtendDeletion = NULL,
  CrossRegionCopyTargets = NULL,
  Exclusions = NULL
)

Arguments

ExecutionRoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role used to run the operations specified by the lifecycle policy.

Description

[required] A description of the lifecycle policy. The characters ^[0-9A-Za-z _-]+$ are supported.

State

[required] The activation state of the lifecycle policy after creation.

PolicyDetails

The configuration details of the lifecycle policy.

If you create a default policy, you can specify the request parameters either in the request body, or in the PolicyDetails request structure, but not both.

Tags

The tags to apply to the lifecycle policy during creation.

DefaultPolicy

[Default policies only] Specify the type of default policy to create.

  • To create a default policy for EBS snapshots, that creates snapshots of all volumes in the Region that do not have recent backups, specify VOLUME.

  • To create a default policy for EBS-backed AMIs, that creates EBS-backed AMIs from all instances in the Region that do not have recent backups, specify INSTANCE.

CreateInterval

[Default policies only] Specifies how often the policy should run and create snapshots or AMIs. The creation frequency can range from 1 to 7 days. If you do not specify a value, the default is 1.

Default: 1

RetainInterval

[Default policies only] Specifies how long the policy should retain snapshots or AMIs before deleting them. The retention period can range from 2 to 14 days, but it must be greater than the creation frequency to ensure that the policy retains at least 1 snapshot or AMI at any given time. If you do not specify a value, the default is 7.

Default: 7

CopyTags

[Default policies only] Indicates whether the policy should copy tags from the source resource to the snapshot or AMI. If you do not specify a value, the default is false.

Default: false

ExtendDeletion

[Default policies only] Defines the snapshot or AMI retention behavior for the policy if the source volume or instance is deleted, or if the policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state.

By default (ExtendDeletion=false):

  • If a source resource is deleted, Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager will continue to delete previously created snapshots or AMIs, up to but not including the last one, based on the specified retention period. If you want Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager to delete all snapshots or AMIs, including the last one, specify true.

  • If a policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state, Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager stops deleting snapshots and AMIs. If you want Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager to continue deleting snapshots or AMIs, including the last one, if the policy enters one of these states, specify true.

If you enable extended deletion (ExtendDeletion=true), you override both default behaviors simultaneously.

If you do not specify a value, the default is false.

Default: false

CrossRegionCopyTargets

[Default policies only] Specifies destination Regions for snapshot or AMI copies. You can specify up to 3 destination Regions. If you do not want to create cross-Region copies, omit this parameter.

Exclusions

[Default policies only] Specifies exclusion parameters for volumes or instances for which you do not want to create snapshots or AMIs. The policy will not create snapshots or AMIs for target resources that match any of the specified exclusion parameters.


Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified

Description

Deletes the specified lifecycle policy and halts the automated operations that the policy specified.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_delete_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_delete_lifecycle_policy(PolicyId)

Arguments

PolicyId

[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy.


Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies

Description

Gets summary information about all or the specified data lifecycle policies.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_get_lifecycle_policies/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_get_lifecycle_policies(
  PolicyIds = NULL,
  State = NULL,
  ResourceTypes = NULL,
  TargetTags = NULL,
  TagsToAdd = NULL,
  DefaultPolicyType = NULL
)

Arguments

PolicyIds

The identifiers of the data lifecycle policies.

State

The activation state.

ResourceTypes

The resource type.

TargetTags

The target tag for a policy.

Tags are strings in the format key=value.

TagsToAdd

The tags to add to objects created by the policy.

Tags are strings in the format key=value.

These user-defined tags are added in addition to the Amazon Web Services-added lifecycle tags.

DefaultPolicyType

[Default policies only] Specifies the type of default policy to get. Specify one of the following:

  • VOLUME - To get only the default policy for EBS snapshots

  • INSTANCE - To get only the default policy for EBS-backed AMIs

  • ALL - To get all default policies


Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy

Description

Gets detailed information about the specified lifecycle policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_get_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_get_lifecycle_policy(PolicyId)

Arguments

PolicyId

[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy.


Lists the tags for the specified resource

Description

Lists the tags for the specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource.


Adds the specified tags to the specified resource

Description

Adds the specified tags to the specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource.

Tags

[required] One or more tags.


Removes the specified tags from the specified resource

Description

Removes the specified tags from the specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource.

TagKeys

[required] The tag keys.


Updates the specified lifecycle policy

Description

Updates the specified lifecycle policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dlm_update_lifecycle_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dlm_update_lifecycle_policy(
  PolicyId,
  ExecutionRoleArn = NULL,
  State = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  PolicyDetails = NULL,
  CreateInterval = NULL,
  RetainInterval = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  ExtendDeletion = NULL,
  CrossRegionCopyTargets = NULL,
  Exclusions = NULL
)

Arguments

PolicyId

[required] The identifier of the lifecycle policy.

ExecutionRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role used to run the operations specified by the lifecycle policy.

State

The desired activation state of the lifecycle policy after creation.

Description

A description of the lifecycle policy.

PolicyDetails

The configuration of the lifecycle policy. You cannot update the policy type or the resource type.

CreateInterval

[Default policies only] Specifies how often the policy should run and create snapshots or AMIs. The creation frequency can range from 1 to 7 days.

RetainInterval

[Default policies only] Specifies how long the policy should retain snapshots or AMIs before deleting them. The retention period can range from 2 to 14 days, but it must be greater than the creation frequency to ensure that the policy retains at least 1 snapshot or AMI at any given time.

CopyTags

[Default policies only] Indicates whether the policy should copy tags from the source resource to the snapshot or AMI.

ExtendDeletion

[Default policies only] Defines the snapshot or AMI retention behavior for the policy if the source volume or instance is deleted, or if the policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state.

By default (ExtendDeletion=false):

  • If a source resource is deleted, Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager will continue to delete previously created snapshots or AMIs, up to but not including the last one, based on the specified retention period. If you want Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager to delete all snapshots or AMIs, including the last one, specify true.

  • If a policy enters the error, disabled, or deleted state, Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager stops deleting snapshots and AMIs. If you want Amazon Data Lifecycle Manager to continue deleting snapshots or AMIs, including the last one, if the policy enters one of these states, specify true.

If you enable extended deletion (ExtendDeletion=true), you override both default behaviors simultaneously.

Default: false

CrossRegionCopyTargets

[Default policies only] Specifies destination Regions for snapshot or AMI copies. You can specify up to 3 destination Regions. If you do not want to create cross-Region copies, omit this parameter.

Exclusions

[Default policies only] Specifies exclusion parameters for volumes or instances for which you do not want to create snapshots or AMIs. The policy will not create snapshots or AMIs for target resources that match any of the specified exclusion parameters.


Amazon Elastic Block Store

Description

You can use the Amazon Elastic Block Store (Amazon EBS) direct APIs to create Amazon EBS snapshots, write data directly to your snapshots, read data on your snapshots, and identify the differences or changes between two snapshots. If you’re an independent software vendor (ISV) who offers backup services for Amazon EBS, the EBS direct APIs make it more efficient and cost-effective to track incremental changes on your Amazon EBS volumes through snapshots. This can be done without having to create new volumes from snapshots, and then use Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud (Amazon EC2) instances to compare the differences.

You can create incremental snapshots directly from data on-premises into volumes and the cloud to use for quick disaster recovery. With the ability to write and read snapshots, you can write your on-premises data to an snapshot during a disaster. Then after recovery, you can restore it back to Amazon Web Services or on-premises from the snapshot. You no longer need to build and maintain complex mechanisms to copy data to and from Amazon EBS.

This API reference provides detailed information about the actions, data types, parameters, and errors of the EBS direct APIs. For more information about the elements that make up the EBS direct APIs, and examples of how to use them effectively, see Accessing the Contents of an Amazon EBS Snapshot in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide. For more information about the supported Amazon Web Services Regions, endpoints, and service quotas for the EBS direct APIs, see Amazon Elastic Block Store Endpoints and Quotas in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

Usage

ebs(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- ebs(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

complete_snapshot Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it
get_snapshot_block Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot
list_changed_blocks Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage
list_snapshot_blocks Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot
put_snapshot_block Writes a block of data to a snapshot
start_snapshot Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- ebs()
svc$complete_snapshot(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it

Description

Seals and completes the snapshot after all of the required blocks of data have been written to it. Completing the snapshot changes the status to completed. You cannot write new blocks to a snapshot after it has been completed.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_complete_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_complete_snapshot(
  SnapshotId,
  ChangedBlocksCount,
  Checksum = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ChecksumAggregationMethod = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot.

ChangedBlocksCount

[required] The number of blocks that were written to the snapshot.

Checksum

An aggregated Base-64 SHA256 checksum based on the checksums of each written block.

To generate the aggregated checksum using the linear aggregation method, arrange the checksums for each written block in ascending order of their block index, concatenate them to form a single string, and then generate the checksum on the entire string using the SHA256 algorithm.

ChecksumAlgorithm

The algorithm used to generate the checksum. Currently, the only supported algorithm is SHA256.

ChecksumAggregationMethod

The aggregation method used to generate the checksum. Currently, the only supported aggregation method is LINEAR.


Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot

Description

Returns the data in a block in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_get_snapshot_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_get_snapshot_block(SnapshotId, BlockIndex, BlockToken)

Arguments

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot containing the block from which to get data.

If the specified snapshot is encrypted, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the snapshot. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

BlockIndex

[required] The block index of the block in which to read the data. A block index is a logical index in units of 512 KiB blocks. To identify the block index, divide the logical offset of the data in the logical volume by the block size (logical offset of data/524288). The logical offset of the data must be 512 KiB aligned.

BlockToken

[required] The block token of the block from which to get data. You can obtain the BlockToken by running the list_changed_blocks or list_snapshot_blocks operations.


Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage

Description

Returns information about the blocks that are different between two Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshots of the same volume/snapshot lineage.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_list_changed_blocks/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_list_changed_blocks(
  FirstSnapshotId = NULL,
  SecondSnapshotId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  StartingBlockIndex = NULL
)

Arguments

FirstSnapshotId

The ID of the first snapshot to use for the comparison.

The FirstSnapshotID parameter must be specified with a SecondSnapshotId parameter; otherwise, an error occurs.

SecondSnapshotId

[required] The ID of the second snapshot to use for the comparison.

The SecondSnapshotId parameter must be specified with a FirstSnapshotID parameter; otherwise, an error occurs.

NextToken

The token to request the next page of results.

If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored.

MaxResults

The maximum number of blocks to be returned by the request.

Even if additional blocks can be retrieved from the snapshot, the request can return less blocks than MaxResults or an empty array of blocks.

To retrieve the next set of blocks from the snapshot, make another request with the returned NextToken value. The value of NextToken is null when there are no more blocks to return.

StartingBlockIndex

The block index from which the comparison should start.

The list in the response will start from this block index or the next valid block index in the snapshots.

If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored.


Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot

Description

Returns information about the blocks in an Amazon Elastic Block Store snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_list_snapshot_blocks/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_list_snapshot_blocks(
  SnapshotId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  StartingBlockIndex = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot from which to get block indexes and block tokens.

NextToken

The token to request the next page of results.

If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored.

MaxResults

The maximum number of blocks to be returned by the request.

Even if additional blocks can be retrieved from the snapshot, the request can return less blocks than MaxResults or an empty array of blocks.

To retrieve the next set of blocks from the snapshot, make another request with the returned NextToken value. The value of NextToken is null when there are no more blocks to return.

StartingBlockIndex

The block index from which the list should start. The list in the response will start from this block index or the next valid block index in the snapshot.

If you specify NextToken, then StartingBlockIndex is ignored.


Writes a block of data to a snapshot

Description

Writes a block of data to a snapshot. If the specified block contains data, the existing data is overwritten. The target snapshot must be in the pending state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_put_snapshot_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_put_snapshot_block(
  SnapshotId,
  BlockIndex,
  BlockData,
  DataLength,
  Progress = NULL,
  Checksum,
  ChecksumAlgorithm
)

Arguments

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot.

If the specified snapshot is encrypted, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the snapshot. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide..

BlockIndex

[required] The block index of the block in which to write the data. A block index is a logical index in units of 512 KiB blocks. To identify the block index, divide the logical offset of the data in the logical volume by the block size (logical offset of data/524288). The logical offset of the data must be 512 KiB aligned.

BlockData

[required] The data to write to the block.

The block data is not signed as part of the Signature Version 4 signing process. As a result, you must generate and provide a Base64-encoded SHA256 checksum for the block data using the x-amz-Checksum header. Also, you must specify the checksum algorithm using the x-amz-Checksum-Algorithm header. The checksum that you provide is part of the Signature Version 4 signing process. It is validated against a checksum generated by Amazon EBS to ensure the validity and authenticity of the data. If the checksums do not correspond, the request fails. For more information, see Using checksums with the EBS direct APIs in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

DataLength

[required] The size of the data to write to the block, in bytes. Currently, the only supported size is 524288 bytes.

Valid values: 524288

Progress

The progress of the write process, as a percentage.

Checksum

[required] A Base64-encoded SHA256 checksum of the data. Only SHA256 checksums are supported.

ChecksumAlgorithm

[required] The algorithm used to generate the checksum. Currently, the only supported algorithm is SHA256.


Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot

Description

Creates a new Amazon EBS snapshot. The new snapshot enters the pending state after the request completes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/ebs_start_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

ebs_start_snapshot(
  VolumeSize,
  ParentSnapshotId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  ClientToken = NULL,
  Encrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyArn = NULL,
  Timeout = NULL
)

Arguments

VolumeSize

[required] The size of the volume, in GiB. The maximum size is 65536 GiB (64 TiB).

ParentSnapshotId

The ID of the parent snapshot. If there is no parent snapshot, or if you are creating the first snapshot for an on-premises volume, omit this parameter.

You can't specify ParentSnapshotId and Encrypted in the same request. If you specify both parameters, the request fails with ValidationException.

The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

If you specify an encrypted parent snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key that was used to encrypt the parent snapshot. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

Tags

The tags to apply to the snapshot.

Description

A description for the snapshot.

ClientToken

A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. Idempotency ensures that an API request completes only once. With an idempotent request, if the original request completes successfully. The subsequent retries with the same client token return the result from the original successful request and they have no additional effect.

If you do not specify a client token, one is automatically generated by the Amazon Web Services SDK.

For more information, see Idempotency for StartSnapshot API in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

Encrypted

Indicates whether to encrypt the snapshot.

You can't specify Encrypted and ParentSnapshotId in the same request. If you specify both parameters, the request fails with ValidationException.

The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

To create an encrypted snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

KmsKeyArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Key Management Service (KMS) key to be used to encrypt the snapshot.

The encryption status of the snapshot depends on the values that you specify for Encrypted, KmsKeyArn, and ParentSnapshotId, and whether your Amazon Web Services account is enabled for encryption by default. For more information, see Using encryption in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

To create an encrypted snapshot, you must have permission to use the KMS key. For more information, see Permissions to use Key Management Service keys in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

Timeout

The amount of time (in minutes) after which the snapshot is automatically cancelled if:

  • No blocks are written to the snapshot.

  • The snapshot is not completed after writing the last block of data.

If no value is specified, the timeout defaults to 60 minutes.


Amazon Elastic File System

Description

Amazon Elastic File System (Amazon EFS) provides simple, scalable file storage for use with Amazon EC2 Linux and Mac instances in the Amazon Web Services Cloud. With Amazon EFS, storage capacity is elastic, growing and shrinking automatically as you add and remove files, so that your applications have the storage they need, when they need it. For more information, see the Amazon Elastic File System API Reference and the Amazon Elastic File System User Guide.

Usage

efs(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- efs(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_access_point Creates an EFS access point
create_file_system Creates a new, empty file system
create_mount_target Creates a mount target for a file system
create_replication_configuration Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system
create_tags DEPRECATED - CreateTags is deprecated and not maintained
delete_access_point Deletes the specified access point
delete_file_system Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents
delete_file_system_policy Deletes the FileSystemPolicy for the specified file system
delete_mount_target Deletes the specified mount target
delete_replication_configuration Deletes a replication configuration
delete_tags DEPRECATED - DeleteTags is deprecated and not maintained
describe_access_points Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId is provided
describe_account_preferences Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region
describe_backup_policy Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system
describe_file_system_policy Returns the FileSystemPolicy for the specified EFS file system
describe_file_systems Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken or the FileSystemId is provided
describe_lifecycle_configuration Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration object for the specified Amazon EFS file system
describe_mount_targets Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system
describe_mount_target_security_groups Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target
describe_replication_configurations Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system
describe_tags DEPRECATED - The DescribeTags action is deprecated and not maintained
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource
modify_mount_target_security_groups Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target
put_account_preferences Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources
put_backup_policy Updates the file system's backup policy
put_file_system_policy Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy to an Amazon EFS file system
put_lifecycle_configuration Use this action to manage storage for your file system
tag_resource Creates a tag for an EFS resource
untag_resource Removes tags from an EFS resource
update_file_system Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system
update_file_system_protection Updates protection on the file system

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- efs()
# This operation creates a new, encrypted file system with automatic
# backups enabled, and the default generalpurpose performance mode.
svc$create_file_system(
  Backup = TRUE,
  CreationToken = "tokenstring",
  Encrypted = TRUE,
  PerformanceMode = "generalPurpose",
  Tags = list(
    list(
      Key = "Name",
      Value = "MyFileSystem"
    )
  )
)

## End(Not run)


Creates an EFS access point

Description

Creates an EFS access point. An access point is an application-specific view into an EFS file system that applies an operating system user and group, and a file system path, to any file system request made through the access point. The operating system user and group override any identity information provided by the NFS client. The file system path is exposed as the access point's root directory. Applications using the access point can only access data in the application's own directory and any subdirectories. To learn more, see Mounting a file system using EFS access points.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_create_access_point(
  ClientToken,
  Tags = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  PosixUser = NULL,
  RootDirectory = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken

[required] A string of up to 64 ASCII characters that Amazon EFS uses to ensure idempotent creation.

Tags

Creates tags associated with the access point. Each tag is a key-value pair, each key must be unique. For more information, see Tagging Amazon Web Services resources in the Amazon Web Services General Reference Guide.

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the EFS file system that the access point provides access to.

PosixUser

The operating system user and group applied to all file system requests made using the access point.

RootDirectory

Specifies the directory on the EFS file system that the access point exposes as the root directory of your file system to NFS clients using the access point. The clients using the access point can only access the root directory and below. If the RootDirectory \> Path specified does not exist, Amazon EFS creates it and applies the CreationInfo settings when a client connects to an access point. When specifying a RootDirectory, you must provide the Path, and the CreationInfo.

Amazon EFS creates a root directory only if you have provided the CreationInfo: OwnUid, OwnGID, and permissions for the directory. If you do not provide this information, Amazon EFS does not create the root directory. If the root directory does not exist, attempts to mount using the access point will fail.


Creates a new, empty file system

Description

Creates a new, empty file system. The operation requires a creation token in the request that Amazon EFS uses to ensure idempotent creation (calling the operation with same creation token has no effect). If a file system does not currently exist that is owned by the caller's Amazon Web Services account with the specified creation token, this operation does the following:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_create_file_system(
  CreationToken,
  PerformanceMode = NULL,
  Encrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  ThroughputMode = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughputInMibps = NULL,
  AvailabilityZoneName = NULL,
  Backup = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

CreationToken

[required] A string of up to 64 ASCII characters. Amazon EFS uses this to ensure idempotent creation.

PerformanceMode

The performance mode of the file system. We recommend generalPurpose performance mode for all file systems. File systems using the maxIO performance mode can scale to higher levels of aggregate throughput and operations per second with a tradeoff of slightly higher latencies for most file operations. The performance mode can't be changed after the file system has been created. The maxIO mode is not supported on One Zone file systems.

Due to the higher per-operation latencies with Max I/O, we recommend using General Purpose performance mode for all file systems.

Default is generalPurpose.

Encrypted

A Boolean value that, if true, creates an encrypted file system. When creating an encrypted file system, you have the option of specifying an existing Key Management Service key (KMS key). If you don't specify a KMS key, then the default KMS key for Amazon EFS, ⁠/aws/elasticfilesystem⁠, is used to protect the encrypted file system.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key that you want to use to protect the encrypted file system. This parameter is required only if you want to use a non-default KMS key. If this parameter is not specified, the default KMS key for Amazon EFS is used. You can specify a KMS key ID using the following formats:

  • Key ID - A unique identifier of the key, for example ⁠1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠.

  • ARN - An Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the key, for example ⁠arn:aws:kms:us-west-2:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠.

  • Key alias - A previously created display name for a key, for example alias/projectKey1.

  • Key alias ARN - An ARN for a key alias, for example arn:aws:kms:us-west-2:444455556666:alias/projectKey1.

If you use KmsKeyId, you must set the CreateFileSystemRequest$Encrypted parameter to true.

EFS accepts only symmetric KMS keys. You cannot use asymmetric KMS keys with Amazon EFS file systems.

ThroughputMode

Specifies the throughput mode for the file system. The mode can be bursting, provisioned, or elastic. If you set ThroughputMode to provisioned, you must also set a value for ProvisionedThroughputInMibps. After you create the file system, you can decrease your file system's Provisioned throughput or change between the throughput modes, with certain time restrictions. For more information, see Specifying throughput with provisioned mode in the Amazon EFS User Guide.

Default is bursting.

ProvisionedThroughputInMibps

The throughput, measured in mebibytes per second (MiBps), that you want to provision for a file system that you're creating. Required if ThroughputMode is set to provisioned. Valid values are 1-3414 MiBps, with the upper limit depending on Region. To increase this limit, contact Amazon Web Services Support. For more information, see Amazon EFS quotas that you can increase in the Amazon EFS User Guide.

AvailabilityZoneName

For One Zone file systems, specify the Amazon Web Services Availability Zone in which to create the file system. Use the format ⁠us-east-1a⁠ to specify the Availability Zone. For more information about One Zone file systems, see EFS file system types in the Amazon EFS User Guide.

One Zone file systems are not available in all Availability Zones in Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon EFS is available.

Backup

Specifies whether automatic backups are enabled on the file system that you are creating. Set the value to true to enable automatic backups. If you are creating a One Zone file system, automatic backups are enabled by default. For more information, see Automatic backups in the Amazon EFS User Guide.

Default is false. However, if you specify an AvailabilityZoneName, the default is true.

Backup is not available in all Amazon Web Services Regions where Amazon EFS is available.

Tags

Use to create one or more tags associated with the file system. Each tag is a user-defined key-value pair. Name your file system on creation by including a ⁠"Key":"Name","Value":"{value}"⁠ key-value pair. Each key must be unique. For more information, see Tagging Amazon Web Services resources in the Amazon Web Services General Reference Guide.


Creates a mount target for a file system

Description

Creates a mount target for a file system. You can then mount the file system on EC2 instances by using the mount target.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_mount_target/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_create_mount_target(
  FileSystemId,
  SubnetId,
  IpAddress = NULL,
  SecurityGroups = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system for which to create the mount target.

SubnetId

[required] The ID of the subnet to add the mount target in. For One Zone file systems, use the subnet that is associated with the file system's Availability Zone.

IpAddress

Valid IPv4 address within the address range of the specified subnet.

SecurityGroups

Up to five VPC security group IDs, of the form sg-xxxxxxxx. These must be for the same VPC as subnet specified.


Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system

Description

Creates a replication configuration to either a new or existing EFS file system. For more information, see Amazon EFS replication in the Amazon EFS User Guide. The replication configuration specifies the following:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_replication_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_create_replication_configuration(SourceFileSystemId, Destinations)

Arguments

SourceFileSystemId

[required] Specifies the Amazon EFS file system that you want to replicate. This file system cannot already be a source or destination file system in another replication configuration.

Destinations

[required] An array of destination configuration objects. Only one destination configuration object is supported.


DEPRECATED - CreateTags is deprecated and not maintained

Description

DEPRECATED - create_tags is deprecated and not maintained. To create tags for EFS resources, use the API action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_create_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_create_tags(FileSystemId, Tags)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system whose tags you want to modify (String). This operation modifies the tags only, not the file system.

Tags

[required] An array of Tag objects to add. Each Tag object is a key-value pair.


Deletes the specified access point

Description

Deletes the specified access point. After deletion is complete, new clients can no longer connect to the access points. Clients connected to the access point at the time of deletion will continue to function until they terminate their connection.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_access_point(AccessPointId)

Arguments

AccessPointId

[required] The ID of the access point that you want to delete.


Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents

Description

Deletes a file system, permanently severing access to its contents. Upon return, the file system no longer exists and you can't access any contents of the deleted file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_file_system(FileSystemId)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system you want to delete.


Deletes the FileSystemPolicy for the specified file system

Description

Deletes the FileSystemPolicy for the specified file system. The default FileSystemPolicy goes into effect once the existing policy is deleted. For more information about the default file system policy, see Using Resource-based Policies with EFS.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_file_system_policy(FileSystemId)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] Specifies the EFS file system for which to delete the FileSystemPolicy.


Deletes the specified mount target

Description

Deletes the specified mount target.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_mount_target/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_mount_target(MountTargetId)

Arguments

MountTargetId

[required] The ID of the mount target to delete (String).


Deletes a replication configuration

Description

Deletes a replication configuration. Deleting a replication configuration ends the replication process. After a replication configuration is deleted, the destination file system becomes Writeable and its replication overwrite protection is re-enabled. For more information, see Delete a replication configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_replication_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_replication_configuration(SourceFileSystemId, DeletionMode = NULL)

Arguments

SourceFileSystemId

[required] The ID of the source file system in the replication configuration.

DeletionMode

When replicating across Amazon Web Services accounts or across Amazon Web Services Regions, Amazon EFS deletes the replication configuration from both the source and destination account or Region (ALL_CONFIGURATIONS) by default. If there's a configuration or permissions issue that prevents Amazon EFS from deleting the replication configuration from both sides, you can use the LOCAL_CONFIGURATION_ONLY mode to delete the replication configuration from only the local side (the account or Region from which the delete is performed).

Only use the LOCAL_CONFIGURATION_ONLY mode in the case that Amazon EFS is unable to delete the replication configuration in both the source and destination account or Region. Deleting the local configuration leaves the configuration in the other account or Region unrecoverable.

Additionally, do not use this mode for same-account, same-region replication as doing so results in a BadRequest exception error.


DEPRECATED - DeleteTags is deprecated and not maintained

Description

DEPRECATED - delete_tags is deprecated and not maintained. To remove tags from EFS resources, use the API action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_delete_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_delete_tags(FileSystemId, TagKeys)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system whose tags you want to delete (String).

TagKeys

[required] A list of tag keys to delete.


Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId is provided

Description

Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS access point if the AccessPointId is provided. If you provide an EFS FileSystemId, it returns descriptions of all access points for that file system. You can provide either an AccessPointId or a FileSystemId in the request, but not both.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_access_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_access_points(
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  AccessPointId = NULL,
  FileSystemId = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxResults

(Optional) When retrieving all access points for a file system, you can optionally specify the MaxItems parameter to limit the number of objects returned in a response. The default value is 100.

NextToken

NextToken is present if the response is paginated. You can use NextMarker in the subsequent request to fetch the next page of access point descriptions.

AccessPointId

(Optional) Specifies an EFS access point to describe in the response; mutually exclusive with FileSystemId.

FileSystemId

(Optional) If you provide a FileSystemId, EFS returns all access points for that file system; mutually exclusive with AccessPointId.


Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Returns the account preferences settings for the Amazon Web Services account associated with the user making the request, in the current Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_account_preferences/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_account_preferences(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

(Optional) You can use NextToken in a subsequent request to fetch the next page of Amazon Web Services account preferences if the response payload was paginated.

MaxResults

(Optional) When retrieving account preferences, you can optionally specify the MaxItems parameter to limit the number of objects returned in a response. The default value is 100.


Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system

Description

Returns the backup policy for the specified EFS file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_backup_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_backup_policy(FileSystemId)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] Specifies which EFS file system for which to retrieve the BackupPolicy.


Returns the FileSystemPolicy for the specified EFS file system

Description

Returns the FileSystemPolicy for the specified EFS file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_file_system_policy(FileSystemId)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] Specifies which EFS file system to retrieve the FileSystemPolicy for.


Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken or the FileSystemId is provided

Description

Returns the description of a specific Amazon EFS file system if either the file system CreationToken or the FileSystemId is provided. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all file systems owned by the caller's Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_file_systems/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_file_systems(
  MaxItems = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  CreationToken = NULL,
  FileSystemId = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxItems

(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of file systems to return in the response (integer). This number is automatically set to 100. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 file systems.

Marker

(Optional) Opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_file_systems operation (String). If present, specifies to continue the list from where the returning call had left off.

CreationToken

(Optional) Restricts the list to the file system with this creation token (String). You specify a creation token when you create an Amazon EFS file system.

FileSystemId

(Optional) ID of the file system whose description you want to retrieve (String).


Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration object for the specified Amazon EFS file system

Description

Returns the current LifecycleConfiguration object for the specified Amazon EFS file system. Lifecycle management uses the LifecycleConfiguration object to identify when to move files between storage classes. For a file system without a LifecycleConfiguration object, the call returns an empty array in the response.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_lifecycle_configuration(FileSystemId)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system whose LifecycleConfiguration object you want to retrieve (String).


Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target

Description

Returns the security groups currently in effect for a mount target. This operation requires that the network interface of the mount target has been created and the lifecycle state of the mount target is not deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_mount_target_security_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_mount_target_security_groups(MountTargetId)

Arguments

MountTargetId

[required] The ID of the mount target whose security groups you want to retrieve.


Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system

Description

Returns the descriptions of all the current mount targets, or a specific mount target, for a file system. When requesting all of the current mount targets, the order of mount targets returned in the response is unspecified.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_mount_targets/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_mount_targets(
  MaxItems = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  FileSystemId = NULL,
  MountTargetId = NULL,
  AccessPointId = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxItems

(Optional) Maximum number of mount targets to return in the response. Currently, this number is automatically set to 10, and other values are ignored. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 mount targets.

Marker

(Optional) Opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_mount_targets operation (String). If present, it specifies to continue the list from where the previous returning call left off.

FileSystemId

(Optional) ID of the file system whose mount targets you want to list (String). It must be included in your request if an AccessPointId or MountTargetId is not included. Accepts either a file system ID or ARN as input.

MountTargetId

(Optional) ID of the mount target that you want to have described (String). It must be included in your request if FileSystemId is not included. Accepts either a mount target ID or ARN as input.

AccessPointId

(Optional) The ID of the access point whose mount targets that you want to list. It must be included in your request if a FileSystemId or MountTargetId is not included in your request. Accepts either an access point ID or ARN as input.


Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system

Description

Retrieves the replication configuration for a specific file system. If a file system is not specified, all of the replication configurations for the Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region are retrieved.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_replication_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_replication_configurations(
  FileSystemId = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

You can retrieve the replication configuration for a specific file system by providing its file system ID. For cross-account,cross-region replication, an account can only describe the replication configuration for a file system in its own Region.

NextToken

NextToken is present if the response is paginated. You can use NextToken in a subsequent request to fetch the next page of output.

MaxResults

(Optional) To limit the number of objects returned in a response, you can specify the MaxItems parameter. The default value is 100.


DEPRECATED - The DescribeTags action is deprecated and not maintained

Description

DEPRECATED - The describe_tags action is deprecated and not maintained. To view tags associated with EFS resources, use the list_tags_for_resource API action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_describe_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_describe_tags(MaxItems = NULL, Marker = NULL, FileSystemId)

Arguments

MaxItems

(Optional) The maximum number of file system tags to return in the response. Currently, this number is automatically set to 100, and other values are ignored. The response is paginated at 100 per page if you have more than 100 tags.

Marker

(Optional) An opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_tags operation (String). If present, it specifies to continue the list from where the previous call left off.

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system whose tag set you want to retrieve.


Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource

Description

Lists all tags for a top-level EFS resource. You must provide the ID of the resource that you want to retrieve the tags for.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceId, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceId

[required] Specifies the EFS resource you want to retrieve tags for. You can retrieve tags for EFS file systems and access points using this API endpoint.

MaxResults

(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of tag objects to return in the response. The default value is 100.

NextToken

(Optional) You can use NextToken in a subsequent request to fetch the next page of access point descriptions if the response payload was paginated.


Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target

Description

Modifies the set of security groups in effect for a mount target.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_modify_mount_target_security_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_modify_mount_target_security_groups(MountTargetId, SecurityGroups = NULL)

Arguments

MountTargetId

[required] The ID of the mount target whose security groups you want to modify.

SecurityGroups

An array of up to five VPC security group IDs.


Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources

Description

Use this operation to set the account preference in the current Amazon Web Services Region to use long 17 character (63 bit) or short 8 character (32 bit) resource IDs for new EFS file system and mount target resources. All existing resource IDs are not affected by any changes you make. You can set the ID preference during the opt-in period as EFS transitions to long resource IDs. For more information, see Managing Amazon EFS resource IDs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_account_preferences/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_put_account_preferences(ResourceIdType)

Arguments

ResourceIdType

[required] Specifies the EFS resource ID preference to set for the user's Amazon Web Services account, in the current Amazon Web Services Region, either LONG_ID (17 characters), or SHORT_ID (8 characters).

Starting in October, 2021, you will receive an error when setting the account preference to SHORT_ID. Contact Amazon Web Services support if you receive an error and must use short IDs for file system and mount target resources.


Updates the file system's backup policy

Description

Updates the file system's backup policy. Use this action to start or stop automatic backups of the file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_backup_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_put_backup_policy(FileSystemId, BackupPolicy)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] Specifies which EFS file system to update the backup policy for.

BackupPolicy

[required] The backup policy included in the put_backup_policy request.


Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy to an Amazon EFS file system

Description

Applies an Amazon EFS FileSystemPolicy to an Amazon EFS file system. A file system policy is an IAM resource-based policy and can contain multiple policy statements. A file system always has exactly one file system policy, which can be the default policy or an explicit policy set or updated using this API operation. EFS file system policies have a 20,000 character limit. When an explicit policy is set, it overrides the default policy. For more information about the default file system policy, see Default EFS file system policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_file_system_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_put_file_system_policy(
  FileSystemId,
  Policy,
  BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the EFS file system that you want to create or update the FileSystemPolicy for.

Policy

[required] The FileSystemPolicy that you're creating. Accepts a JSON formatted policy definition. EFS file system policies have a 20,000 character limit. To find out more about the elements that make up a file system policy, see Resource-based policies within Amazon EFS.

BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck

(Optional) A boolean that specifies whether or not to bypass the FileSystemPolicy lockout safety check. The lockout safety check determines whether the policy in the request will lock out, or prevent, the IAM principal that is making the request from making future put_file_system_policy requests on this file system. Set BypassPolicyLockoutSafetyCheck to True only when you intend to prevent the IAM principal that is making the request from making subsequent put_file_system_policy requests on this file system. The default value is False.


Use this action to manage storage for your file system

Description

Use this action to manage storage for your file system. A LifecycleConfiguration consists of one or more LifecyclePolicy objects that define the following:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_put_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_put_lifecycle_configuration(FileSystemId, LifecyclePolicies)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system for which you are creating the LifecycleConfiguration object (String).

LifecyclePolicies

[required] An array of LifecyclePolicy objects that define the file system's LifecycleConfiguration object. A LifecycleConfiguration object informs lifecycle management of the following:

  • TransitionToIA – When to move files in the file system from primary storage (Standard storage class) into the Infrequent Access (IA) storage.

  • TransitionToArchive – When to move files in the file system from their current storage class (either IA or Standard storage) into the Archive storage.

    File systems cannot transition into Archive storage before transitioning into IA storage. Therefore, TransitionToArchive must either not be set or must be later than TransitionToIA.

    The Archive storage class is available only for file systems that use the Elastic throughput mode and the General Purpose performance mode.

  • TransitionToPrimaryStorageClass – Whether to move files in the file system back to primary storage (Standard storage class) after they are accessed in IA or Archive storage.

When using the put-lifecycle-configuration CLI command or the put_lifecycle_configuration API action, Amazon EFS requires that each LifecyclePolicy object have only a single transition. This means that in a request body, LifecyclePolicies must be structured as an array of LifecyclePolicy objects, one object for each storage transition. See the example requests in the following section for more information.


Creates a tag for an EFS resource

Description

Creates a tag for an EFS resource. You can create tags for EFS file systems and access points using this API operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_tag_resource(ResourceId, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceId

[required] The ID specifying the EFS resource that you want to create a tag for.

Tags

[required] An array of Tag objects to add. Each Tag object is a key-value pair.


Removes tags from an EFS resource

Description

Removes tags from an EFS resource. You can remove tags from EFS file systems and access points using this API operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_untag_resource(ResourceId, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceId

[required] Specifies the EFS resource that you want to remove tags from.

TagKeys

[required] The keys of the key-value tag pairs that you want to remove from the specified EFS resource.


Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system

Description

Updates the throughput mode or the amount of provisioned throughput of an existing file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_update_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_update_file_system(
  FileSystemId,
  ThroughputMode = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughputInMibps = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system that you want to update.

ThroughputMode

(Optional) Updates the file system's throughput mode. If you're not updating your throughput mode, you don't need to provide this value in your request. If you are changing the ThroughputMode to provisioned, you must also set a value for ProvisionedThroughputInMibps.

ProvisionedThroughputInMibps

(Optional) The throughput, measured in mebibytes per second (MiBps), that you want to provision for a file system that you're creating. Required if ThroughputMode is set to provisioned. Valid values are 1-3414 MiBps, with the upper limit depending on Region. To increase this limit, contact Amazon Web Services Support. For more information, see Amazon EFS quotas that you can increase in the Amazon EFS User Guide.


Updates protection on the file system

Description

Updates protection on the file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/efs_update_file_system_protection/ for full documentation.

Usage

efs_update_file_system_protection(
  FileSystemId,
  ReplicationOverwriteProtection = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system to update.

ReplicationOverwriteProtection

The status of the file system's replication overwrite protection.

  • ENABLED – The file system cannot be used as the destination file system in a replication configuration. The file system is writeable. Replication overwrite protection is ENABLED by default.

  • DISABLED – The file system can be used as the destination file system in a replication configuration. The file system is read-only and can only be modified by EFS replication.

  • REPLICATING – The file system is being used as the destination file system in a replication configuration. The file system is read-only and is only modified only by EFS replication.

If the replication configuration is deleted, the file system's replication overwrite protection is re-enabled and the file system becomes writeable.


FinSpace Public API

Description

The FinSpace APIs let you take actions inside the FinSpace.

Usage

finspacedata(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- finspacedata(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

associate_user_to_permission_group Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace
create_changeset Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset
create_dataset Creates a new FinSpace Dataset
create_data_view Creates a Dataview for a Dataset
create_permission_group Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace
create_user Creates a new user in FinSpace
delete_dataset Deletes a FinSpace Dataset
delete_permission_group Deletes a permission group
disable_user Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user
disassociate_user_from_permission_group Removes a user from a permission group
enable_user Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API
get_changeset Get information about a Changeset
get_dataset Returns information about a Dataset
get_data_view Gets information about a Dataview
get_external_data_view_access_details Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location
get_permission_group Retrieves the details of a specific permission group
get_programmatic_access_credentials Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK
get_user Retrieves details for a specific user
get_working_location A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook
list_changesets Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset
list_datasets Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to
list_data_views Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset
list_permission_groups Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace
list_permission_groups_by_user Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user
list_users Lists all available users in FinSpace
list_users_by_permission_group Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group
reset_user_password Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one
update_changeset Updates a FinSpace Changeset
update_dataset Updates a FinSpace Dataset
update_permission_group Modifies the details of a permission group
update_user Modifies the details of the specified user

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- finspacedata()
svc$associate_user_to_permission_group(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace

Description

Adds a user to a permission group to grant permissions for actions a user can perform in FinSpace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_associate_user_to_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_associate_user_to_permission_group(
  permissionGroupId,
  userId,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group.

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset

Description

Creates a new Changeset in a FinSpace Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_changeset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_create_changeset(
  clientToken = NULL,
  datasetId,
  changeType,
  sourceParams,
  formatParams
)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset where the Changeset will be created.

changeType

[required] The option to indicate how a Changeset will be applied to a Dataset.

  • REPLACE – Changeset will be considered as a replacement to all prior loaded Changesets.

  • APPEND – Changeset will be considered as an addition to the end of all prior loaded Changesets.

  • MODIFY – Changeset is considered as a replacement to a specific prior ingested Changeset.

sourceParams

[required] Options that define the location of the data being ingested (s3SourcePath) and the source of the changeset (sourceType).

Both s3SourcePath and sourceType are required attributes.

Here is an example of how you could specify the sourceParams:

⁠"sourceParams": { "s3SourcePath": "s3://finspace-landing-us-east-2-bk7gcfvitndqa6ebnvys4d/scratch/wr5hh8pwkpqqkxa4sxrmcw/ingestion/equity.csv", "sourceType": "S3" }⁠

The S3 path that you specify must allow the FinSpace role access. To do that, you first need to configure the IAM policy on S3 bucket. For more information, see Loading data from an Amazon S3 Bucket using the FinSpace API section.

formatParams

[required] Options that define the structure of the source file(s) including the format type (formatType), header row (withHeader), data separation character (separator) and the type of compression (compression).

formatType is a required attribute and can have the following values:

  • PARQUET – Parquet source file format.

  • CSV – CSV source file format.

  • JSON – JSON source file format.

  • XML – XML source file format.

Here is an example of how you could specify the formatParams:

⁠"formatParams": { "formatType": "CSV", "withHeader": "true", "separator": ",", "compression":"None" }⁠

Note that if you only provide formatType as CSV, the rest of the attributes will automatically default to CSV values as following:

⁠{ "withHeader": "true", "separator": "," }⁠

For more information about supported file formats, see Supported Data Types and File Formats in the FinSpace User Guide.


Creates a Dataview for a Dataset

Description

Creates a Dataview for a Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_data_view/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_create_data_view(
  clientToken = NULL,
  datasetId,
  autoUpdate = NULL,
  sortColumns = NULL,
  partitionColumns = NULL,
  asOfTimestamp = NULL,
  destinationTypeParams
)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetId

[required] The unique Dataset identifier that is used to create a Dataview.

autoUpdate

Flag to indicate Dataview should be updated automatically.

sortColumns

Columns to be used for sorting the data.

partitionColumns

Ordered set of column names used to partition data.

asOfTimestamp

Beginning time to use for the Dataview. The value is determined as epoch time in milliseconds. For example, the value for Monday, November 1, 2021 12:00:00 PM UTC is specified as 1635768000000.

destinationTypeParams

[required] Options that define the destination type for the Dataview.


Creates a new FinSpace Dataset

Description

Creates a new FinSpace Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_dataset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_create_dataset(
  clientToken = NULL,
  datasetTitle,
  kind,
  datasetDescription = NULL,
  ownerInfo = NULL,
  permissionGroupParams,
  alias = NULL,
  schemaDefinition = NULL
)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetTitle

[required] Display title for a FinSpace Dataset.

kind

[required] The format in which Dataset data is structured.

  • TABULAR – Data is structured in a tabular format.

  • NON_TABULAR – Data is structured in a non-tabular format.

datasetDescription

Description of a Dataset.

ownerInfo

Contact information for a Dataset owner.

permissionGroupParams

[required] Permission group parameters for Dataset permissions.

alias

The unique resource identifier for a Dataset.

schemaDefinition

Definition for a schema on a tabular Dataset.


Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace

Description

Creates a group of permissions for various actions that a user can perform in FinSpace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_create_permission_group(
  name,
  description = NULL,
  applicationPermissions,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

name

[required] The name of the permission group.

description

A brief description for the permission group.

applicationPermissions

[required] The option to indicate FinSpace application permissions that are granted to a specific group.

When assigning application permissions, be aware that the permission ManageUsersAndGroups allows users to grant themselves or others access to any functionality in their FinSpace environment's application. It should only be granted to trusted users.

  • create_dataset – Group members can create new datasets.

  • ManageClusters – Group members can manage Apache Spark clusters from FinSpace notebooks.

  • ManageUsersAndGroups – Group members can manage users and permission groups. This is a privileged permission that allows users to grant themselves or others access to any functionality in the application. It should only be granted to trusted users.

  • ManageAttributeSets – Group members can manage attribute sets.

  • ViewAuditData – Group members can view audit data.

  • AccessNotebooks – Group members will have access to FinSpace notebooks.

  • GetTemporaryCredentials – Group members can get temporary API credentials.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Creates a new user in FinSpace

Description

Creates a new user in FinSpace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_create_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_create_user(
  emailAddress,
  type,
  firstName = NULL,
  lastName = NULL,
  apiAccess = NULL,
  apiAccessPrincipalArn = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

emailAddress

[required] The email address of the user that you want to register. The email address serves as a uniquer identifier for each user and cannot be changed after it's created.

type

[required] The option to indicate the type of user. Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:

  • SUPER_USER – A user with permission to all the functionality and data in FinSpace.

  • APP_USER – A user with specific permissions in FinSpace. The users are assigned permissions by adding them to a permission group.

firstName

The first name of the user that you want to register.

lastName

The last name of the user that you want to register.

apiAccess

The option to indicate whether the user can use the get_programmatic_access_credentials API to obtain credentials that can then be used to access other FinSpace Data API operations.

  • ENABLED – The user has permissions to use the APIs.

  • DISABLED – The user does not have permissions to use any APIs.

apiAccessPrincipalArn

The ARN identifier of an AWS user or role that is allowed to call the get_programmatic_access_credentials API to obtain a credentials token for a specific FinSpace user. This must be an IAM role within your FinSpace account.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Deletes a FinSpace Dataset

Description

Deletes a FinSpace Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_delete_dataset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_delete_dataset(clientToken = NULL, datasetId)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier of the Dataset to be deleted.


Deletes a permission group

Description

Deletes a permission group. This action is irreversible.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_delete_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_delete_permission_group(permissionGroupId, clientToken = NULL)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group that you want to delete.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user

Description

Denies access to the FinSpace web application and API for the specified user.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_disable_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_disable_user(userId, clientToken = NULL)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to deactivate.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Removes a user from a permission group

Description

Removes a user from a permission group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_disassociate_user_from_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_disassociate_user_from_permission_group(
  permissionGroupId,
  userId,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group.

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API

Description

Allows the specified user to access the FinSpace web application and API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_enable_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_enable_user(userId, clientToken = NULL)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to activate.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Get information about a Changeset

Description

Get information about a Changeset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_changeset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_changeset(datasetId, changesetId)

Arguments

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset where the Changeset is created.

changesetId

[required] The unique identifier of the Changeset for which to get data.


Gets information about a Dataview

Description

Gets information about a Dataview.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_data_view/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_data_view(dataViewId, datasetId)

Arguments

dataViewId

[required] The unique identifier for the Dataview.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset used in the Dataview.


Returns information about a Dataset

Description

Returns information about a Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_dataset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_dataset(datasetId)

Arguments

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for a Dataset.


Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location

Description

Returns the credentials to access the external Dataview from an S3 location. To call this API:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_external_data_view_access_details/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_external_data_view_access_details(dataViewId, datasetId)

Arguments

dataViewId

[required] The unique identifier for the Dataview that you want to access.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset.


Retrieves the details of a specific permission group

Description

Retrieves the details of a specific permission group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_permission_group(permissionGroupId)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group.


Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK

Description

Request programmatic credentials to use with FinSpace SDK. For more information, see Step 2. Access credentials programmatically using IAM access key id and secret access key.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_programmatic_access_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_programmatic_access_credentials(
  durationInMinutes = NULL,
  environmentId
)

Arguments

durationInMinutes

The time duration in which the credentials remain valid.

environmentId

[required] The FinSpace environment identifier.


Retrieves details for a specific user

Description

Retrieves details for a specific user.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_user(userId)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier of the user to get data for.


A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook

Description

A temporary Amazon S3 location, where you can copy your files from a source location to stage or use as a scratch space in FinSpace notebook.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_get_working_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_get_working_location(locationType = NULL)

Arguments

locationType

Specify the type of the working location.

  • SAGEMAKER – Use the Amazon S3 location as a temporary location to store data content when working with FinSpace Notebooks that run on SageMaker studio.

  • INGESTION – Use the Amazon S3 location as a staging location to copy your data content and then use the location with the Changeset creation operation.


Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset

Description

Lists the FinSpace Changesets for a Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_changesets/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_changesets(datasetId, maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)

Arguments

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset to which the Changeset belongs.

maxResults

The maximum number of results per page.

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.


Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset

Description

Lists all available Dataviews for a Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_data_views/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_data_views(datasetId, nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)

Arguments

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier of the Dataset for which to retrieve Dataviews.

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

The maximum number of results per page.


Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to

Description

Lists all of the active Datasets that a user has access to.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_datasets/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_datasets(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)

Arguments

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

The maximum number of results per page.


Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace

Description

Lists all available permission groups in FinSpace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_permission_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_permission_groups(nextToken = NULL, maxResults)

Arguments

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

[required] The maximum number of results per page.


Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user

Description

Lists all the permission groups that are associated with a specific user.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_permission_groups_by_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_permission_groups_by_user(
  userId,
  nextToken = NULL,
  maxResults
)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user.

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

[required] The maximum number of results per page.


Lists all available users in FinSpace

Description

Lists all available users in FinSpace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_users/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_users(nextToken = NULL, maxResults)

Arguments

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

[required] The maximum number of results per page.


Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group

Description

Lists details of all the users in a specific permission group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_list_users_by_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_list_users_by_permission_group(
  permissionGroupId,
  nextToken = NULL,
  maxResults
)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group.

nextToken

A token that indicates where a results page should begin.

maxResults

[required] The maximum number of results per page.


Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one

Description

Resets the password for a specified user ID and generates a temporary one. Only a superuser can reset password for other users. Resetting the password immediately invalidates the previous password associated with the user.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_reset_user_password/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_reset_user_password(userId, clientToken = NULL)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier of the user that a temporary password is requested for.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Updates a FinSpace Changeset

Description

Updates a FinSpace Changeset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_changeset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_update_changeset(
  clientToken = NULL,
  datasetId,
  changesetId,
  sourceParams,
  formatParams
)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the FinSpace Dataset in which the Changeset is created.

changesetId

[required] The unique identifier for the Changeset to update.

sourceParams

[required] Options that define the location of the data being ingested (s3SourcePath) and the source of the changeset (sourceType).

Both s3SourcePath and sourceType are required attributes.

Here is an example of how you could specify the sourceParams:

⁠"sourceParams": { "s3SourcePath": "s3://finspace-landing-us-east-2-bk7gcfvitndqa6ebnvys4d/scratch/wr5hh8pwkpqqkxa4sxrmcw/ingestion/equity.csv", "sourceType": "S3" }⁠

The S3 path that you specify must allow the FinSpace role access. To do that, you first need to configure the IAM policy on S3 bucket. For more information, see Loading data from an Amazon S3 Bucket using the FinSpace APIsection.

formatParams

[required] Options that define the structure of the source file(s) including the format type (formatType), header row (withHeader), data separation character (separator) and the type of compression (compression).

formatType is a required attribute and can have the following values:

  • PARQUET – Parquet source file format.

  • CSV – CSV source file format.

  • JSON – JSON source file format.

  • XML – XML source file format.

Here is an example of how you could specify the formatParams:

⁠"formatParams": { "formatType": "CSV", "withHeader": "true", "separator": ",", "compression":"None" }⁠

Note that if you only provide formatType as CSV, the rest of the attributes will automatically default to CSV values as following:

⁠{ "withHeader": "true", "separator": "," }⁠

For more information about supported file formats, see Supported Data Types and File Formats in the FinSpace User Guide.


Updates a FinSpace Dataset

Description

Updates a FinSpace Dataset.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_dataset/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_update_dataset(
  clientToken = NULL,
  datasetId,
  datasetTitle,
  kind,
  datasetDescription = NULL,
  alias = NULL,
  schemaDefinition = NULL
)

Arguments

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.

datasetId

[required] The unique identifier for the Dataset to update.

datasetTitle

[required] A display title for the Dataset.

kind

[required] The format in which the Dataset data is structured.

  • TABULAR – Data is structured in a tabular format.

  • NON_TABULAR – Data is structured in a non-tabular format.

datasetDescription

A description for the Dataset.

alias

The unique resource identifier for a Dataset.

schemaDefinition

Definition for a schema on a tabular Dataset.


Modifies the details of a permission group

Description

Modifies the details of a permission group. You cannot modify a permissionGroupID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_permission_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_update_permission_group(
  permissionGroupId,
  name = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  applicationPermissions = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

permissionGroupId

[required] The unique identifier for the permission group to update.

name

The name of the permission group.

description

A brief description for the permission group.

applicationPermissions

The permissions that are granted to a specific group for accessing the FinSpace application.

When assigning application permissions, be aware that the permission ManageUsersAndGroups allows users to grant themselves or others access to any functionality in their FinSpace environment's application. It should only be granted to trusted users.

  • create_dataset – Group members can create new datasets.

  • ManageClusters – Group members can manage Apache Spark clusters from FinSpace notebooks.

  • ManageUsersAndGroups – Group members can manage users and permission groups. This is a privileged permission that allows users to grant themselves or others access to any functionality in the application. It should only be granted to trusted users.

  • ManageAttributeSets – Group members can manage attribute sets.

  • ViewAuditData – Group members can view audit data.

  • AccessNotebooks – Group members will have access to FinSpace notebooks.

  • GetTemporaryCredentials – Group members can get temporary API credentials.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Modifies the details of the specified user

Description

Modifies the details of the specified user. You cannot update the userId for a user.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/finspacedata_update_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

finspacedata_update_user(
  userId,
  type = NULL,
  firstName = NULL,
  lastName = NULL,
  apiAccess = NULL,
  apiAccessPrincipalArn = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

userId

[required] The unique identifier for the user that you want to update.

type

The option to indicate the type of user.

  • SUPER_USER– A user with permission to all the functionality and data in FinSpace.

  • APP_USER – A user with specific permissions in FinSpace. The users are assigned permissions by adding them to a permission group.

firstName

The first name of the user.

lastName

The last name of the user.

apiAccess

The option to indicate whether the user can use the get_programmatic_access_credentials API to obtain credentials that can then be used to access other FinSpace Data API operations.

  • ENABLED – The user has permissions to use the APIs.

  • DISABLED – The user does not have permissions to use any APIs.

apiAccessPrincipalArn

The ARN identifier of an AWS user or role that is allowed to call the get_programmatic_access_credentials API to obtain a credentials token for a specific FinSpace user. This must be an IAM role within your FinSpace account.

clientToken

A token that ensures idempotency. This token expires in 10 minutes.


Amazon FSx

Description

Amazon FSx is a fully managed service that makes it easy for storage and application administrators to launch and use shared file storage.

Usage

fsx(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- fsx(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

associate_file_system_aliases Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
cancel_data_repository_task Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING or EXECUTING state
copy_backup Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy)
copy_snapshot_and_update_volume Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
create_backup Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
create_data_repository_association Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA)
create_data_repository_task Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task
create_file_cache Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource
create_file_system Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system
create_file_system_from_backup Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup
create_snapshot Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume
create_storage_virtual_machine Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system
create_volume Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume
create_volume_from_backup Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup
delete_backup Deletes an Amazon FSx backup
delete_data_repository_association Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system
delete_file_cache Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource
delete_file_system Deletes a file system
delete_snapshot Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot
delete_storage_virtual_machine Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)
delete_volume Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume
describe_backups Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds value is provided for that backup
describe_data_repository_associations Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request
describe_data_repository_tasks Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request
describe_file_caches Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds value is provided for that cache
describe_file_system_aliases Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
describe_file_systems Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds value is provided for that file system
describe_shared_vpc_configuration Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner
describe_snapshots Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds value is provided
describe_storage_virtual_machines Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs)
describe_volumes Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes
disassociate_file_system_aliases Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system
list_tags_for_resource Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources
release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system
restore_volume_from_snapshot Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot
start_misconfigured_state_recovery After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system
tag_resource Tags an Amazon FSx resource
untag_resource This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource
update_data_repository_association Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system
update_file_cache Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource
update_file_system Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system
update_shared_vpc_configuration Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner
update_snapshot Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot
update_storage_virtual_machine Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)
update_volume Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- fsx()
# This operation copies an Amazon FSx backup.
svc$copy_backup(
  SourceBackupId = "backup-03e3c82e0183b7b6b",
  SourceRegion = "us-east-2"
)

## End(Not run)


Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system

Description

Use this action to associate one or more Domain Name Server (DNS) aliases with an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. A file system can have a maximum of 50 DNS aliases associated with it at any one time. If you try to associate a DNS alias that is already associated with the file system, FSx takes no action on that alias in the request. For more information, see Working with DNS Aliases and Walkthrough 5: Using DNS aliases to access your file system, including additional steps you must take to be able to access your file system using a DNS alias.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_associate_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_associate_file_system_aliases(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  Aliases
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
FileSystemId

[required] Specifies the file system with which you want to associate one or more DNS aliases.

Aliases

[required] An array of one or more DNS alias names to associate with the file system. The alias name has to comply with the following formatting requirements:

  • Formatted as a fully-qualified domain name (FQDN), hostname.domain , for example, accounting.corp.example.com.

  • Can contain alphanumeric characters and the hyphen (-).

  • Cannot start or end with a hyphen.

  • Can start with a numeric.

For DNS alias names, Amazon FSx stores alphabetic characters as lowercase letters (a-z), regardless of how you specify them: as uppercase letters, lowercase letters, or the corresponding letters in escape codes.


Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING or EXECUTING state

Description

Cancels an existing Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task if that task is in either the PENDING or EXECUTING state. When you cancel an export task, Amazon FSx does the following.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_cancel_data_repository_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_cancel_data_repository_task(TaskId)

Arguments

TaskId

[required] Specifies the data repository task to cancel.


Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy)

Description

Copies an existing backup within the same Amazon Web Services account to another Amazon Web Services Region (cross-Region copy) or within the same Amazon Web Services Region (in-Region copy). You can have up to five backup copy requests in progress to a single destination Region per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_copy_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_copy_backup(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  SourceBackupId,
  SourceRegion = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
SourceBackupId

[required] The ID of the source backup. Specifies the ID of the backup that's being copied.

SourceRegion

The source Amazon Web Services Region of the backup. Specifies the Amazon Web Services Region from which the backup is being copied. The source and destination Regions must be in the same Amazon Web Services partition. If you don't specify a Region, SourceRegion defaults to the Region where the request is sent from (in-Region copy).

KmsKeyId
CopyTags

A Boolean flag indicating whether tags from the source backup should be copied to the backup copy. This value defaults to false.

If you set CopyTags to true and the source backup has existing tags, you can use the Tags parameter to create new tags, provided that the sum of the source backup tags and the new tags doesn't exceed 50. Both sets of tags are merged. If there are tag conflicts (for example, two tags with the same key but different values), the tags created with the Tags parameter take precedence.

Tags

Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system

Description

Updates an existing volume by using a snapshot from another Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system. For more information, see on-demand data replication in the Amazon FSx for OpenZFS User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_copy_snapshot_and_update_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_copy_snapshot_and_update_volume(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  VolumeId,
  SourceSnapshotARN,
  CopyStrategy = NULL,
  Options = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
VolumeId

[required] Specifies the ID of the volume that you are copying the snapshot to.

SourceSnapshotARN

[required]

CopyStrategy

Specifies the strategy to use when copying data from a snapshot to the volume.

  • FULL_COPY - Copies all data from the snapshot to the volume.

  • INCREMENTAL_COPY - Copies only the snapshot data that's changed since the previous replication.

CLONE isn't a valid copy strategy option for the copy_snapshot_and_update_volume operation.

Options

Confirms that you want to delete data on the destination volume that wasn’t there during the previous snapshot replication.

Your replication will fail if you don’t include an option for a specific type of data and that data is on your destination. For example, if you don’t include DELETE_INTERMEDIATE_SNAPSHOTS and there are intermediate snapshots on the destination, you can’t copy the snapshot.

  • DELETE_INTERMEDIATE_SNAPSHOTS - Deletes snapshots on the destination volume that aren’t on the source volume.

  • DELETE_CLONED_VOLUMES - Deletes snapshot clones on the destination volume that aren't on the source volume.

  • DELETE_INTERMEDIATE_DATA - Overwrites snapshots on the destination volume that don’t match the source snapshot that you’re copying.


Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system

Description

Creates a backup of an existing Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system, Amazon FSx for Lustre file system, Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system. We recommend creating regular backups so that you can restore a file system or volume from a backup if an issue arises with the original file system or volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_backup(
  FileSystemId = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  VolumeId = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

The ID of the file system to back up.

ClientRequestToken

(Optional) A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

Tags

(Optional) The tags to apply to the backup at backup creation. The key value of the Name tag appears in the console as the backup name. If you have set CopyTagsToBackups to true, and you specify one or more tags using the create_backup operation, no existing file system tags are copied from the file system to the backup.

VolumeId

(Optional) The ID of the FSx for ONTAP volume to back up.


Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA)

Description

Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository association (DRA). A data repository association is a link between a directory on the file system and an Amazon S3 bucket or prefix. You can have a maximum of 8 data repository associations on a file system. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1 deployment type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_data_repository_association(
  FileSystemId,
  FileSystemPath = NULL,
  DataRepositoryPath,
  BatchImportMetaDataOnCreate = NULL,
  ImportedFileChunkSize = NULL,
  S3 = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required]

FileSystemPath

A path on the file system that points to a high-level directory (such as ⁠/ns1/⁠) or subdirectory (such as ⁠/ns1/subdir/⁠) that will be mapped 1-1 with DataRepositoryPath. The leading forward slash in the name is required. Two data repository associations cannot have overlapping file system paths. For example, if a data repository is associated with file system path ⁠/ns1/⁠, then you cannot link another data repository with file system path ⁠/ns1/ns2⁠.

This path specifies where in your file system files will be exported from or imported to. This file system directory can be linked to only one Amazon S3 bucket, and no other S3 bucket can be linked to the directory.

If you specify only a forward slash (/) as the file system path, you can link only one data repository to the file system. You can only specify "/" as the file system path for the first data repository associated with a file system.

DataRepositoryPath

[required] The path to the Amazon S3 data repository that will be linked to the file system. The path can be an S3 bucket or prefix in the format ⁠s3://bucket-name/prefix/⁠ (where prefix is optional). This path specifies where in the S3 data repository files will be imported from or exported to.

BatchImportMetaDataOnCreate

Set to true to run an import data repository task to import metadata from the data repository to the file system after the data repository association is created. Default is false.

ImportedFileChunkSize

For files imported from a data repository, this value determines the stripe count and maximum amount of data per file (in MiB) stored on a single physical disk. The maximum number of disks that a single file can be striped across is limited by the total number of disks that make up the file system.

The default chunk size is 1,024 MiB (1 GiB) and can go as high as 512,000 MiB (500 GiB). Amazon S3 objects have a maximum size of 5 TB.

S3

The configuration for an Amazon S3 data repository linked to an Amazon FSx Lustre file system with a data repository association. The configuration defines which file events (new, changed, or deleted files or directories) are automatically imported from the linked data repository to the file system or automatically exported from the file system to the data repository.

ClientRequestToken
Tags

Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task

Description

Creates an Amazon FSx for Lustre data repository task. A create_data_repository_task operation will fail if a data repository is not linked to the FSx file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_data_repository_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_data_repository_task(
  Type,
  Paths = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  Report,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  CapacityToRelease = NULL,
  ReleaseConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

Type

[required] Specifies the type of data repository task to create.

  • EXPORT_TO_REPOSITORY tasks export from your Amazon FSx for Lustre file system to a linked data repository.

  • IMPORT_METADATA_FROM_REPOSITORY tasks import metadata changes from a linked S3 bucket to your Amazon FSx for Lustre file system.

  • RELEASE_DATA_FROM_FILESYSTEM tasks release files in your Amazon FSx for Lustre file system that have been exported to a linked S3 bucket and that meet your specified release criteria.

  • AUTO_RELEASE_DATA tasks automatically release files from an Amazon File Cache resource.

Paths

A list of paths for the data repository task to use when the task is processed. If a path that you provide isn't valid, the task fails. If you don't provide paths, the default behavior is to export all files to S3 (for export tasks), import all files from S3 (for import tasks), or release all exported files that meet the last accessed time criteria (for release tasks).

  • For export tasks, the list contains paths on the FSx for Lustre file system from which the files are exported to the Amazon S3 bucket. The default path is the file system root directory. The paths you provide need to be relative to the mount point of the file system. If the mount point is ⁠/mnt/fsx⁠ and ⁠/mnt/fsx/path1⁠ is a directory or file on the file system you want to export, then the path to provide is path1.

  • For import tasks, the list contains paths in the Amazon S3 bucket from which POSIX metadata changes are imported to the FSx for Lustre file system. The path can be an S3 bucket or prefix in the format ⁠s3://bucket-name/prefix⁠ (where prefix is optional).

  • For release tasks, the list contains directory or file paths on the FSx for Lustre file system from which to release exported files. If a directory is specified, files within the directory are released. If a file path is specified, only that file is released. To release all exported files in the file system, specify a forward slash (/) as the path.

    A file must also meet the last accessed time criteria specified in for the file to be released.

FileSystemId

[required]

Report

[required] Defines whether or not Amazon FSx provides a CompletionReport once the task has completed. A CompletionReport provides a detailed report on the files that Amazon FSx processed that meet the criteria specified by the Scope parameter. For more information, see Working with Task Completion Reports.

ClientRequestToken
Tags
CapacityToRelease

Specifies the amount of data to release, in GiB, by an Amazon File Cache AUTO_RELEASE_DATA task that automatically releases files from the cache.

ReleaseConfiguration

The configuration that specifies the last accessed time criteria for files that will be released from an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system.


Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource

Description

Creates a new Amazon File Cache resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_file_cache(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileCacheType,
  FileCacheTypeVersion,
  StorageCapacity,
  SubnetIds,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  CopyTagsToDataRepositoryAssociations = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL,
  DataRepositoryAssociations = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken

An idempotency token for resource creation, in a string of up to 63 ASCII characters. This token is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

By using the idempotent operation, you can retry a create_file_cache operation without the risk of creating an extra cache. This approach can be useful when an initial call fails in a way that makes it unclear whether a cache was created. Examples are if a transport level timeout occurred, or your connection was reset. If you use the same client request token and the initial call created a cache, the client receives success as long as the parameters are the same.

FileCacheType

[required] The type of cache that you're creating, which must be LUSTRE.

FileCacheTypeVersion

[required] Sets the Lustre version for the cache that you're creating, which must be 2.12.

StorageCapacity

[required] The storage capacity of the cache in gibibytes (GiB). Valid values are 1200 GiB, 2400 GiB, and increments of 2400 GiB.

SubnetIds

[required]

SecurityGroupIds

A list of IDs specifying the security groups to apply to all network interfaces created for Amazon File Cache access. This list isn't returned in later requests to describe the cache.

Tags
CopyTagsToDataRepositoryAssociations

A boolean flag indicating whether tags for the cache should be copied to data repository associations. This value defaults to false.

KmsKeyId

Specifies the ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key to use for encrypting data on an Amazon File Cache. If a KmsKeyId isn't specified, the Amazon FSx-managed KMS key for your account is used. For more information, see Encrypt in the Key Management Service API Reference.

LustreConfiguration

The configuration for the Amazon File Cache resource being created.

DataRepositoryAssociations

A list of up to 8 configurations for data repository associations (DRAs) to be created during the cache creation. The DRAs link the cache to either an Amazon S3 data repository or a Network File System (NFS) data repository that supports the NFSv3 protocol.

The DRA configurations must meet the following requirements:

  • All configurations on the list must be of the same data repository type, either all S3 or all NFS. A cache can't link to different data repository types at the same time.

  • An NFS DRA must link to an NFS file system that supports the NFSv3 protocol.

DRA automatic import and automatic export is not supported.


Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system

Description

Creates a new, empty Amazon FSx file system. You can create the following supported Amazon FSx file systems using the create_file_system API operation:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_file_system(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileSystemType,
  StorageCapacity = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  SubnetIds,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken

A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

FileSystemType

[required] The type of Amazon FSx file system to create. Valid values are WINDOWS, LUSTRE, ONTAP, and OPENZFS.

StorageCapacity

Sets the storage capacity of the file system that you're creating, in gibibytes (GiB).

FSx for Lustre file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you can configure depends on the value that you set for StorageType and the Lustre DeploymentType, as follows:

  • For SCRATCH_2, PERSISTENT_2, and PERSISTENT_1 deployment types using SSD storage type, the valid values are 1200 GiB, 2400 GiB, and increments of 2400 GiB.

  • For PERSISTENT_1 HDD file systems, valid values are increments of 6000 GiB for 12 MB/s/TiB file systems and increments of 1800 GiB for 40 MB/s/TiB file systems.

  • For SCRATCH_1 deployment type, valid values are 1200 GiB, 2400 GiB, and increments of 3600 GiB.

FSx for ONTAP file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you can configure depends on the value of the HAPairs property. The minimum value is calculated as 1,024 * HAPairs and the maximum is calculated as 524,288 * HAPairs.

FSx for OpenZFS file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you can configure is from 64 GiB up to 524,288 GiB (512 TiB).

FSx for Windows File Server file systems - The amount of storage capacity that you can configure depends on the value that you set for StorageType as follows:

  • For SSD storage, valid values are 32 GiB-65,536 GiB (64 TiB).

  • For HDD storage, valid values are 2000 GiB-65,536 GiB (64 TiB).

StorageType

Sets the storage class for the file system that you're creating. Valid values are SSD, HDD, and INTELLIGENT_TIERING.

  • Set to SSD to use solid state drive storage. SSD is supported on all Windows, Lustre, ONTAP, and OpenZFS deployment types.

  • Set to HDD to use hard disk drive storage. HDD is supported on SINGLE_AZ_2 and MULTI_AZ_1 Windows file system deployment types, and on PERSISTENT_1 Lustre file system deployment types.

  • Set to INTELLIGENT_TIERING to use fully elastic, intelligently-tiered storage. Intelligent-Tiering is only available for OpenZFS file systems with the Multi-AZ deployment type.

Default value is SSD. For more information, see Storage type options in the FSx for Windows File Server User Guide, Multiple storage options in the FSx for Lustre User Guide, and Working with Intelligent-Tiering in the Amazon FSx for OpenZFS User Guide.

SubnetIds

[required] Specifies the IDs of the subnets that the file system will be accessible from. For Windows and ONTAP MULTI_AZ_1 deployment types,provide exactly two subnet IDs, one for the preferred file server and one for the standby file server. You specify one of these subnets as the preferred subnet using the WindowsConfiguration > PreferredSubnetID or OntapConfiguration > PreferredSubnetID properties. For more information about Multi-AZ file system configuration, see Availability and durability: Single-AZ and Multi-AZ file systems in the Amazon FSx for Windows User Guide and Availability and durability in the Amazon FSx for ONTAP User Guide.

For Windows SINGLE_AZ_1 and SINGLE_AZ_2 and all Lustre deployment types, provide exactly one subnet ID. The file server is launched in that subnet's Availability Zone.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of IDs specifying the security groups to apply to all network interfaces created for file system access. This list isn't returned in later requests to describe the file system.

You must specify a security group if you are creating a Multi-AZ FSx for ONTAP file system in a VPC subnet that has been shared with you.

Tags

The tags to apply to the file system that's being created. The key value of the Name tag appears in the console as the file system name.

KmsKeyId
WindowsConfiguration

The Microsoft Windows configuration for the file system that's being created.

LustreConfiguration
OntapConfiguration
FileSystemTypeVersion

For FSx for Lustre file systems, sets the Lustre version for the file system that you're creating. Valid values are 2.10, 2.12, and 2.15:

  • 2.10 is supported by the Scratch and Persistent_1 Lustre deployment types.

  • 2.12 is supported by all Lustre deployment types, except for PERSISTENT_2 with a metadata configuration mode.

  • 2.15 is supported by all Lustre deployment types and is recommended for all new file systems.

Default value is 2.10, except for the following deployments:

  • Default value is 2.12 when DeploymentType is set to PERSISTENT_2 without a metadata configuration mode.

  • Default value is 2.15 when DeploymentType is set to PERSISTENT_2 with a metadata configuration mode.

OpenZFSConfiguration

The OpenZFS configuration for the file system that's being created.


Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup

Description

Creates a new Amazon FSx for Lustre, Amazon FSx for Windows File Server, or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system from an existing Amazon FSx backup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_file_system_from_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_file_system_from_backup(
  BackupId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  SubnetIds,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageCapacity = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupId

[required]

ClientRequestToken

A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent creation. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

SubnetIds

[required] Specifies the IDs of the subnets that the file system will be accessible from. For Windows MULTI_AZ_1 file system deployment types, provide exactly two subnet IDs, one for the preferred file server and one for the standby file server. You specify one of these subnets as the preferred subnet using the WindowsConfiguration > PreferredSubnetID property.

Windows SINGLE_AZ_1 and SINGLE_AZ_2 file system deployment types, Lustre file systems, and OpenZFS file systems provide exactly one subnet ID. The file server is launched in that subnet's Availability Zone.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of IDs for the security groups that apply to the specified network interfaces created for file system access. These security groups apply to all network interfaces. This value isn't returned in later DescribeFileSystem requests.

Tags

The tags to be applied to the file system at file system creation. The key value of the Name tag appears in the console as the file system name.

WindowsConfiguration

The configuration for this Microsoft Windows file system.

LustreConfiguration
StorageType

Sets the storage type for the Windows or OpenZFS file system that you're creating from a backup. Valid values are SSD and HDD.

  • Set to SSD to use solid state drive storage. SSD is supported on all Windows and OpenZFS deployment types.

  • Set to HDD to use hard disk drive storage. HDD is supported on SINGLE_AZ_2 and MULTI_AZ_1 FSx for Windows File Server file system deployment types.

The default value is SSD.

HDD and SSD storage types have different minimum storage capacity requirements. A restored file system's storage capacity is tied to the file system that was backed up. You can create a file system that uses HDD storage from a backup of a file system that used SSD storage if the original SSD file system had a storage capacity of at least 2000 GiB.

KmsKeyId
FileSystemTypeVersion

Sets the version for the Amazon FSx for Lustre file system that you're creating from a backup. Valid values are 2.10, 2.12, and 2.15.

You can enter a Lustre version that is newer than the backup's FileSystemTypeVersion setting. If you don't enter a newer Lustre version, it defaults to the backup's setting.

OpenZFSConfiguration

The OpenZFS configuration for the file system that's being created.

StorageCapacity

Sets the storage capacity of the OpenZFS file system that you're creating from a backup, in gibibytes (GiB). Valid values are from 64 GiB up to 524,288 GiB (512 TiB). However, the value that you specify must be equal to or greater than the backup's storage capacity value. If you don't use the StorageCapacity parameter, the default is the backup's StorageCapacity value.

If used to create a file system other than OpenZFS, you must provide a value that matches the backup's StorageCapacity value. If you provide any other value, Amazon FSx responds with an HTTP status code 400 Bad Request.


Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume

Description

Creates a snapshot of an existing Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume. With snapshots, you can easily undo file changes and compare file versions by restoring the volume to a previous version.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, Name, VolumeId, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
Name

[required] The name of the snapshot.

VolumeId

[required] The ID of the volume that you are taking a snapshot of.

Tags

Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system

Description

Creates a storage virtual machine (SVM) for an Amazon FSx for ONTAP file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_storage_virtual_machine(
  ActiveDirectoryConfiguration = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  Name,
  SvmAdminPassword = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  RootVolumeSecurityStyle = NULL
)

Arguments

ActiveDirectoryConfiguration

Describes the self-managed Microsoft Active Directory to which you want to join the SVM. Joining an Active Directory provides user authentication and access control for SMB clients, including Microsoft Windows and macOS clients accessing the file system.

ClientRequestToken
FileSystemId

[required]

Name

[required] The name of the SVM.

SvmAdminPassword

The password to use when managing the SVM using the NetApp ONTAP CLI or REST API. If you do not specify a password, you can still use the file system's fsxadmin user to manage the SVM.

Tags
RootVolumeSecurityStyle

The security style of the root volume of the SVM. Specify one of the following values:

  • UNIX if the file system is managed by a UNIX administrator, the majority of users are NFS clients, and an application accessing the data uses a UNIX user as the service account.

  • NTFS if the file system is managed by a Microsoft Windows administrator, the majority of users are SMB clients, and an application accessing the data uses a Microsoft Windows user as the service account.

  • MIXED This is an advanced setting. For more information, see Volume security style in the Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP User Guide.


Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume

Description

Creates an FSx for ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS storage volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_volume(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  VolumeType,
  Name,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
VolumeType

[required] Specifies the type of volume to create; ONTAP and OPENZFS are the only valid volume types.

Name

[required] Specifies the name of the volume that you're creating.

OntapConfiguration

Specifies the configuration to use when creating the ONTAP volume.

Tags
OpenZFSConfiguration

Specifies the configuration to use when creating the OpenZFS volume.


Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup

Description

Creates a new Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP volume from an existing Amazon FSx volume backup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_create_volume_from_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_create_volume_from_backup(
  BackupId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  Name,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupId

[required]

ClientRequestToken
Name

[required] The name of the new volume you're creating.

OntapConfiguration

Specifies the configuration of the ONTAP volume that you are creating.

Tags

Deletes an Amazon FSx backup

Description

Deletes an Amazon FSx backup. After deletion, the backup no longer exists, and its data is gone.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_backup(BackupId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)

Arguments

BackupId

[required] The ID of the backup that you want to delete.

ClientRequestToken

A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent deletion. This parameter is automatically filled on your behalf when using the CLI or SDK.


Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system

Description

Deletes a data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system. Deleting the data repository association unlinks the file system from the Amazon S3 bucket. When deleting a data repository association, you have the option of deleting the data in the file system that corresponds to the data repository association. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1 deployment type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_data_repository_association(
  AssociationId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  DeleteDataInFileSystem = NULL
)

Arguments

AssociationId

[required] The ID of the data repository association that you want to delete.

ClientRequestToken
DeleteDataInFileSystem

Set to true to delete the data in the file system that corresponds to the data repository association.


Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource

Description

Deletes an Amazon File Cache resource. After deletion, the cache no longer exists, and its data is gone.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_file_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_file_cache(FileCacheId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)

Arguments

FileCacheId

[required] The ID of the cache that's being deleted.

ClientRequestToken

Deletes a file system

Description

Deletes a file system. After deletion, the file system no longer exists, and its data is gone. Any existing automatic backups and snapshots are also deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_file_system(
  FileSystemId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system that you want to delete.

ClientRequestToken

A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent deletion. This token is automatically filled on your behalf when using the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

WindowsConfiguration
LustreConfiguration
OpenZFSConfiguration

The configuration object for the OpenZFS file system used in the delete_file_system operation.


Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot

Description

Deletes an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot. After deletion, the snapshot no longer exists, and its data is gone. Deleting a snapshot doesn't affect snapshots stored in a file system backup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, SnapshotId)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot that you want to delete.


Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)

Description

Deletes an existing Amazon FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM). Prior to deleting an SVM, you must delete all non-root volumes in the SVM, otherwise the operation will fail.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_storage_virtual_machine(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  StorageVirtualMachineId
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
StorageVirtualMachineId

[required] The ID of the SVM that you want to delete.


Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume

Description

Deletes an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_delete_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_delete_volume(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  VolumeId,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
VolumeId

[required] The ID of the volume that you are deleting.

OntapConfiguration

For Amazon FSx for ONTAP volumes, specify whether to take a final backup of the volume and apply tags to the backup. To apply tags to the backup, you must have the fsx:TagResource permission.

OpenZFSConfiguration

For Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes, specify whether to delete all child volumes and snapshots.


Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds value is provided for that backup

Description

Returns the description of a specific Amazon FSx backup, if a BackupIds value is provided for that backup. Otherwise, it returns all backups owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_backups(
  BackupIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

BackupIds

The IDs of the backups that you want to retrieve. This parameter value overrides any filters. If any IDs aren't found, a BackupNotFound error occurs.

Filters

The filters structure. The supported names are file-system-id, backup-type, file-system-type, and volume-id.

MaxResults

Maximum number of backups to return in the response. This parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon FSx returns is the minimum of the MaxResults parameter specified in the request and the service's internal maximum number of items per page.

NextToken

An opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_backups operation. If a token is present, the operation continues the list from where the returning call left off.


Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request

Description

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository associations, if one or more AssociationIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request. Data repository associations are supported on Amazon File Cache resources and all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2,15 file systems, excluding scratch_1 deployment type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_data_repository_associations/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_data_repository_associations(
  AssociationIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

AssociationIds

IDs of the data repository associations whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String).

Filters
MaxResults

The maximum number of resources to return in the response. This value must be an integer greater than zero.

NextToken

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request

Description

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for Lustre or Amazon File Cache data repository tasks, if one or more TaskIds values are provided in the request, or if filters are used in the request. You can use filters to narrow the response to include just tasks for specific file systems or caches, or tasks in a specific lifecycle state. Otherwise, it returns all data repository tasks owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_data_repository_tasks/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_data_repository_tasks(
  TaskIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

TaskIds

(Optional) IDs of the tasks whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String).

Filters

(Optional) You can use filters to narrow the describe_data_repository_tasks response to include just tasks for specific file systems, or tasks in a specific lifecycle state.

MaxResults
NextToken

Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds value is provided for that cache

Description

Returns the description of a specific Amazon File Cache resource, if a FileCacheIds value is provided for that cache. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all caches owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_caches/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_file_caches(
  FileCacheIds = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

FileCacheIds

IDs of the caches whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String).

MaxResults
NextToken

Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system

Description

Returns the DNS aliases that are associated with the specified Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. A history of all DNS aliases that have been associated with and disassociated from the file system is available in the list of AdministrativeAction provided in the describe_file_systems operation response.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_file_system_aliases(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system to return the associated DNS aliases for (String).

MaxResults

Maximum number of DNS aliases to return in the response (integer). This parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon FSx returns is the minimum of the MaxResults parameter specified in the request and the service's internal maximum number of items per page.

NextToken

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_file_system_aliases operation (String). If a token is included in the request, the action continues the list from where the previous returning call left off.


Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds value is provided for that file system

Description

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx file systems, if a FileSystemIds value is provided for that file system. Otherwise, it returns descriptions of all file systems owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_file_systems/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_file_systems(
  FileSystemIds = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemIds

IDs of the file systems whose descriptions you want to retrieve (String).

MaxResults

Maximum number of file systems to return in the response (integer). This parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon FSx returns is the minimum of the MaxResults parameter specified in the request and the service's internal maximum number of items per page.

NextToken

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous describe_file_systems operation (String). If a token present, the operation continues the list from where the returning call left off.


Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner

Description

Indicates whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner. For more information, see Creating FSx for ONTAP file systems in shared subnets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_shared_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_shared_vpc_configuration()

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds value is provided

Description

Returns the description of specific Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshots, if a SnapshotIds value is provided. Otherwise, this operation returns all snapshots owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the Amazon Web Services Region of the endpoint that you're calling.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_snapshots(
  SnapshotIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotIds

The IDs of the snapshots that you want to retrieve. This parameter value overrides any filters. If any IDs aren't found, a SnapshotNotFound error occurs.

Filters

The filters structure. The supported names are file-system-id or volume-id.

MaxResults
NextToken
IncludeShared

Set to false (default) if you want to only see the snapshots owned by your Amazon Web Services account. Set to true if you want to see the snapshots in your account and the ones shared with you from another account.


Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs)

Description

Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP storage virtual machines (SVMs).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_storage_virtual_machines/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_storage_virtual_machines(
  StorageVirtualMachineIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

StorageVirtualMachineIds

Enter the ID of one or more SVMs that you want to view.

Filters

Enter a filter name:value pair to view a select set of SVMs.

MaxResults
NextToken

Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes

Description

Describes one or more Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volumes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_describe_volumes/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_describe_volumes(
  VolumeIds = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

VolumeIds

The IDs of the volumes whose descriptions you want to retrieve.

Filters

Enter a filter Name and Values pair to view a select set of volumes.

MaxResults
NextToken

Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system

Description

Use this action to disassociate, or remove, one or more Domain Name Service (DNS) aliases from an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system. If you attempt to disassociate a DNS alias that is not associated with the file system, Amazon FSx responds with an HTTP status code 400 (Bad Request). For more information, see Working with DNS Aliases.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_disassociate_file_system_aliases/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_disassociate_file_system_aliases(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  FileSystemId,
  Aliases
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
FileSystemId

[required] Specifies the file system from which to disassociate the DNS aliases.

Aliases

[required] An array of one or more DNS alias names to disassociate, or remove, from the file system.


Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources

Description

Lists tags for Amazon FSx resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The ARN of the Amazon FSx resource that will have its tags listed.

MaxResults

Maximum number of tags to return in the response (integer). This parameter value must be greater than 0. The number of items that Amazon FSx returns is the minimum of the MaxResults parameter specified in the request and the service's internal maximum number of items per page.

NextToken

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous list_tags_for_resource operation (String). If a token present, the action continues the list from where the returning call left off.


Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system

Description

Releases the file system lock from an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_release_file_system_nfs_v3_locks(FileSystemId, ClientRequestToken = NULL)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required]

ClientRequestToken

Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot

Description

Returns an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume to the state saved by the specified snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_restore_volume_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_restore_volume_from_snapshot(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  VolumeId,
  SnapshotId,
  Options = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
VolumeId

[required] The ID of the volume that you are restoring.

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the source snapshot. Specifies the snapshot that you are restoring from.

Options

The settings used when restoring the specified volume from snapshot.

  • DELETE_INTERMEDIATE_SNAPSHOTS - Deletes snapshots between the current state and the specified snapshot. If there are intermediate snapshots and this option isn't used, restore_volume_from_snapshot fails.

  • DELETE_CLONED_VOLUMES - Deletes any dependent clone volumes created from intermediate snapshots. If there are any dependent clone volumes and this option isn't used, restore_volume_from_snapshot fails.


After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system

Description

After performing steps to repair the Active Directory configuration of an FSx for Windows File Server file system, use this action to initiate the process of Amazon FSx attempting to reconnect to the file system.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_start_misconfigured_state_recovery/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_start_misconfigured_state_recovery(ClientRequestToken = NULL, FileSystemId)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
FileSystemId

[required]


Tags an Amazon FSx resource

Description

Tags an Amazon FSx resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon FSx resource that you want to tag.

Tags

[required] A list of tags for the resource. If a tag with a given key already exists, the value is replaced by the one specified in this parameter.


This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource

Description

This action removes a tag from an Amazon FSx resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The ARN of the Amazon FSx resource to untag.

TagKeys

[required] A list of keys of tags on the resource to untag. In case the tag key doesn't exist, the call will still succeed to be idempotent.


Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system

Description

Updates the configuration of an existing data repository association on an Amazon FSx for Lustre file system. Data repository associations are supported on all FSx for Lustre 2.12 and 2.15 file systems, excluding scratch_1 deployment type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_data_repository_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_data_repository_association(
  AssociationId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  ImportedFileChunkSize = NULL,
  S3 = NULL
)

Arguments

AssociationId

[required] The ID of the data repository association that you are updating.

ClientRequestToken
ImportedFileChunkSize

For files imported from a data repository, this value determines the stripe count and maximum amount of data per file (in MiB) stored on a single physical disk. The maximum number of disks that a single file can be striped across is limited by the total number of disks that make up the file system.

The default chunk size is 1,024 MiB (1 GiB) and can go as high as 512,000 MiB (500 GiB). Amazon S3 objects have a maximum size of 5 TB.

S3

The configuration for an Amazon S3 data repository linked to an Amazon FSx Lustre file system with a data repository association. The configuration defines which file events (new, changed, or deleted files or directories) are automatically imported from the linked data repository to the file system or automatically exported from the file system to the data repository.


Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource

Description

Updates the configuration of an existing Amazon File Cache resource. You can update multiple properties in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_file_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_file_cache(
  FileCacheId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

FileCacheId

[required] The ID of the cache that you are updating.

ClientRequestToken
LustreConfiguration

The configuration updates for an Amazon File Cache resource.


Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system

Description

Use this operation to update the configuration of an existing Amazon FSx file system. You can update multiple properties in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_file_system(
  FileSystemId,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  StorageCapacity = NULL,
  WindowsConfiguration = NULL,
  LustreConfiguration = NULL,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  FileSystemTypeVersion = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemId

[required] The ID of the file system that you are updating.

ClientRequestToken

A string of up to 63 ASCII characters that Amazon FSx uses to ensure idempotent updates. This string is automatically filled on your behalf when you use the Command Line Interface (CLI) or an Amazon Web Services SDK.

StorageCapacity

Use this parameter to increase the storage capacity of an FSx for Windows File Server, FSx for Lustre, FSx for OpenZFS, or FSx for ONTAP file system. Specifies the storage capacity target value, in GiB, to increase the storage capacity for the file system that you're updating.

You can't make a storage capacity increase request if there is an existing storage capacity increase request in progress.

For Lustre file systems, the storage capacity target value can be the following:

  • For SCRATCH_2, PERSISTENT_1, and ⁠PERSISTENT_2 SSD⁠ deployment types, valid values are in multiples of 2400 GiB. The value must be greater than the current storage capacity.

  • For ⁠PERSISTENT HDD⁠ file systems, valid values are multiples of 6000 GiB for 12-MBps throughput per TiB file systems and multiples of 1800 GiB for 40-MBps throughput per TiB file systems. The values must be greater than the current storage capacity.

  • For SCRATCH_1 file systems, you can't increase the storage capacity.

For more information, see Managing storage and throughput capacity in the FSx for Lustre User Guide.

For FSx for OpenZFS file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. For more information, see Managing storage capacity in the FSx for OpenZFS User Guide.

For Windows file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. To increase storage capacity, the file system must have at least 16 MBps of throughput capacity. For more information, see Managing storage capacity in the Amazon FSxfor Windows File Server User Guide.

For ONTAP file systems, the storage capacity target value must be at least 10 percent greater than the current storage capacity value. For more information, see Managing storage capacity and provisioned IOPS in the Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP User Guide.

WindowsConfiguration

The configuration updates for an Amazon FSx for Windows File Server file system.

LustreConfiguration
OntapConfiguration
OpenZFSConfiguration

The configuration updates for an FSx for OpenZFS file system.

StorageType
FileSystemTypeVersion

The Lustre version you are updating an FSx for Lustre file system to. Valid values are 2.12 and 2.15. The value you choose must be newer than the file system's current Lustre version.


Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner

Description

Configures whether participant accounts in your organization can create Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in subnets that are shared by a virtual private cloud (VPC) owner. For more information, see the Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_shared_vpc_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_shared_vpc_configuration(
  EnableFsxRouteTableUpdatesFromParticipantAccounts = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL
)

Arguments

EnableFsxRouteTableUpdatesFromParticipantAccounts

Specifies whether participant accounts can create FSx for ONTAP Multi-AZ file systems in shared subnets. Set to true to enable or false to disable.

ClientRequestToken

Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot

Description

Updates the name of an Amazon FSx for OpenZFS snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_snapshot(ClientRequestToken = NULL, Name, SnapshotId)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
Name

[required] The name of the snapshot to update.

SnapshotId

[required] The ID of the snapshot that you want to update, in the format ⁠fsvolsnap-0123456789abcdef0⁠.


Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM)

Description

Updates an FSx for ONTAP storage virtual machine (SVM).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_storage_virtual_machine/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_storage_virtual_machine(
  ActiveDirectoryConfiguration = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  StorageVirtualMachineId,
  SvmAdminPassword = NULL
)

Arguments

ActiveDirectoryConfiguration

Specifies updates to an SVM's Microsoft Active Directory (AD) configuration.

ClientRequestToken
StorageVirtualMachineId

[required] The ID of the SVM that you want to update, in the format ⁠svm-0123456789abcdef0⁠.

SvmAdminPassword

Specifies a new SvmAdminPassword.


Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume

Description

Updates the configuration of an Amazon FSx for NetApp ONTAP or Amazon FSx for OpenZFS volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/fsx_update_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

fsx_update_volume(
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  VolumeId,
  OntapConfiguration = NULL,
  Name = NULL,
  OpenZFSConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientRequestToken
VolumeId

[required] The ID of the volume that you want to update, in the format ⁠fsvol-0123456789abcdef0⁠.

OntapConfiguration

The configuration of the ONTAP volume that you are updating.

Name

The name of the OpenZFS volume. OpenZFS root volumes are automatically named FSX. Child volume names must be unique among their parent volume's children. The name of the volume is part of the mount string for the OpenZFS volume.

OpenZFSConfiguration

The configuration of the OpenZFS volume that you are updating.


Amazon Glacier

Description

Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) is a storage solution for "cold data."

Glacier is an extremely low-cost storage service that provides secure, durable, and easy-to-use storage for data backup and archival. With Glacier, customers can store their data cost effectively for months, years, or decades. Glacier also enables customers to offload the administrative burdens of operating and scaling storage to AWS, so they don't have to worry about capacity planning, hardware provisioning, data replication, hardware failure and recovery, or time-consuming hardware migrations.

Glacier is a great storage choice when low storage cost is paramount and your data is rarely retrieved. If your application requires fast or frequent access to your data, consider using Amazon S3. For more information, see Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3).

You can store any kind of data in any format. There is no maximum limit on the total amount of data you can store in Glacier.

If you are a first-time user of Glacier, we recommend that you begin by reading the following sections in the Amazon S3 Glacier Developer Guide:

Usage

glacier(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- glacier(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

abort_multipart_upload This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID
abort_vault_lock This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked state
add_tags_to_vault This operation adds the specified tags to a vault
complete_multipart_upload You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts
complete_vault_lock This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress state to the Locked state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable
create_vault This operation creates a new vault with the specified name
delete_archive This operation deletes an archive from a vault
delete_vault This operation deletes a vault
delete_vault_access_policy This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault
delete_vault_notifications This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault
describe_job This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job
describe_vault This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault
get_data_retrieval_policy This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request
get_job_output This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using InitiateJob
get_vault_access_policy This operation retrieves the access-policy subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy)
get_vault_lock This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy subresource set on the specified vault:
get_vault_notifications This operation retrieves the notification-configuration subresource of the specified vault
initiate_job This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval
initiate_multipart_upload This operation initiates a multipart upload
initiate_vault_lock This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following:
list_jobs This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished
list_multipart_uploads This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault
list_parts This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload
list_provisioned_capacity This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account
list_tags_for_vault This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault
list_vaults This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account
purchase_provisioned_capacity This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account
remove_tags_from_vault This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault
set_data_retrieval_policy This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request
set_vault_access_policy This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy
set_vault_notifications This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault
upload_archive This operation adds an archive to a vault
upload_multipart_part This operation uploads a part of an archive

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- glacier()
# The example deletes an in-progress multipart upload to a vault named
# my-vault:
svc$abort_multipart_upload(
  accountId = "-",
  uploadId = "19gaRezEXAMPLES6Ry5YYdqthHOC_kGRCT03L9yetr220UmPtBYKk-OssZtLq...",
  vaultName = "my-vault"
)

## End(Not run)


This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID

Description

This operation aborts a multipart upload identified by the upload ID.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_abort_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_abort_multipart_upload(accountId, vaultName, uploadId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

uploadId

[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload to delete.


This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked state

Description

This operation aborts the vault locking process if the vault lock is not in the Locked state. If the vault lock is in the Locked state when this operation is requested, the operation returns an AccessDeniedException error. Aborting the vault locking process removes the vault lock policy from the specified vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_abort_vault_lock/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_abort_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation adds the specified tags to a vault

Description

This operation adds the specified tags to a vault. Each tag is composed of a key and a value. Each vault can have up to 10 tags. If your request would cause the tag limit for the vault to be exceeded, the operation throws the LimitExceededException error. If a tag already exists on the vault under a specified key, the existing key value will be overwritten. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_add_tags_to_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_add_tags_to_vault(accountId, vaultName, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

Tags

The tags to add to the vault. Each tag is composed of a key and a value. The value can be an empty string.


You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts

Description

You call this operation to inform Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) that all the archive parts have been uploaded and that Glacier can now assemble the archive from the uploaded parts. After assembling and saving the archive to the vault, Glacier returns the URI path of the newly created archive resource. Using the URI path, you can then access the archive. After you upload an archive, you should save the archive ID returned to retrieve the archive at a later point. You can also get the vault inventory to obtain a list of archive IDs in a vault. For more information, see initiate_job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_complete_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_complete_multipart_upload(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  uploadId,
  archiveSize = NULL,
  checksum = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

uploadId

[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload.

archiveSize

The total size, in bytes, of the entire archive. This value should be the sum of all the sizes of the individual parts that you uploaded.

checksum

The SHA256 tree hash of the entire archive. It is the tree hash of SHA256 tree hash of the individual parts. If the value you specify in the request does not match the SHA256 tree hash of the final assembled archive as computed by Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier), Glacier returns an error and the request fails.


This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress state to the Locked state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable

Description

This operation completes the vault locking process by transitioning the vault lock from the InProgress state to the Locked state, which causes the vault lock policy to become unchangeable. A vault lock is put into the InProgress state by calling initiate_vault_lock. You can obtain the state of the vault lock by calling get_vault_lock. For more information about the vault locking process, Amazon Glacier Vault Lock.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_complete_vault_lock/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_complete_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName, lockId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

lockId

[required] The lockId value is the lock ID obtained from a initiate_vault_lock request.


This operation creates a new vault with the specified name

Description

This operation creates a new vault with the specified name. The name of the vault must be unique within a region for an AWS account. You can create up to 1,000 vaults per account. If you need to create more vaults, contact Amazon S3 Glacier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_create_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_create_vault(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation deletes an archive from a vault

Description

This operation deletes an archive from a vault. Subsequent requests to initiate a retrieval of this archive will fail. Archive retrievals that are in progress for this archive ID may or may not succeed according to the following scenarios:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_archive/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_delete_archive(accountId, vaultName, archiveId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

archiveId

[required] The ID of the archive to delete.


This operation deletes a vault

Description

This operation deletes a vault. Amazon S3 Glacier will delete a vault only if there are no archives in the vault as of the last inventory and there have been no writes to the vault since the last inventory. If either of these conditions is not satisfied, the vault deletion fails (that is, the vault is not removed) and Amazon S3 Glacier returns an error. You can use describe_vault to return the number of archives in a vault, and you can use Initiate a Job (POST jobs) to initiate a new inventory retrieval for a vault. The inventory contains the archive IDs you use to delete archives using Delete Archive (DELETE archive).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_delete_vault(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault

Description

This operation deletes the access policy associated with the specified vault. The operation is eventually consistent; that is, it might take some time for Amazon S3 Glacier to completely remove the access policy, and you might still see the effect of the policy for a short time after you send the delete request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_delete_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault

Description

This operation deletes the notification configuration set for a vault. The operation is eventually consistent; that is, it might take some time for Amazon S3 Glacier to completely disable the notifications and you might still receive some notifications for a short time after you send the delete request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_delete_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_delete_vault_notifications(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job

Description

This operation returns information about a job you previously initiated, including the job initiation date, the user who initiated the job, the job status code/message and the Amazon SNS topic to notify after Amazon S3 Glacier (Glacier) completes the job. For more information about initiating a job, see initiate_job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_describe_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_describe_job(accountId, vaultName, jobId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

jobId

[required] The ID of the job to describe.


This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault

Description

This operation returns information about a vault, including the vault's Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the date the vault was created, the number of archives it contains, and the total size of all the archives in the vault. The number of archives and their total size are as of the last inventory generation. This means that if you add or remove an archive from a vault, and then immediately use Describe Vault, the change in contents will not be immediately reflected. If you want to retrieve the latest inventory of the vault, use initiate_job. Amazon S3 Glacier generates vault inventories approximately daily. For more information, see Downloading a Vault Inventory in Amazon S3 Glacier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_describe_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_describe_vault(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request

Description

This operation returns the current data retrieval policy for the account and region specified in the GET request. For more information about data retrieval policies, see Amazon Glacier Data Retrieval Policies.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_data_retrieval_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_get_data_retrieval_policy(accountId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.


This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using InitiateJob

Description

This operation downloads the output of the job you initiated using initiate_job. Depending on the job type you specified when you initiated the job, the output will be either the content of an archive or a vault inventory.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_job_output/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_get_job_output(accountId, vaultName, jobId, range = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

jobId

[required] The job ID whose data is downloaded.

range

The range of bytes to retrieve from the output. For example, if you want to download the first 1,048,576 bytes, specify the range as bytes=0-1048575. By default, this operation downloads the entire output.

If the job output is large, then you can use a range to retrieve a portion of the output. This allows you to download the entire output in smaller chunks of bytes. For example, suppose you have 1 GB of job output you want to download and you decide to download 128 MB chunks of data at a time, which is a total of eight Get Job Output requests. You use the following process to download the job output:

  1. Download a 128 MB chunk of output by specifying the appropriate byte range. Verify that all 128 MB of data was received.

  2. Along with the data, the response includes a SHA256 tree hash of the payload. You compute the checksum of the payload on the client and compare it with the checksum you received in the response to ensure you received all the expected data.

  3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the eight 128 MB chunks of output data, each time specifying the appropriate byte range.

  4. After downloading all the parts of the job output, you have a list of eight checksum values. Compute the tree hash of these values to find the checksum of the entire output. Using the describe_job API, obtain job information of the job that provided you the output. The response includes the checksum of the entire archive stored in Amazon S3 Glacier. You compare this value with the checksum you computed to ensure you have downloaded the entire archive content with no errors.


This operation retrieves the access-policy subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy)

Description

This operation retrieves the access-policy subresource set on the vault; for more information on setting this subresource, see Set Vault Access Policy (PUT access-policy). If there is no access policy set on the vault, the operation returns a ⁠404 Not found⁠ error. For more information about vault access policies, see Amazon Glacier Access Control with Vault Access Policies.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_get_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy subresource set on the specified vault:

Description

This operation retrieves the following attributes from the lock-policy subresource set on the specified vault:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_lock/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_get_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation retrieves the notification-configuration subresource of the specified vault

Description

This operation retrieves the notification-configuration subresource of the specified vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_get_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_get_vault_notifications(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval

Description

This operation initiates a job of the specified type, which can be a select, an archival retrieval, or a vault retrieval. For more information about using this operation, see the documentation for the underlying REST API Initiate a Job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_initiate_job(accountId, vaultName, jobParameters = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

jobParameters

Provides options for specifying job information.


This operation initiates a multipart upload

Description

This operation initiates a multipart upload. Amazon S3 Glacier creates a multipart upload resource and returns its ID in the response. The multipart upload ID is used in subsequent requests to upload parts of an archive (see upload_multipart_part).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_initiate_multipart_upload(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  archiveDescription = NULL,
  partSize = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

archiveDescription

The archive description that you are uploading in parts.

The part size must be a megabyte (1024 KB) multiplied by a power of 2, for example 1048576 (1 MB), 2097152 (2 MB), 4194304 (4 MB), 8388608 (8 MB), and so on. The minimum allowable part size is 1 MB, and the maximum is 4 GB (4096 MB).

partSize

The size of each part except the last, in bytes. The last part can be smaller than this part size.


This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following:

Description

This operation initiates the vault locking process by doing the following:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_initiate_vault_lock/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_initiate_vault_lock(accountId, vaultName, policy = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

policy

The vault lock policy as a JSON string, which uses "\" as an escape character.


This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished

Description

This operation lists jobs for a vault, including jobs that are in-progress and jobs that have recently finished. The List Job operation returns a list of these jobs sorted by job initiation time.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_jobs(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  limit = NULL,
  marker = NULL,
  statuscode = NULL,
  completed = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

limit

The maximum number of jobs to be returned. The default limit is 50. The number of jobs returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned jobs never exceeds the limit.

marker

An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the job at which the listing of jobs should begin. Get the marker value from a previous List Jobs response. You only need to include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Jobs request.

statuscode

The type of job status to return. You can specify the following values: InProgress, Succeeded, or Failed.

completed

The state of the jobs to return. You can specify true or false.


This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault

Description

This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads for the specified vault. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated by an initiate_multipart_upload request, but has not yet been completed or aborted. The list returned in the List Multipart Upload response has no guaranteed order.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_multipart_uploads/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_multipart_uploads(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  marker = NULL,
  limit = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

marker

An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the upload at which the listing of uploads should begin. Get the marker value from a previous List Uploads response. You need only include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Uploads request.

limit

Specifies the maximum number of uploads returned in the response body. If this value is not specified, the List Uploads operation returns up to 50 uploads.


This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload

Description

This operation lists the parts of an archive that have been uploaded in a specific multipart upload. You can make this request at any time during an in-progress multipart upload before you complete the upload (see complete_multipart_upload. List Parts returns an error for completed uploads. The list returned in the List Parts response is sorted by part range.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_parts/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_parts(accountId, vaultName, uploadId, marker = NULL, limit = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

uploadId

[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload.

marker

An opaque string used for pagination. This value specifies the part at which the listing of parts should begin. Get the marker value from the response of a previous List Parts response. You need only include the marker if you are continuing the pagination of results started in a previous List Parts request.

limit

The maximum number of parts to be returned. The default limit is 50. The number of parts returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned parts never exceeds the limit.


This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account

Description

This operation lists the provisioned capacity units for the specified AWS account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_provisioned_capacity/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_provisioned_capacity(accountId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, don't include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.


This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault

Description

This operation lists all the tags attached to a vault. The operation returns an empty map if there are no tags. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_tags_for_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_tags_for_vault(accountId, vaultName)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.


This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account

Description

This operation lists all vaults owned by the calling user's account. The list returned in the response is ASCII-sorted by vault name.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_list_vaults/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_list_vaults(accountId, marker = NULL, limit = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

marker

A string used for pagination. The marker specifies the vault ARN after which the listing of vaults should begin.

limit

The maximum number of vaults to be returned. The default limit is 10. The number of vaults returned might be fewer than the specified limit, but the number of returned vaults never exceeds the limit.


This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account

Description

This operation purchases a provisioned capacity unit for an AWS account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_purchase_provisioned_capacity/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_purchase_provisioned_capacity(accountId)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, don't include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.


This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault

Description

This operation removes one or more tags from the set of tags attached to a vault. For more information about tags, see Tagging Amazon S3 Glacier Resources. This operation is idempotent. The operation will be successful, even if there are no tags attached to the vault.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_remove_tags_from_vault/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_remove_tags_from_vault(accountId, vaultName, TagKeys = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

TagKeys

A list of tag keys. Each corresponding tag is removed from the vault.


This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request

Description

This operation sets and then enacts a data retrieval policy in the region specified in the PUT request. You can set one policy per region for an AWS account. The policy is enacted within a few minutes of a successful PUT operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_data_retrieval_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_set_data_retrieval_policy(accountId, Policy = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID. This value must match the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you specify your account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

Policy

The data retrieval policy in JSON format.


This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy

Description

This operation configures an access policy for a vault and will overwrite an existing policy. To configure a vault access policy, send a PUT request to the access-policy subresource of the vault. An access policy is specific to a vault and is also called a vault subresource. You can set one access policy per vault and the policy can be up to 20 KB in size. For more information about vault access policies, see Amazon Glacier Access Control with Vault Access Policies.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_vault_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_set_vault_access_policy(accountId, vaultName, policy = NULL)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

policy

The vault access policy as a JSON string.


This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault

Description

This operation configures notifications that will be sent when specific events happen to a vault. By default, you don't get any notifications.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_set_vault_notifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_set_vault_notifications(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  vaultNotificationConfig = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

vaultNotificationConfig

Provides options for specifying notification configuration.


This operation adds an archive to a vault

Description

This operation adds an archive to a vault. This is a synchronous operation, and for a successful upload, your data is durably persisted. Amazon S3 Glacier returns the archive ID in the x-amz-archive-id header of the response.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_upload_archive/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_upload_archive(
  vaultName,
  accountId,
  archiveDescription = NULL,
  checksum = NULL,
  body = NULL
)

Arguments

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

archiveDescription

The optional description of the archive you are uploading.

checksum

The SHA256 tree hash of the data being uploaded.

body

The data to upload.


This operation uploads a part of an archive

Description

This operation uploads a part of an archive. You can upload archive parts in any order. You can also upload them in parallel. You can upload up to 10,000 parts for a multipart upload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/glacier_upload_multipart_part/ for full documentation.

Usage

glacier_upload_multipart_part(
  accountId,
  vaultName,
  uploadId,
  checksum = NULL,
  range = NULL,
  body = NULL
)

Arguments

accountId

[required] The AccountId value is the AWS account ID of the account that owns the vault. You can either specify an AWS account ID or optionally a single '-' (hyphen), in which case Amazon S3 Glacier uses the AWS account ID associated with the credentials used to sign the request. If you use an account ID, do not include any hyphens ('-') in the ID.

vaultName

[required] The name of the vault.

uploadId

[required] The upload ID of the multipart upload.

checksum

The SHA256 tree hash of the data being uploaded.

range

Identifies the range of bytes in the assembled archive that will be uploaded in this part. Amazon S3 Glacier uses this information to assemble the archive in the proper sequence. The format of this header follows RFC 2616. An example header is Content-Range:bytes 0-4194303/*.

body

The data to upload.


Amazon Omics

Description

This is the AWS HealthOmics API Reference. For an introduction to the service, see What is AWS HealthOmics? in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide.

Usage

omics(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- omics(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

abort_multipart_read_set_upload Stops a multipart upload
accept_share Accept a resource share request
batch_delete_read_set Deletes one or more read sets
cancel_annotation_import_job Cancels an annotation import job
cancel_run Cancels a run
cancel_variant_import_job Cancels a variant import job
complete_multipart_read_set_upload Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components
create_annotation_store Creates an annotation store
create_annotation_store_version Creates a new version of an annotation store
create_multipart_read_set_upload Begins a multipart read set upload
create_reference_store Creates a reference store
create_run_cache You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow
create_run_group You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group
create_sequence_store Creates a sequence store
create_share Creates a cross-account shared resource
create_variant_store Creates a variant store
create_workflow Creates a workflow
delete_annotation_store Deletes an annotation store
delete_annotation_store_versions Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store
delete_reference Deletes a genome reference
delete_reference_store Deletes a genome reference store
delete_run Deletes a workflow run
delete_run_cache Delete a run cache
delete_run_group Deletes a workflow run group
delete_s3_access_policy Deletes an access policy for the specified store
delete_sequence_store Deletes a sequence store
delete_share Deletes a resource share
delete_variant_store Deletes a variant store
delete_workflow Deletes a workflow
get_annotation_import_job Gets information about an annotation import job
get_annotation_store Gets information about an annotation store
get_annotation_store_version Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version
get_read_set Gets a file from a read set
get_read_set_activation_job Gets information about a read set activation job
get_read_set_export_job Gets information about a read set export job
get_read_set_import_job Gets information about a read set import job
get_read_set_metadata Gets details about a read set
get_reference Gets a reference file
get_reference_import_job Gets information about a reference import job
get_reference_metadata Gets information about a genome reference's metadata
get_reference_store Gets information about a reference store
get_run Gets information about a workflow run
get_run_cache Retrieve the details for the specified run cache
get_run_group Gets information about a workflow run group
get_run_task Gets information about a workflow run task
get_s3_access_policy Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store
get_sequence_store Gets information about a sequence store
get_share Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share
get_variant_import_job Gets information about a variant import job
get_variant_store Gets information about a variant store
get_workflow Gets information about a workflow
list_annotation_import_jobs Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs
list_annotation_stores Retrieves a list of annotation stores
list_annotation_store_versions Lists the versions of an annotation store
list_multipart_read_set_uploads Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads
list_read_set_activation_jobs Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs
list_read_set_export_jobs Retrieves a list of read set export jobs
list_read_set_import_jobs Retrieves a list of read set import jobs
list_read_sets Retrieves a list of read sets
list_read_set_upload_parts This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store
list_reference_import_jobs Retrieves a list of reference import jobs
list_references Retrieves a list of references
list_reference_stores Retrieves a list of reference stores
list_run_caches Retrieves a list of your run caches
list_run_groups Retrieves a list of run groups
list_runs Retrieves a list of runs
list_run_tasks Retrieves a list of tasks for a run
list_sequence_stores Retrieves a list of sequence stores
list_shares Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account
list_tags_for_resource Retrieves a list of tags for a resource
list_variant_import_jobs Retrieves a list of variant import jobs
list_variant_stores Retrieves a list of variant stores
list_workflows Retrieves a list of workflows
put_s3_access_policy Adds an access policy to the specified store
start_annotation_import_job Starts an annotation import job
start_read_set_activation_job Activates an archived read set
start_read_set_export_job Exports a read set to Amazon S3
start_read_set_import_job Starts a read set import job
start_reference_import_job Starts a reference import job
start_run Starts a workflow run
start_variant_import_job Starts a variant import job
tag_resource Tags a resource
untag_resource Removes tags from a resource
update_annotation_store Updates an annotation store
update_annotation_store_version Updates the description of an annotation store version
update_run_cache Update a run cache
update_run_group Updates a run group
update_sequence_store Update one or more parameters for the sequence store
update_variant_store Updates a variant store
update_workflow Updates a workflow
upload_read_set_part This operation uploads a specific part of a read set

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- omics()
svc$abort_multipart_read_set_upload(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Stops a multipart upload

Description

Stops a multipart upload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_abort_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_abort_multipart_read_set_upload(sequenceStoreId, uploadId)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The sequence store ID for the store involved in the multipart upload.

uploadId

[required] The ID for the multipart upload.


Accept a resource share request

Description

Accept a resource share request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_accept_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_accept_share(shareId)

Arguments

shareId

[required] The ID of the resource share.


Deletes one or more read sets

Description

Deletes one or more read sets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_batch_delete_read_set/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_batch_delete_read_set(ids, sequenceStoreId)

Arguments

ids

[required] The read sets' IDs.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read sets' sequence store ID.


Cancels an annotation import job

Description

Cancels an annotation import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_cancel_annotation_import_job(jobId)

Arguments

jobId

[required] The job's ID.


Cancels a run

Description

Cancels a run.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_run/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_cancel_run(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The run's ID.


Cancels a variant import job

Description

Cancels a variant import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_cancel_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_cancel_variant_import_job(jobId)

Arguments

jobId

[required] The job's ID.


Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components

Description

Concludes a multipart upload once you have uploaded all the components.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_complete_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_complete_multipart_read_set_upload(sequenceStoreId, uploadId, parts)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The sequence store ID for the store involved in the multipart upload.

uploadId

[required] The ID for the multipart upload.

parts

[required] The individual uploads or parts of a multipart upload.


Creates an annotation store

Description

Creates an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_annotation_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_annotation_store(
  reference = NULL,
  name = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  versionName = NULL,
  sseConfig = NULL,
  storeFormat,
  storeOptions = NULL
)

Arguments

reference

The genome reference for the store's annotations.

name

A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.

tags

Tags for the store.

versionName

The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from other versions.

sseConfig

Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store.

storeFormat

[required] The annotation file format of the store.

storeOptions

File parsing options for the annotation store.


Creates a new version of an annotation store

Description

Creates a new version of an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_annotation_store_version(
  name,
  versionName,
  description = NULL,
  versionOptions = NULL,
  tags = NULL
)

Arguments

name

[required] The name of an annotation store version from which versions are being created.

versionName

[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from other versions.

description

The description of an annotation store version.

versionOptions

The options for an annotation store version.

tags

Any tags added to annotation store version.


Begins a multipart read set upload

Description

Begins a multipart read set upload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_multipart_read_set_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_multipart_read_set_upload(
  sequenceStoreId,
  clientToken = NULL,
  sourceFileType,
  subjectId,
  sampleId,
  generatedFrom = NULL,
  referenceArn = NULL,
  name,
  description = NULL,
  tags = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The sequence store ID for the store that is the destination of the multipart uploads.

clientToken

An idempotency token that can be used to avoid triggering multiple multipart uploads.

sourceFileType

[required] The type of file being uploaded.

subjectId

[required] The source's subject ID.

sampleId

[required] The source's sample ID.

generatedFrom

Where the source originated.

referenceArn

The ARN of the reference.

name

[required] The name of the read set.

description

The description of the read set.

tags

Any tags to add to the read set.


Creates a reference store

Description

Creates a reference store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_reference_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_reference_store(
  name,
  description = NULL,
  sseConfig = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL
)

Arguments

name

[required] A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.

sseConfig

Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store.

tags

Tags for the store.

clientToken

To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request.


You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow

Description

You can create a run cache to save the task outputs from completed tasks in a run for a private workflow. Subsequent runs use the task outputs from the cache, rather than computing the task outputs again. You specify an Amazon S3 location where HealthOmics saves the cached data. This data must be immediately accessible (not in an archived state).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_run_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_run_cache(
  cacheBehavior = NULL,
  cacheS3Location,
  description = NULL,
  name = NULL,
  requestId,
  tags = NULL,
  cacheBucketOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

cacheBehavior

Default cache behavior for runs that use this cache. Supported values are:

CACHE_ON_FAILURE: Caches task outputs from completed tasks for runs that fail. This setting is useful if you're debugging a workflow that fails after several tasks completed successfully. The subsequent run uses the cache outputs for previously-completed tasks if the task definition, inputs, and container in ECR are identical to the prior run.

CACHE_ALWAYS: Caches task outputs from completed tasks for all runs. This setting is useful in development mode, but do not use it in a production setting.

If you don't specify a value, the default behavior is CACHE_ON_FAILURE. When you start a run that uses this cache, you can override the default cache behavior.

For more information, see Run cache behavior in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide.

cacheS3Location

[required] Specify the S3 location for storing the cached task outputs. This data must be immediately accessible (not in an archived state).

description

Enter a description of the run cache.

name

Enter a user-friendly name for the run cache.

requestId

[required] A unique request token, to ensure idempotency. If you don't specify a token, HealthOmics automatically generates a universally unique identifier (UUID) for the request.

tags

Specify one or more tags to associate with this run cache.

cacheBucketOwnerId

The AWS account ID of the expected owner of the S3 bucket for the run cache. If not provided, your account ID is set as the owner of the bucket.


You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group

Description

You can optionally create a run group to limit the compute resources for the runs that you add to the group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_run_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_run_group(
  name = NULL,
  maxCpus = NULL,
  maxRuns = NULL,
  maxDuration = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  requestId,
  maxGpus = NULL
)

Arguments

name

A name for the group.

maxCpus

The maximum number of CPUs that can run concurrently across all active runs in the run group.

maxRuns

The maximum number of runs that can be running at the same time.

maxDuration

The maximum time for each run (in minutes). If a run exceeds the maximum run time, the run fails automatically.

tags

Tags for the group.

requestId

[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request.

maxGpus

The maximum number of GPUs that can run concurrently across all active runs in the run group.


Creates a sequence store

Description

Creates a sequence store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_sequence_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_sequence_store(
  name,
  description = NULL,
  sseConfig = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL,
  fallbackLocation = NULL,
  eTagAlgorithmFamily = NULL,
  propagatedSetLevelTags = NULL,
  s3AccessConfig = NULL
)

Arguments

name

[required] A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.

sseConfig

Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store.

tags

Tags for the store.

clientToken

To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request.

fallbackLocation

An S3 location that is used to store files that have failed a direct upload.

eTagAlgorithmFamily

The ETag algorithm family to use for ingested read sets.

propagatedSetLevelTags

The tags keys to propagate to the S3 objects associated with read sets in the sequence store.

s3AccessConfig

S3 access configuration parameters


Creates a cross-account shared resource

Description

Creates a cross-account shared resource. The resource owner makes an offer to share the resource with the principal subscriber (an AWS user with a different account than the resource owner).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_share(resourceArn, principalSubscriber, shareName = NULL)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The ARN of the resource to be shared.

principalSubscriber

[required] The principal subscriber is the account being offered shared access to the resource.

shareName

A name that the owner defines for the share.


Creates a variant store

Description

Creates a variant store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_variant_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_variant_store(
  reference,
  name = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  sseConfig = NULL
)

Arguments

reference

[required] The genome reference for the store's variants.

name

A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.

tags

Tags for the store.

sseConfig

Server-side encryption (SSE) settings for the store.


Creates a workflow

Description

Creates a workflow.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_create_workflow/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_create_workflow(
  name = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  engine = NULL,
  definitionZip = NULL,
  definitionUri = NULL,
  main = NULL,
  parameterTemplate = NULL,
  storageCapacity = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  requestId,
  accelerators = NULL
)

Arguments

name

A name for the workflow.

description

A description for the workflow.

engine

An engine for the workflow.

definitionZip

A ZIP archive for the workflow.

definitionUri

The URI of a definition for the workflow.

main

The path of the main definition file for the workflow.

parameterTemplate

A parameter template for the workflow.

storageCapacity

The default storage capacity for the workflow runs, in gibibytes.

tags

Tags for the workflow.

requestId

[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request.

accelerators

The computational accelerator specified to run the workflow.


Deletes an annotation store

Description

Deletes an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_annotation_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_annotation_store(name, force = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] The store's name.

force

Whether to force deletion.


Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store

Description

Deletes one or multiple versions of an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_annotation_store_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_annotation_store_versions(name, versions, force = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] The name of the annotation store from which versions are being deleted.

versions

[required] The versions of an annotation store to be deleted.

force

Forces the deletion of an annotation store version when imports are in-progress..


Deletes a genome reference

Description

Deletes a genome reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_reference/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_reference(id, referenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The reference's ID.

referenceStoreId

[required] The reference's store ID.


Deletes a genome reference store

Description

Deletes a genome reference store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_reference_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_reference_store(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The store's ID.


Deletes a workflow run

Description

Deletes a workflow run.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_run(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The run's ID.


Delete a run cache

Description

Delete a run cache. This action removes the cache metadata stored in the service account, but doesn't delete the data in Amazon S3. You can access the cache data in Amazon S3, for inspection or to troubleshoot issues. You can remove old cache data using standard S3 Delete operations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_run_cache(id)

Arguments

id

[required] Run cache identifier for the cache you want to delete.


Deletes a workflow run group

Description

Deletes a workflow run group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_run_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_run_group(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The run group's ID.


Deletes an access policy for the specified store

Description

Deletes an access policy for the specified store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn)

Arguments

s3AccessPointArn

[required] The S3 access point ARN that has the access policy.


Deletes a sequence store

Description

Deletes a sequence store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_sequence_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_sequence_store(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The sequence store's ID.


Deletes a resource share

Description

Deletes a resource share. If you are the resource owner, the subscriber will no longer have access to the shared resource. If you are the subscriber, this operation deletes your access to the share.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_share(shareId)

Arguments

shareId

[required] The ID for the resource share to be deleted.


Deletes a variant store

Description

Deletes a variant store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_variant_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_variant_store(name, force = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] The store's name.

force

Whether to force deletion.


Deletes a workflow

Description

Deletes a workflow.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_delete_workflow/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_delete_workflow(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The workflow's ID.


Gets information about an annotation import job

Description

Gets information about an annotation import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_annotation_import_job(jobId)

Arguments

jobId

[required] The job's ID.


Gets information about an annotation store

Description

Gets information about an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_annotation_store(name)

Arguments

name

[required] The store's name.


Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version

Description

Retrieves the metadata for an annotation store version.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_annotation_store_version(name, versionName)

Arguments

name

[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from others.

versionName

[required] The name given to an annotation store version to distinguish it from others.


Gets a file from a read set

Description

Gets a file from a read set.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_read_set(id, sequenceStoreId, file = NULL, partNumber)

Arguments

id

[required] The read set's ID.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.

file

The file to retrieve.

partNumber

[required] The part number to retrieve.


Gets information about a read set activation job

Description

Gets information about a read set activation job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_activation_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_read_set_activation_job(id, sequenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The job's ID.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The job's sequence store ID.


Gets information about a read set export job

Description

Gets information about a read set export job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_export_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_read_set_export_job(sequenceStoreId, id)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The job's sequence store ID.

id

[required] The job's ID.


Gets information about a read set import job

Description

Gets information about a read set import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_read_set_import_job(id, sequenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The job's ID.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The job's sequence store ID.


Gets details about a read set

Description

Gets details about a read set.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_read_set_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_read_set_metadata(id, sequenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The read set's ID.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.


Gets a reference file

Description

Gets a reference file.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_reference(
  id,
  referenceStoreId,
  range = NULL,
  partNumber,
  file = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The reference's ID.

referenceStoreId

[required] The reference's store ID.

range

The range to retrieve.

partNumber

[required] The part number to retrieve.

file

The file to retrieve.


Gets information about a reference import job

Description

Gets information about a reference import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_reference_import_job(id, referenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The job's ID.

referenceStoreId

[required] The job's reference store ID.


Gets information about a genome reference's metadata

Description

Gets information about a genome reference's metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_reference_metadata(id, referenceStoreId)

Arguments

id

[required] The reference's ID.

referenceStoreId

[required] The reference's reference store ID.


Gets information about a reference store

Description

Gets information about a reference store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_reference_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_reference_store(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The store's ID.


Gets information about a workflow run

Description

Gets information about a workflow run.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_run(id, export = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The run's ID.

export

The run's export format.


Retrieve the details for the specified run cache

Description

Retrieve the details for the specified run cache.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_run_cache(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The identifier of the run cache to retrieve.


Gets information about a workflow run group

Description

Gets information about a workflow run group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_run_group(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The group's ID.


Gets information about a workflow run task

Description

Gets information about a workflow run task.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_run_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_run_task(id, taskId)

Arguments

id

[required] The workflow run ID.

taskId

[required] The task's ID.


Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store

Description

Retrieves details about an access policy on a given store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn)

Arguments

s3AccessPointArn

[required] The S3 access point ARN that has the access policy.


Gets information about a sequence store

Description

Gets information about a sequence store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_sequence_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_sequence_store(id)

Arguments

id

[required] The store's ID.


Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share

Description

Retrieves the metadata for the specified resource share.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_share(shareId)

Arguments

shareId

[required] The ID of the share.


Gets information about a variant import job

Description

Gets information about a variant import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_variant_import_job(jobId)

Arguments

jobId

[required] The job's ID.


Gets information about a variant store

Description

Gets information about a variant store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_variant_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_variant_store(name)

Arguments

name

[required] The store's name.


Gets information about a workflow

Description

Gets information about a workflow.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_get_workflow/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_get_workflow(id, type = NULL, export = NULL, workflowOwnerId = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The workflow's ID.

type

The workflow's type.

export

The export format for the workflow.

workflowOwnerId

The ID of the workflow owner.


Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of annotation import jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_import_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_annotation_import_jobs(
  maxResults = NULL,
  ids = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results.

ids

IDs of annotation import jobs to retrieve.

nextToken

Specifies the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Lists the versions of an annotation store

Description

Lists the versions of an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_store_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_annotation_store_versions(
  name,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

name

[required] The name of an annotation store.

maxResults

The maximum number of annotation store versions to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specifies the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list of annotation store versions.


Retrieves a list of annotation stores

Description

Retrieves a list of annotation stores.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_annotation_stores/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_annotation_stores(
  ids = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

ids

IDs of stores to list.

maxResults

The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads

Description

Lists multipart read set uploads and for in progress uploads. Once the upload is completed, a read set is created and the upload will no longer be returned in the response.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_multipart_read_set_uploads/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_multipart_read_set_uploads(
  sequenceStoreId,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart uploads.

maxResults

The maximum number of multipart uploads returned in a page.

nextToken

Next token returned in the response of a previous ListMultipartReadSetUploads call. Used to get the next page of results.


Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of read set activation jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_activation_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_read_set_activation_jobs(
  sequenceStoreId,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.

maxResults

The maximum number of read set activation jobs to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of read set export jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of read set export jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_export_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_read_set_export_jobs(
  sequenceStoreId,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The jobs' sequence store ID.

maxResults

The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of read set import jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of read set import jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_import_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_read_set_import_jobs(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  sequenceStoreId,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

sequenceStoreId

[required] The jobs' sequence store ID.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store

Description

This operation will list all parts in a requested multipart upload for a sequence store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_set_upload_parts/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_read_set_upload_parts(
  sequenceStoreId,
  uploadId,
  partSource,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart uploads.

uploadId

[required] The ID for the initiated multipart upload.

partSource

[required] The source file for the upload part.

maxResults

The maximum number of read set upload parts returned in a page.

nextToken

Next token returned in the response of a previous ListReadSetUploadPartsRequest call. Used to get the next page of results.

filter

Attributes used to filter for a specific subset of read set part uploads.


Retrieves a list of read sets

Description

Retrieves a list of read sets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_read_sets/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_read_sets(
  sequenceStoreId,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The jobs' sequence store ID.

maxResults

The maximum number of read sets to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of reference import jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of reference import jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_reference_import_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_reference_import_jobs(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  referenceStoreId,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of jobs to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

referenceStoreId

[required] The job's reference store ID.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of reference stores

Description

Retrieves a list of reference stores.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_reference_stores/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_reference_stores(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, filter = NULL)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of references

Description

Retrieves a list of references.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_references/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_references(
  referenceStoreId,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

referenceStoreId

[required] The references' reference store ID.

maxResults

The maximum number of references to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of your run caches

Description

Retrieves a list of your run caches.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_caches/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_run_caches(maxResults = NULL, startingToken = NULL)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

startingToken

Optional pagination token returned from a prior call to the list_run_caches API operation.


Retrieves a list of run groups

Description

Retrieves a list of run groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_run_groups(name = NULL, startingToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)

Arguments

name

The run groups' name.

startingToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

maxResults

The maximum number of run groups to return in one page of results.


Retrieves a list of tasks for a run

Description

Retrieves a list of tasks for a run.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_run_tasks/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_run_tasks(
  id,
  status = NULL,
  startingToken = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The run's ID.

status

Filter the list by status.

startingToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

maxResults

The maximum number of run tasks to return in one page of results.


Retrieves a list of runs

Description

Retrieves a list of runs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_runs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_runs(
  name = NULL,
  runGroupId = NULL,
  startingToken = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  status = NULL
)

Arguments

name

Filter the list by run name.

runGroupId

Filter the list by run group ID.

startingToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

maxResults

The maximum number of runs to return in one page of results.

status

The status of a run.


Retrieves a list of sequence stores

Description

Retrieves a list of sequence stores.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_sequence_stores/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_sequence_stores(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL, filter = NULL)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account

Description

Retrieves the resource shares associated with an account. Use the filter parameter to retrieve a specific subset of the shares.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_shares/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_shares(
  resourceOwner,
  filter = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

resourceOwner

[required] The account that owns the resource shares.

filter

Attributes that you use to filter for a specific subset of resource shares.

nextToken

Next token returned in the response of a previous ListReadSetUploadPartsRequest call. Used to get the next page of results.

maxResults

The maximum number of shares to return in one page of results.


Retrieves a list of tags for a resource

Description

Retrieves a list of tags for a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The resource's ARN.


Retrieves a list of variant import jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of variant import jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_variant_import_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_variant_import_jobs(
  maxResults = NULL,
  ids = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of import jobs to return in one page of results.

ids

A list of job IDs.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of variant stores

Description

Retrieves a list of variant stores.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_variant_stores/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_variant_stores(
  maxResults = NULL,
  ids = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  filter = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of stores to return in one page of results.

ids

A list of store IDs.

nextToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

filter

A filter to apply to the list.


Retrieves a list of workflows

Description

Retrieves a list of workflows.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_list_workflows/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_list_workflows(
  type = NULL,
  name = NULL,
  startingToken = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

type

Filter the list by workflow type.

name

Filter the list by workflow name.

startingToken

Specify the pagination token from a previous request to retrieve the next page of results.

maxResults

The maximum number of workflows to return in one page of results.


Adds an access policy to the specified store

Description

Adds an access policy to the specified store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_put_s3_access_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_put_s3_access_policy(s3AccessPointArn, s3AccessPolicy)

Arguments

s3AccessPointArn

[required] The S3 access point ARN where you want to put the access policy.

s3AccessPolicy

[required] The resource policy that controls S3 access to the store.


Starts an annotation import job

Description

Starts an annotation import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_annotation_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_annotation_import_job(
  destinationName,
  roleArn,
  items,
  versionName = NULL,
  formatOptions = NULL,
  runLeftNormalization = NULL,
  annotationFields = NULL
)

Arguments

destinationName

[required] A destination annotation store for the job.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the job.

items

[required] Items to import.

versionName

The name of the annotation store version.

formatOptions

Formatting options for the annotation file.

runLeftNormalization

The job's left normalization setting.

annotationFields

The annotation schema generated by the parsed annotation data.


Activates an archived read set

Description

Activates an archived read set. To reduce storage charges, Amazon Omics archives unused read sets after 30 days.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_activation_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_read_set_activation_job(
  sequenceStoreId,
  clientToken = NULL,
  sources
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.

clientToken

To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job.

sources

[required] The job's source files.


Exports a read set to Amazon S3

Description

Exports a read set to Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_export_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_read_set_export_job(
  sequenceStoreId,
  destination,
  roleArn,
  clientToken = NULL,
  sources
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.

destination

[required] A location for exported files in Amazon S3.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the job.

clientToken

To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job.

sources

[required] The job's source files.


Starts a read set import job

Description

Starts a read set import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_read_set_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_read_set_import_job(
  sequenceStoreId,
  roleArn,
  clientToken = NULL,
  sources
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The read set's sequence store ID.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the job.

clientToken

To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job.

sources

[required] The job's source files.


Starts a reference import job

Description

Starts a reference import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_reference_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_reference_import_job(
  referenceStoreId,
  roleArn,
  clientToken = NULL,
  sources
)

Arguments

referenceStoreId

[required] The job's reference store ID.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the job.

clientToken

To ensure that jobs don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each job.

sources

[required] The job's source files.


Starts a workflow run

Description

Starts a workflow run. To duplicate a run, specify the run's ID and a role ARN. The remaining parameters are copied from the previous run.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_run/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_run(
  workflowId = NULL,
  workflowType = NULL,
  runId = NULL,
  roleArn,
  name = NULL,
  cacheId = NULL,
  cacheBehavior = NULL,
  runGroupId = NULL,
  priority = NULL,
  parameters = NULL,
  storageCapacity = NULL,
  outputUri = NULL,
  logLevel = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  requestId,
  retentionMode = NULL,
  storageType = NULL,
  workflowOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

workflowId

The run's workflow ID.

workflowType

The run's workflow type.

runId

The ID of a run to duplicate.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the run.

name

A name for the run.

cacheId

Identifier of the cache associated with this run. If you don't specify a cache ID, no task outputs are cached for this run.

cacheBehavior

The cache behavior for the run. You specify this value if you want to override the default behavior for the cache. You had set the default value when you created the cache. For more information, see Run cache behavior in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide.

runGroupId

The run's group ID.

priority

A priority for the run.

parameters

Parameters for the run.

storageCapacity

A storage capacity for the run in gibibytes. This field is not required if the storage type is dynamic (the system ignores any value that you enter).

outputUri

An output URI for the run.

logLevel

A log level for the run.

tags

Tags for the run.

requestId

[required] To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique ID for each request.

retentionMode

The retention mode for the run. The default value is RETAIN.

HealthOmics stores a fixed number of runs that are available to the console and API. In the default mode (RETAIN), you need to remove runs manually when the number of run exceeds the maximum. If you set the retention mode to REMOVE, HealthOmics automatically removes runs (that have mode set to REMOVE) when the number of run exceeds the maximum. All run logs are available in CloudWatch logs, if you need information about a run that is no longer available to the API.

For more information about retention mode, see Specifying run retention mode in the AWS HealthOmics User Guide.

storageType

The run's storage type. By default, the run uses STATIC storage type, which allocates a fixed amount of storage. If you set the storage type to DYNAMIC, HealthOmics dynamically scales the storage up or down, based on file system utilization.

workflowOwnerId

The ID of the workflow owner.


Starts a variant import job

Description

Starts a variant import job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_start_variant_import_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_start_variant_import_job(
  destinationName,
  roleArn,
  items,
  runLeftNormalization = NULL,
  annotationFields = NULL
)

Arguments

destinationName

[required] The destination variant store for the job.

roleArn

[required] A service role for the job.

items

[required] Items to import.

runLeftNormalization

The job's left normalization setting.

annotationFields

The annotation schema generated by the parsed annotation data.


Tags a resource

Description

Tags a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The resource's ARN.

tags

[required] Tags for the resource.


Removes tags from a resource

Description

Removes tags from a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The resource's ARN.

tagKeys

[required] Keys of tags to remove.


Updates an annotation store

Description

Updates an annotation store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_annotation_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_annotation_store(name, description = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.


Updates the description of an annotation store version

Description

Updates the description of an annotation store version.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_annotation_store_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_annotation_store_version(name, versionName, description = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] The name of an annotation store.

versionName

[required] The name of an annotation store version.

description

The description of an annotation store.


Update a run cache

Description

Update a run cache.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_run_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_run_cache(
  cacheBehavior = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  id,
  name = NULL
)

Arguments

cacheBehavior

Update the default run cache behavior.

description

Update the run cache description.

id

[required] The identifier of the run cache you want to update.

name

Update the name of the run cache.


Updates a run group

Description

Updates a run group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_run_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_run_group(
  id,
  name = NULL,
  maxCpus = NULL,
  maxRuns = NULL,
  maxDuration = NULL,
  maxGpus = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The group's ID.

name

A name for the group.

maxCpus

The maximum number of CPUs to use.

maxRuns

The maximum number of concurrent runs for the group.

maxDuration

A maximum run time for the group in minutes.

maxGpus

The maximum GPUs that can be used by a run group.


Update one or more parameters for the sequence store

Description

Update one or more parameters for the sequence store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_sequence_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_sequence_store(
  id,
  name = NULL,
  description = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL,
  fallbackLocation = NULL,
  propagatedSetLevelTags = NULL,
  s3AccessConfig = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The ID of the sequence store.

name

A name for the sequence store.

description

A description for the sequence store.

clientToken

To ensure that requests don't run multiple times, specify a unique token for each request.

fallbackLocation

The S3 URI of a bucket and folder to store Read Sets that fail to upload.

propagatedSetLevelTags

The tags keys to propagate to the S3 objects associated with read sets in the sequence store.

s3AccessConfig

S3 access configuration parameters.


Updates a variant store

Description

Updates a variant store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_variant_store/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_variant_store(name, description = NULL)

Arguments

name

[required] A name for the store.

description

A description for the store.


Updates a workflow

Description

Updates a workflow.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_update_workflow/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_update_workflow(id, name = NULL, description = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The workflow's ID.

name

A name for the workflow.

description

A description for the workflow.


This operation uploads a specific part of a read set

Description

This operation uploads a specific part of a read set. If you upload a new part using a previously used part number, the previously uploaded part will be overwritten.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/omics_upload_read_set_part/ for full documentation.

Usage

omics_upload_read_set_part(
  sequenceStoreId,
  uploadId,
  partSource,
  partNumber,
  payload
)

Arguments

sequenceStoreId

[required] The Sequence Store ID used for the multipart upload.

uploadId

[required] The ID for the initiated multipart upload.

partSource

[required] The source file for an upload part.

partNumber

[required] The number of the part being uploaded.

payload

[required] The read set data to upload for a part.


Amazon Recycle Bin

Description

This is the Recycle Bin API Reference. This documentation provides descriptions and syntax for each of the actions and data types in Recycle Bin.

Recycle Bin is a resource recovery feature that enables you to restore accidentally deleted snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs. When using Recycle Bin, if your resources are deleted, they are retained in the Recycle Bin for a time period that you specify.

You can restore a resource from the Recycle Bin at any time before its retention period expires. After you restore a resource from the Recycle Bin, the resource is removed from the Recycle Bin, and you can then use it in the same way you use any other resource of that type in your account. If the retention period expires and the resource is not restored, the resource is permanently deleted from the Recycle Bin and is no longer available for recovery. For more information about Recycle Bin, see Recycle Bin in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

Usage

recyclebin(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- recyclebin(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_rule Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule
delete_rule Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule
get_rule Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule
list_rules Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region
list_tags_for_resource Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule
lock_rule Locks a Region-level retention rule
tag_resource Assigns tags to the specified retention rule
unlock_rule Unlocks a retention rule
untag_resource Unassigns a tag from a retention rule
update_rule Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- recyclebin()
svc$create_rule(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule

Description

Creates a Recycle Bin retention rule. You can create two types of retention rules:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_create_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_create_rule(
  RetentionPeriod,
  Description = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  ResourceType,
  ResourceTags = NULL,
  LockConfiguration = NULL,
  ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)

Arguments

RetentionPeriod

[required] Information about the retention period for which the retention rule is to retain resources.

Description

The retention rule description.

Tags

Information about the tags to assign to the retention rule.

ResourceType

[required] The resource type to be retained by the retention rule. Currently, only Amazon EBS snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs are supported. To retain snapshots, specify EBS_SNAPSHOT. To retain EBS-backed AMIs, specify EC2_IMAGE.

ResourceTags

[Tag-level retention rules only] Specifies the resource tags to use to identify resources that are to be retained by a tag-level retention rule. For tag-level retention rules, only deleted resources, of the specified resource type, that have one or more of the specified tag key and value pairs are retained. If a resource is deleted, but it does not have any of the specified tag key and value pairs, it is immediately deleted without being retained by the retention rule.

You can add the same tag key and value pair to a maximum or five retention rules.

To create a Region-level retention rule, omit this parameter. A Region-level retention rule does not have any resource tags specified. It retains all deleted resources of the specified resource type in the Region in which the rule is created, even if the resources are not tagged.

LockConfiguration

Information about the retention rule lock configuration.

ExcludeResourceTags

[Region-level retention rules only] Specifies the exclusion tags to use to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by a Region-level retention rule. Resources that have any of these tags are not retained by the retention rule upon deletion.

You can't specify exclusion tags for tag-level retention rules.


Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule

Description

Deletes a Recycle Bin retention rule. For more information, see Delete Recycle Bin retention rules in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_delete_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_delete_rule(Identifier)

Arguments

Identifier

[required] The unique ID of the retention rule.


Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule

Description

Gets information about a Recycle Bin retention rule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_get_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_get_rule(Identifier)

Arguments

Identifier

[required] The unique ID of the retention rule.


Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region

Description

Lists the Recycle Bin retention rules in the Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_list_rules/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_list_rules(
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  ResourceType,
  ResourceTags = NULL,
  LockState = NULL,
  ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return with a single call. To retrieve the remaining results, make another call with the returned NextToken value.

NextToken

The token for the next page of results.

ResourceType

[required] The resource type retained by the retention rule. Only retention rules that retain the specified resource type are listed. Currently, only Amazon EBS snapshots and EBS-backed AMIs are supported. To list retention rules that retain snapshots, specify EBS_SNAPSHOT. To list retention rules that retain EBS-backed AMIs, specify EC2_IMAGE.

ResourceTags

[Tag-level retention rules only] Information about the resource tags used to identify resources that are retained by the retention rule.

LockState

The lock state of the retention rules to list. Only retention rules with the specified lock state are returned.

ExcludeResourceTags

[Region-level retention rules only] Information about the exclusion tags used to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by the retention rule.


Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule

Description

Lists the tags assigned to a retention rule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule.


Locks a Region-level retention rule

Description

Locks a Region-level retention rule. A locked retention rule can't be modified or deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_lock_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_lock_rule(Identifier, LockConfiguration)

Arguments

Identifier

[required] The unique ID of the retention rule.

LockConfiguration

[required] Information about the retention rule lock configuration.


Assigns tags to the specified retention rule

Description

Assigns tags to the specified retention rule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule.

Tags

[required] Information about the tags to assign to the retention rule.


Unlocks a retention rule

Description

Unlocks a retention rule. After a retention rule is unlocked, it can be modified or deleted only after the unlock delay period expires.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_unlock_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_unlock_rule(Identifier)

Arguments

Identifier

[required] The unique ID of the retention rule.


Unassigns a tag from a retention rule

Description

Unassigns a tag from a retention rule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the retention rule.

TagKeys

[required] The tag keys of the tags to unassign. All tags that have the specified tag key are unassigned.


Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule

Description

Updates an existing Recycle Bin retention rule. You can update a retention rule's description, resource tags, and retention period at any time after creation. You can't update a retention rule's resource type after creation. For more information, see Update Recycle Bin retention rules in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/recyclebin_update_rule/ for full documentation.

Usage

recyclebin_update_rule(
  Identifier,
  RetentionPeriod = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  ResourceTags = NULL,
  ExcludeResourceTags = NULL
)

Arguments

Identifier

[required] The unique ID of the retention rule.

RetentionPeriod

Information about the retention period for which the retention rule is to retain resources.

Description

The retention rule description.

ResourceType

This parameter is currently not supported. You can't update a retention rule's resource type after creation.

ResourceTags

[Tag-level retention rules only] Specifies the resource tags to use to identify resources that are to be retained by a tag-level retention rule. For tag-level retention rules, only deleted resources, of the specified resource type, that have one or more of the specified tag key and value pairs are retained. If a resource is deleted, but it does not have any of the specified tag key and value pairs, it is immediately deleted without being retained by the retention rule.

You can add the same tag key and value pair to a maximum or five retention rules.

To create a Region-level retention rule, omit this parameter. A Region-level retention rule does not have any resource tags specified. It retains all deleted resources of the specified resource type in the Region in which the rule is created, even if the resources are not tagged.

ExcludeResourceTags

[Region-level retention rules only] Specifies the exclusion tags to use to identify resources that are to be excluded, or ignored, by a Region-level retention rule. Resources that have any of these tags are not retained by the retention rule upon deletion.

You can't specify exclusion tags for tag-level retention rules.


Objects exported from other packages

Description

These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.

paws.common

config, credentials, creds, list_paginators, paginate, paginate_lapply, paginate_sapply, paws_stream_parser


Amazon Simple Storage Service

Description

Amazon Simple Storage Service

Usage

s3(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- s3(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

abort_multipart_upload This operation aborts a multipart upload
complete_multipart_upload Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts
copy_object Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3
create_bucket This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket
create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket
create_multipart_upload This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID
create_session Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets
delete_bucket Deletes the S3 bucket
delete_bucket_analytics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_cors This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_encryption This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3)
delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_inventory_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_lifecycle Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket
delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket
delete_bucket_metrics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_ownership_controls This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_policy Deletes the policy of a specified bucket
delete_bucket_replication This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_bucket_website This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_object Removes an object from a bucket
delete_objects This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request
delete_object_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
delete_public_access_block This operation is not supported for directory buckets
download_file Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location
generate_presigned_url @title Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments
get_bucket_accelerate_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_acl This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_analytics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_cors This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_encryption Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket
get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_inventory_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_lifecycle For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration
get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket
get_bucket_location This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_logging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket
get_bucket_metrics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_notification This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_notification_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_ownership_controls This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_policy Returns the policy of a specified bucket
get_bucket_policy_status This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_replication This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_request_payment This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_versioning This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_bucket_website This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object Retrieves an object from Amazon S3
get_object_acl This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object_attributes Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself
get_object_legal_hold This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object_lock_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object_retention This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_object_torrent This operation is not supported for directory buckets
get_public_access_block This operation is not supported for directory buckets
head_bucket You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it
head_object The HEAD operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself
list_bucket_analytics_configurations This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_bucket_inventory_configurations This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_bucket_metrics_configurations This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_buckets This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_directory_buckets Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request
list_multipart_uploads This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket
list_objects This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_objects_v2 Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request
list_object_versions This operation is not supported for directory buckets
list_parts Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload
put_bucket_accelerate_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_acl This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_analytics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_cors This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_encryption This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket
put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_inventory_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_lifecycle This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration
put_bucket_logging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_metrics_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_notification This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_notification_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_ownership_controls This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_policy Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket
put_bucket_replication This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_request_payment This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_versioning This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_bucket_website This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_object Adds an object to a bucket
put_object_acl This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_object_legal_hold This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_object_lock_configuration This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_object_retention This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_object_tagging This operation is not supported for directory buckets
put_public_access_block This operation is not supported for directory buckets
restore_object This operation is not supported for directory buckets
select_object_content This operation is not supported for directory buckets
upload_part Uploads a part in a multipart upload
upload_part_copy Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source
write_get_object_response This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- s3()
# The following example aborts a multipart upload.
svc$abort_multipart_upload(
  Bucket = "examplebucket",
  Key = "bigobject",
  UploadId = "xadcOB_7YPBOJuoFiQ9cz4P3Pe6FIZwO4f7wN93uHsNBEw97pl5eNwzExg0LA..."
)

## End(Not run)


This operation aborts a multipart upload

Description

This operation aborts a multipart upload. After a multipart upload is aborted, no additional parts can be uploaded using that upload ID. The storage consumed by any previously uploaded parts will be freed. However, if any part uploads are currently in progress, those part uploads might or might not succeed. As a result, it might be necessary to abort a given multipart upload multiple times in order to completely free all storage consumed by all parts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_abort_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_abort_multipart_upload(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  UploadId,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  IfMatchInitiatedTime = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name to which the upload was taking place.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Key of the object for which the multipart upload was initiated.

UploadId

[required] Upload ID that identifies the multipart upload.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

IfMatchInitiatedTime

If present, this header aborts an in progress multipart upload only if it was initiated on the provided timestamp. If the initiated timestamp of the multipart upload does not match the provided value, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error. If the initiated timestamp matches or if the multipart upload doesn’t exist, the operation returns a ⁠204 Success (No Content)⁠ response.

This functionality is only supported for directory buckets.


Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts

Description

Completes a multipart upload by assembling previously uploaded parts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_complete_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_complete_multipart_upload(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  MultipartUpload = NULL,
  UploadId,
  ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
  ChecksumType = NULL,
  MpuObjectSize = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  IfMatch = NULL,
  IfNoneMatch = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.

MultipartUpload

The container for the multipart upload request information.

UploadId

[required] ID for the initiated multipart upload.

ChecksumCRC32

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC32C

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC64NVME

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit CRC64NVME checksum of the object. The CRC64NVME checksum is always a full object checksum. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA1

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit SHA1 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA256

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit SHA256 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumType

This header specifies the checksum type of the object, which determines how part-level checksums are combined to create an object-level checksum for multipart objects. You can use this header as a data integrity check to verify that the checksum type that is received is the same checksum that was specified. If the checksum type doesn’t match the checksum type that was specified for the object during the create_multipart_upload request, it’ll result in a BadDigest error. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

MpuObjectSize

The expected total object size of the multipart upload request. If there’s a mismatch between the specified object size value and the actual object size value, it results in an ⁠HTTP 400 InvalidRequest⁠ error.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

IfMatch

Uploads the object only if the ETag (entity tag) value provided during the WRITE operation matches the ETag of the object in S3. If the ETag values do not match, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a ⁠409 ConditionalRequestConflict⁠ response. On a 409 failure you should fetch the object's ETag, re-initiate the multipart upload with create_multipart_upload, and re-upload each part.

Expects the ETag value as a string.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

IfNoneMatch

Uploads the object only if the object key name does not already exist in the bucket specified. Otherwise, Amazon S3 returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a ⁠409 ConditionalRequestConflict⁠ response. On a 409 failure you should re-initiate the multipart upload with create_multipart_upload and re-upload each part.

Expects the '*' (asterisk) character.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is required only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm or if your bucket policy requires the use of SSE-C. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.


Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3

Description

Creates a copy of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_copy_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_copy_object(
  ACL = NULL,
  Bucket,
  CacheControl = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ContentDisposition = NULL,
  ContentEncoding = NULL,
  ContentLanguage = NULL,
  ContentType = NULL,
  CopySource,
  CopySourceIfMatch = NULL,
  CopySourceIfModifiedSince = NULL,
  CopySourceIfNoneMatch = NULL,
  CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
  Expires = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  Key,
  Metadata = NULL,
  MetadataDirective = NULL,
  TaggingDirective = NULL,
  ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
  StorageClass = NULL,
  WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
  SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
  BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerKey = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  Tagging = NULL,
  ObjectLockMode = NULL,
  ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
  ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ExpectedSourceBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned access control list (ACL) to apply to the object.

When you copy an object, the ACL metadata is not preserved and is set to private by default. Only the owner has full access control. To override the default ACL setting, specify a new ACL when you generate a copy request. For more information, see Using ACLs.

If the destination bucket that you're copying objects to uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept PUT requests that don't specify an ACL or PUT requests that specify bucket owner full control ACLs, such as the bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL or an equivalent form of this ACL expressed in the XML format. For more information, see Controlling ownership of objects and disabling ACLs in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

  • If your destination bucket uses the bucket owner enforced setting for Object Ownership, all objects written to the bucket by any account will be owned by the bucket owner.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Bucket

[required] The name of the destination bucket.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Copying objects across different Amazon Web Services Regions isn't supported when the source or destination bucket is in Amazon Web Services Local Zones. The source and destination buckets must have the same parent Amazon Web Services Region. Otherwise, you get an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error with the error code InvalidRequest.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must use the Outpost bucket access point ARN or the access point alias for the destination bucket. You can only copy objects within the same Outpost bucket. It's not supported to copy objects across different Amazon Web Services Outposts, between buckets on the same Outposts, or between Outposts buckets and any other bucket types. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the S3 on Outposts guide. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts through the REST API, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname, in the format AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. The hostname isn't required when you use the Amazon Web Services CLI or SDKs.

CacheControl

Specifies the caching behavior along the request/reply chain.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm that you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

When you copy an object, if the source object has a checksum, that checksum value will be copied to the new object by default. If the copy_object request does not include this x-amz-checksum-algorithm header, the checksum algorithm will be copied from the source object to the destination object (if it's present on the source object). You can optionally specify a different checksum algorithm to use with the x-amz-checksum-algorithm header. Unrecognized or unsupported values will respond with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠.

For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, CRC32 is the default checksum algorithm that's used for performance.

ContentDisposition

Specifies presentational information for the object. Indicates whether an object should be displayed in a web browser or downloaded as a file. It allows specifying the desired filename for the downloaded file.

ContentEncoding

Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.

For directory buckets, only the aws-chunked value is supported in this header field.

ContentLanguage

The language the content is in.

ContentType

A standard MIME type that describes the format of the object data.

CopySource

[required] Specifies the source object for the copy operation. The source object can be up to 5 GB. If the source object is an object that was uploaded by using a multipart upload, the object copy will be a single part object after the source object is copied to the destination bucket.

You specify the value of the copy source in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:

  • For objects not accessed through an access point, specify the name of the source bucket and the key of the source object, separated by a slash (/). For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf from the general purpose bucket awsexamplebucket, use awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded. To copy the object reports/january.pdf from the directory bucket awsexamplebucket--use1-az5--x-s3, use awsexamplebucket--use1-az5--x-s3/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded.

  • For objects accessed through access points, specify the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the object as accessed through the access point, in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3:<Region>:<account-id>:accesspoint/<access-point-name>/object/<key>⁠. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through access point my-access-point owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3:us-west-2:123456789012:accesspoint/my-access-point/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.

    • Amazon S3 supports copy operations using Access points only when the source and destination buckets are in the same Amazon Web Services Region.

    • Access points are not supported by directory buckets.

    Alternatively, for objects accessed through Amazon S3 on Outposts, specify the ARN of the object as accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/object/<key>⁠. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded.

If your source bucket versioning is enabled, the x-amz-copy-source header by default identifies the current version of an object to copy. If the current version is a delete marker, Amazon S3 behaves as if the object was deleted. To copy a different version, use the versionId query parameter. Specifically, append ⁠?versionId=<version-id>⁠ to the value (for example, awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf?versionId=QUpfdndhfd8438MNFDN93jdnJFkdmqnh893). If you don't specify a version ID, Amazon S3 copies the latest version of the source object.

If you enable versioning on the destination bucket, Amazon S3 generates a unique version ID for the copied object. This version ID is different from the version ID of the source object. Amazon S3 returns the version ID of the copied object in the x-amz-version-id response header in the response.

If you do not enable versioning or suspend it on the destination bucket, the version ID that Amazon S3 generates in the x-amz-version-id response header is always null.

Directory buckets - S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets.

CopySourceIfMatch

Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag.

If both the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and copies the data:

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ condition evaluates to true

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ condition evaluates to false

CopySourceIfModifiedSince

Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time.

If both the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns the ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ response code:

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ condition evaluates to false

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ condition evaluates to true

CopySourceIfNoneMatch

Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag.

If both the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns the ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ response code:

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ condition evaluates to false

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ condition evaluates to true

CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince

Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time.

If both the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ headers are present in the request and evaluate as follows, Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and copies the data:

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ condition evaluates to true

  • ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ condition evaluates to false

Expires

The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.

GrantFullControl

Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the object ACL.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Key

[required] The key of the destination object.

Metadata

A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.

MetadataDirective

Specifies whether the metadata is copied from the source object or replaced with metadata that's provided in the request. When copying an object, you can preserve all metadata (the default) or specify new metadata. If this header isn’t specified, COPY is the default behavior.

General purpose bucket - For general purpose buckets, when you grant permissions, you can use the s3:x-amz-metadata-directive condition key to enforce certain metadata behavior when objects are uploaded. For more information, see Amazon S3 condition key examples in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

x-amz-website-redirect-location is unique to each object and is not copied when using the x-amz-metadata-directive header. To copy the value, you must specify x-amz-website-redirect-location in the request header.

TaggingDirective

Specifies whether the object tag-set is copied from the source object or replaced with the tag-set that's provided in the request.

The default value is COPY.

Directory buckets - For directory buckets in a copy_object operation, only the empty tag-set is supported. Any requests that attempt to write non-empty tags into directory buckets will receive a ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠ status code. When the destination bucket is a directory bucket, you will receive a ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠ response in any of the following situations:

  • When you attempt to COPY the tag-set from an S3 source object that has non-empty tags.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a source object and set a non-empty value to x-amz-tagging.

  • When you don't set the x-amz-tagging-directive header and the source object has non-empty tags. This is because the default value of x-amz-tagging-directive is COPY.

Because only the empty tag-set is supported for directory buckets in a copy_object operation, the following situations are allowed:

  • When you attempt to COPY the tag-set from a directory bucket source object that has no tags to a general purpose bucket. It copies an empty tag-set to the destination object.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a directory bucket source object and set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object to empty.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a general purpose bucket source object that has non-empty tags and set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object to empty.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a directory bucket source object and don't set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object. This is because the default value of x-amz-tagging is the empty value.

ServerSideEncryption

The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing this object in Amazon S3. Unrecognized or unsupported values won’t write a destination object and will receive a ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ response.

Amazon S3 automatically encrypts all new objects that are copied to an S3 bucket. When copying an object, if you don't specify encryption information in your copy request, the encryption setting of the target object is set to the default encryption configuration of the destination bucket. By default, all buckets have a base level of encryption configuration that uses server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3). If the destination bucket has a different default encryption configuration, Amazon S3 uses the corresponding encryption key to encrypt the target object copy.

With server-side encryption, Amazon S3 encrypts your data as it writes your data to disks in its data centers and decrypts the data when you access it. For more information about server-side encryption, see Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

General purpose buckets

  • For general purpose buckets, there are the following supported options for server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS), dual-layer server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS keys (DSSE-KMS), and server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C). Amazon S3 uses the corresponding KMS key, or a customer-provided key to encrypt the target object copy.

  • When you perform a copy_object operation, if you want to use a different type of encryption setting for the target object, you can specify appropriate encryption-related headers to encrypt the target object with an Amazon S3 managed key, a KMS key, or a customer-provided key. If the encryption setting in your request is different from the default encryption configuration of the destination bucket, the encryption setting in your request takes precedence.

Directory buckets

  • For directory buckets, there are only two supported options for server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) (AES256) and server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) (aws:kms). We recommend that the bucket's default encryption uses the desired encryption configuration and you don't override the bucket default encryption in your create_session requests or PUT object requests. Then, new objects are automatically encrypted with the desired encryption settings. For more information, see Protecting data with server-side encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the encryption overriding behaviors in directory buckets, see Specifying server-side encryption with KMS for new object uploads.

  • To encrypt new object copies to a directory bucket with SSE-KMS, we recommend you specify SSE-KMS as the directory bucket's default encryption configuration with a KMS key (specifically, a customer managed key). The Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) isn't supported. Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key per directory bucket for the lifetime of the bucket. After you specify a customer managed key for SSE-KMS, you can't override the customer managed key for the bucket's SSE-KMS configuration. Then, when you perform a copy_object operation and want to specify server-side encryption settings for new object copies with SSE-KMS in the encryption-related request headers, you must ensure the encryption key is the same customer managed key that you specified for the directory bucket's default encryption configuration.

StorageClass

If the x-amz-storage-class header is not used, the copied object will be stored in the STANDARD Storage Class by default. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class.

  • Directory buckets - For directory buckets, only the S3 Express One Zone storage class is supported to store newly created objects. Unsupported storage class values won't write a destination object and will respond with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠.

  • Amazon S3 on Outposts - S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class.

You can use the copy_object action to change the storage class of an object that is already stored in Amazon S3 by using the x-amz-storage-class header. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Before using an object as a source object for the copy operation, you must restore a copy of it if it meets any of the following conditions:

  • The storage class of the source object is GLACIER or DEEP_ARCHIVE.

  • The storage class of the source object is INTELLIGENT_TIERING and it's S3 Intelligent-Tiering access tier is ⁠Archive Access⁠ or ⁠Deep Archive Access⁠.

For more information, see restore_object and Copying Objects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

WebsiteRedirectLocation

If the destination bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object copy to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata. This value is unique to each object and is not copied when using the x-amz-metadata-directive header. Instead, you may opt to provide this header in combination with the x-amz-metadata-directive header.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

When you perform a copy_object operation, if you want to use a different type of encryption setting for the target object, you can specify appropriate encryption-related headers to encrypt the target object with an Amazon S3 managed key, a KMS key, or a customer-provided key. If the encryption setting in your request is different from the default encryption configuration of the destination bucket, the encryption setting in your request takes precedence.

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded. Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

SSEKMSKeyId

Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. All GET and PUT requests for an object protected by KMS will fail if they're not made via SSL or using SigV4. For information about configuring any of the officially supported Amazon Web Services SDKs and Amazon Web Services CLI, see Specifying the Signature Version in Request Authentication in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended to specify the x-amz-server-side-encryption header to aws:kms. Then, the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header implicitly uses the bucket's default KMS customer managed key ID. If you want to explicitly set the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header, it must match the bucket's default customer managed key (using key ID or ARN, not alias). Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key per directory bucket's lifetime. The Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) isn't supported. Incorrect key specification results in an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error.

SSEKMSEncryptionContext

Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an additional encryption context to use for the destination object encryption. The value of this header is a base64-encoded UTF-8 string holding JSON with the encryption context key-value pairs.

General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added to specify encryption context for copy_object requests if you want an additional encryption context for your destination object. The additional encryption context of the source object won't be copied to the destination object. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported.

BucketKeyEnabled

Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS). If a target object uses SSE-KMS, you can enable an S3 Bucket Key for the object.

Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS. Specifying this header with a COPY action doesn’t affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.

For more information, see Amazon S3 Bucket Keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys aren't supported, when you copy SSE-KMS encrypted objects from general purpose buckets to directory buckets, from directory buckets to general purpose buckets, or between directory buckets, through copy_object. In this case, Amazon S3 makes a call to KMS every time a copy request is made for a KMS-encrypted object.

CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for example, AES256).

If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying.

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

CopySourceSSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be the same one that was used when the source object was created.

If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying.

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

If the source object for the copy is stored in Amazon S3 using SSE-C, you must provide the necessary encryption information in your request so that Amazon S3 can decrypt the object for copying.

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

RequestPayer
Tagging

The tag-set for the object copy in the destination bucket. This value must be used in conjunction with the x-amz-tagging-directive if you choose REPLACE for the x-amz-tagging-directive. If you choose COPY for the x-amz-tagging-directive, you don't need to set the x-amz-tagging header, because the tag-set will be copied from the source object directly. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters.

The default value is the empty value.

Directory buckets - For directory buckets in a copy_object operation, only the empty tag-set is supported. Any requests that attempt to write non-empty tags into directory buckets will receive a ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠ status code. When the destination bucket is a directory bucket, you will receive a ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠ response in any of the following situations:

  • When you attempt to COPY the tag-set from an S3 source object that has non-empty tags.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a source object and set a non-empty value to x-amz-tagging.

  • When you don't set the x-amz-tagging-directive header and the source object has non-empty tags. This is because the default value of x-amz-tagging-directive is COPY.

Because only the empty tag-set is supported for directory buckets in a copy_object operation, the following situations are allowed:

  • When you attempt to COPY the tag-set from a directory bucket source object that has no tags to a general purpose bucket. It copies an empty tag-set to the destination object.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a directory bucket source object and set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object to empty.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a general purpose bucket source object that has non-empty tags and set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object to empty.

  • When you attempt to REPLACE the tag-set of a directory bucket source object and don't set the x-amz-tagging value of the directory bucket destination object. This is because the default value of x-amz-tagging is the empty value.

ObjectLockMode

The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the object copy.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockRetainUntilDate

The date and time when you want the Object Lock of the object copy to expire.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the object copy.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the destination bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ExpectedSourceBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the source bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket

Description

This action creates an Amazon S3 bucket. To create an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket, see create_bucket .

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_create_bucket(
  ACL = NULL,
  Bucket,
  CreateBucketConfiguration = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWrite = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  ObjectLockEnabledForBucket = NULL,
  ObjectOwnership = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket to create.

General purpose buckets - For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

CreateBucketConfiguration

The configuration information for the bucket.

GrantFullControl

Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

GrantWrite

Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket.

For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockEnabledForBucket

Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectOwnership

Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket

Description

Creates a metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_create_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  MetadataTableConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The general purpose bucket that you want to create the metadata table configuration in.

ContentMD5

The Content-MD5 header for the metadata table configuration.

ChecksumAlgorithm

The checksum algorithm to use with your metadata table configuration.

MetadataTableConfiguration

[required] The contents of your metadata table configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The expected owner of the general purpose bucket that contains your metadata table configuration.


This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID

Description

This action initiates a multipart upload and returns an upload ID. This upload ID is used to associate all of the parts in the specific multipart upload. You specify this upload ID in each of your subsequent upload part requests (see upload_part). You also include this upload ID in the final request to either complete or abort the multipart upload request. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_multipart_upload/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_create_multipart_upload(
  ACL = NULL,
  Bucket,
  CacheControl = NULL,
  ContentDisposition = NULL,
  ContentEncoding = NULL,
  ContentLanguage = NULL,
  ContentType = NULL,
  Expires = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  Key,
  Metadata = NULL,
  ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
  StorageClass = NULL,
  WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
  SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
  BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  Tagging = NULL,
  ObjectLockMode = NULL,
  ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
  ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ChecksumType = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the object. Amazon S3 supports a set of predefined ACLs, known as canned ACLs. Each canned ACL has a predefined set of grantees and permissions. For more information, see Canned ACL in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can grant access permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the access control list (ACL) on the new object. For more information, see Using ACLs. One way to grant the permissions using the request headers is to specify a canned ACL with the x-amz-acl request header.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket where the multipart upload is initiated and where the object is uploaded.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

CacheControl

Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.

ContentDisposition

Specifies presentational information for the object.

ContentEncoding

Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.

For directory buckets, only the aws-chunked value is supported in this header field.

ContentLanguage

The language that the content is in.

ContentType

A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.

Expires

The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.

GrantFullControl

Specify access permissions explicitly to give the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object.

By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

  • id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

  • uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

  • emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account

    Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

    • US East (N. Virginia)

    • US West (N. California)

    • US West (Oregon)

    • Asia Pacific (Singapore)

    • Asia Pacific (Sydney)

    • Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

    • Europe (Ireland)

    • South America (São Paulo)

    For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:

⁠x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666" ⁠

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantRead

Specify access permissions explicitly to allow grantee to read the object data and its metadata.

By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

  • id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

  • uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

  • emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account

    Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

    • US East (N. Virginia)

    • US West (N. California)

    • US West (Oregon)

    • Asia Pacific (Singapore)

    • Asia Pacific (Sydney)

    • Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

    • Europe (Ireland)

    • South America (São Paulo)

    For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:

⁠x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666" ⁠

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantReadACP

Specify access permissions explicitly to allows grantee to read the object ACL.

By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

  • id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

  • uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

  • emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account

    Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

    • US East (N. Virginia)

    • US West (N. California)

    • US West (Oregon)

    • Asia Pacific (Singapore)

    • Asia Pacific (Sydney)

    • Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

    • Europe (Ireland)

    • South America (São Paulo)

    For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:

⁠x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666" ⁠

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantWriteACP

Specify access permissions explicitly to allows grantee to allow grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object.

By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. When uploading an object, you can use this header to explicitly grant access permissions to specific Amazon Web Services accounts or groups. This header maps to specific permissions that Amazon S3 supports in an ACL. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

You specify each grantee as a type=value pair, where the type is one of the following:

  • id – if the value specified is the canonical user ID of an Amazon Web Services account

  • uri – if you are granting permissions to a predefined group

  • emailAddress – if the value specified is the email address of an Amazon Web Services account

    Using email addresses to specify a grantee is only supported in the following Amazon Web Services Regions:

    • US East (N. Virginia)

    • US West (N. California)

    • US West (Oregon)

    • Asia Pacific (Singapore)

    • Asia Pacific (Sydney)

    • Asia Pacific (Tokyo)

    • Europe (Ireland)

    • South America (São Paulo)

    For a list of all the Amazon S3 supported Regions and endpoints, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

For example, the following x-amz-grant-read header grants the Amazon Web Services accounts identified by account IDs permissions to read object data and its metadata:

⁠x-amz-grant-read: id="11112222333", id="444455556666" ⁠

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Key

[required] Object key for which the multipart upload is to be initiated.

Metadata

A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.

ServerSideEncryption

The server-side encryption algorithm used when you store this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).

  • Directory buckets - For directory buckets, there are only two supported options for server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) (AES256) and server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) (aws:kms). We recommend that the bucket's default encryption uses the desired encryption configuration and you don't override the bucket default encryption in your create_session requests or PUT object requests. Then, new objects are automatically encrypted with the desired encryption settings. For more information, see Protecting data with server-side encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the encryption overriding behaviors in directory buckets, see Specifying server-side encryption with KMS for new object uploads.

    In the Zonal endpoint API calls (except copy_object and upload_part_copy) using the REST API, the encryption request headers must match the encryption settings that are specified in the create_session request. You can't override the values of the encryption settings (x-amz-server-side-encryption, x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, x-amz-server-side-encryption-context, and x-amz-server-side-encryption-bucket-key-enabled) that are specified in the create_session request. You don't need to explicitly specify these encryption settings values in Zonal endpoint API calls, and Amazon S3 will use the encryption settings values from the create_session request to protect new objects in the directory bucket.

    When you use the CLI or the Amazon Web Services SDKs, for create_session, the session token refreshes automatically to avoid service interruptions when a session expires. The CLI or the Amazon Web Services SDKs use the bucket's default encryption configuration for the create_session request. It's not supported to override the encryption settings values in the create_session request. So in the Zonal endpoint API calls (except copy_object and upload_part_copy), the encryption request headers must match the default encryption configuration of the directory bucket.

StorageClass

By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

  • For directory buckets, only the S3 Express One Zone storage class is supported to store newly created objects.

  • Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class.

WebsiteRedirectLocation

If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the customer-provided encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSEKMSKeyId

Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. If the KMS key doesn't exist in the same account that's issuing the command, you must use the full Key ARN not the Key ID.

General purpose buckets - If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption with aws:kms or aws:kms:dsse, this header specifies the ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) of the KMS key to use. If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms or x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms:dsse, but do not provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) to protect the data.

Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended to specify the x-amz-server-side-encryption header to aws:kms. Then, the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header implicitly uses the bucket's default KMS customer managed key ID. If you want to explicitly set the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header, it must match the bucket's default customer managed key (using key ID or ARN, not alias). Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key per directory bucket's lifetime. The Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) isn't supported. Incorrect key specification results in an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error.

SSEKMSEncryptionContext

Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which contains the encryption context as key-value pairs.

Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported.

BucketKeyEnabled

Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS).

General purpose buckets - Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS. Also, specifying this header with a PUT action doesn't affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.

Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for GET and PUT operations in a directory bucket and can’t be disabled. S3 Bucket Keys aren't supported, when you copy SSE-KMS encrypted objects from general purpose buckets to directory buckets, from directory buckets to general purpose buckets, or between directory buckets, through copy_object, upload_part_copy, the Copy operation in Batch Operations, or the import jobs. In this case, Amazon S3 makes a call to KMS every time a copy request is made for a KMS-encrypted object.

RequestPayer
Tagging

The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockMode

Specifies the Object Lock mode that you want to apply to the uploaded object.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockRetainUntilDate

Specifies the date and time when you want the Object Lock to expire.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

Specifies whether you want to apply a legal hold to the uploaded object.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm that you want Amazon S3 to use to create the checksum for the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumType

Indicates the checksum type that you want Amazon S3 to use to calculate the object’s checksum value. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.


Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets

Description

Creates a session that establishes temporary security credentials to support fast authentication and authorization for the Zonal endpoint API operations on directory buckets. For more information about Zonal endpoint API operations that include the Availability Zone in the request endpoint, see S3 Express One Zone APIs in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_create_session/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_create_session(
  SessionMode = NULL,
  Bucket,
  ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
  SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
  SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
  BucketKeyEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

SessionMode

Specifies the mode of the session that will be created, either ReadWrite or ReadOnly. By default, a ReadWrite session is created. A ReadWrite session is capable of executing all the Zonal endpoint API operations on a directory bucket. A ReadOnly session is constrained to execute the following Zonal endpoint API operations: get_object, head_object, list_objects_v2, get_object_attributes, list_parts, and list_multipart_uploads.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket that you create a session for.

ServerSideEncryption

The server-side encryption algorithm to use when you store objects in the directory bucket.

For directory buckets, there are only two supported options for server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) (AES256) and server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) (aws:kms). By default, Amazon S3 encrypts data with SSE-S3. For more information, see Protecting data with server-side encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

SSEKMSKeyId

If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption with aws:kms, you must specify the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header with the ID (Key ID or Key ARN) of the KMS symmetric encryption customer managed key to use. Otherwise, you get an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error. Only use the key ID or key ARN. The key alias format of the KMS key isn't supported. Also, if the KMS key doesn't exist in the same account that't issuing the command, you must use the full Key ARN not the Key ID.

Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key per directory bucket's lifetime. The Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) isn't supported.

SSEKMSEncryptionContext

Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an additional encryption context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which contains the encryption context as key-value pairs. This value is stored as object metadata and automatically gets passed on to Amazon Web Services KMS for future get_object operations on this object.

General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added during copy_object operations if you want an additional encryption context for your object. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported.

BucketKeyEnabled

Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using KMS keys (SSE-KMS).

S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for GET and PUT operations in a directory bucket and can’t be disabled. S3 Bucket Keys aren't supported, when you copy SSE-KMS encrypted objects from general purpose buckets to directory buckets, from directory buckets to general purpose buckets, or between directory buckets, through copy_object, upload_part_copy, the Copy operation in Batch Operations, or the import jobs. In this case, Amazon S3 makes a call to KMS every time a copy request is made for a KMS-encrypted object.


Deletes the S3 bucket

Description

Deletes the S3 bucket. All objects (including all object versions and delete markers) in the bucket must be deleted before the bucket itself can be deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket being deleted.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_analytics_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is deleted.

Id

[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_cors(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket whose cors configuration is being deleted.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3)

Description

This implementation of the DELETE action resets the default encryption for the bucket as server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_encryption(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the server-side encryption configuration to delete.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(Bucket, Id)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_inventory_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to delete.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket

Description

Deletes the lifecycle configuration from the specified bucket. Amazon S3 removes all the lifecycle configuration rules in the lifecycle subresource associated with the bucket. Your objects never expire, and Amazon S3 no longer automatically deletes any objects on the basis of rules contained in the deleted lifecycle configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_lifecycle(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name of the lifecycle to delete.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations.


Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket

Description

Deletes a metadata table configuration from a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(
  Bucket,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The general purpose bucket that you want to remove the metadata table configuration from.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The expected bucket owner of the general purpose bucket that you want to remove the metadata table configuration from.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_metrics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to delete.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_ownership_controls(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to delete.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Deletes the policy of a specified bucket

Description

Deletes the policy of a specified bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_policy(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_replication(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_tagging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket that has the tag set to be removed.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_bucket_website/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_bucket_website(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name for which you want to remove the website configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Removes an object from a bucket

Description

Removes an object from a bucket. The behavior depends on the bucket's versioning state:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_object(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  MFA = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  IfMatch = NULL,
  IfMatchLastModifiedTime = NULL,
  IfMatchSize = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name of the bucket containing the object.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Key name of the object to delete.

MFA

The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

VersionId

Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

For directory buckets in this API operation, only the null value of the version ID is supported.

RequestPayer
BypassGovernanceRetention

Indicates whether S3 Object Lock should bypass Governance-mode restrictions to process this operation. To use this header, you must have the s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

IfMatch

The If-Match header field makes the request method conditional on ETags. If the ETag value does not match, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error. If the ETag matches or if the object doesn't exist, the operation will return a ⁠204 Success (No Content) response⁠.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

This functionality is only supported for directory buckets.

IfMatchLastModifiedTime

If present, the object is deleted only if its modification times matches the provided Timestamp. If the Timestamp values do not match, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error. If the Timestamp matches or if the object doesn’t exist, the operation returns a ⁠204 Success (No Content)⁠ response.

This functionality is only supported for directory buckets.

IfMatchSize

If present, the object is deleted only if its size matches the provided size in bytes. If the Size value does not match, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error. If the Size matches or if the object doesn’t exist, the operation returns a ⁠204 Success (No Content)⁠ response.

This functionality is only supported for directory buckets.

You can use the If-Match, ⁠x-amz-if-match-last-modified-time⁠ and ⁠x-amz-if-match-size⁠ conditional headers in conjunction with each-other or individually.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_object_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_object_tagging(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the objects from which to remove the tags.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key that identifies the object in the bucket from which to remove all tags.

VersionId

The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be removed from.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request

Description

This operation enables you to delete multiple objects from a bucket using a single HTTP request. If you know the object keys that you want to delete, then this operation provides a suitable alternative to sending individual delete requests, reducing per-request overhead.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_objects/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_objects(
  Bucket,
  Delete,
  MFA = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the objects to delete.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Delete

[required] Container for the request.

MFA

The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device. Required to permanently delete a versioned object if versioning is configured with MFA delete enabled.

When performing the delete_objects operation on an MFA delete enabled bucket, which attempts to delete the specified versioned objects, you must include an MFA token. If you don't provide an MFA token, the entire request will fail, even if there are non-versioned objects that you are trying to delete. If you provide an invalid token, whether there are versioned object keys in the request or not, the entire Multi-Object Delete request will fail. For information about MFA Delete, see MFA Delete in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
BypassGovernanceRetention

Specifies whether you want to delete this object even if it has a Governance-type Object Lock in place. To use this header, you must have the s3:BypassGovernanceRetention permission.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum-algorithm or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠.

For the x-amz-checksum-algorithm header, replace algorithm with the supported algorithm from the following list:

  • CRC32

  • CRC32C

  • CRC64NVME

  • SHA1

  • SHA256

For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If the individual checksum value you provide through x-amz-checksum-algorithm doesn't match the checksum algorithm you set through x-amz-sdk-checksum-algorithm, Amazon S3 fails the request with a BadDigest error.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_delete_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_delete_public_access_block(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to delete.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location

Description

Download a file from S3 and store it at a specified file location.

Usage

s3_download_file(Bucket, Key, Filename, IfMatch, IfModifiedSince,
IfNoneMatch, IfUnmodifiedSince, Range, ResponseCacheControl,
ResponseContentDisposition, ResponseContentEncoding, ResponseContentLanguage,
ResponseContentType, ResponseExpires, VersionId, SSECustomerAlgorithm,
SSECustomerKey, SSECustomerKeyMD5, RequestPayer, PartNumber,
ExpectedBucketOwner)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object.

When using this API with an access point, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this operation with an access point through the AWS SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using Access Points in the Amazon Simple Storage Service Developer Guide.

When using this API with Amazon S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this operation using S3 on Outposts through the AWS SDKs, you provide the Outposts bucket ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about S3 on Outposts ARNs, see Using S3 on Outposts in the Amazon Simple Storage Service Developer Guide.

Key

[required] Key of the object to get.

Filename

[required] A local file location where the downloaded object will be saved.

IfMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).

IfModifiedSince

Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).

IfNoneMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified, otherwise return a 304 (not modified).

IfUnmodifiedSince

Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time, otherwise return a 412 (precondition failed).

Range

Downloads the specified range bytes of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see https://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.35.

Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per GET request.

ResponseCacheControl

Sets the Cache-Control header of the response.

ResponseContentDisposition

Sets the Content-Disposition header of the response

ResponseContentEncoding

Sets the Content-Encoding header of the response.

ResponseContentLanguage

Sets the Content-Language header of the response.

ResponseContentType

Sets the Content-Type header of the response.

ResponseExpires

Sets the Expires header of the response.

VersionId

VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use to when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

RequestPayer

Confirms that the requester knows that they will be charged for the request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests

PartNumber

Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified. Useful for downloading just a part of an object.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account id of the expected bucket owner. If the bucket is owned by a different account, the request will fail with an HTTP ⁠403 (Access Denied)⁠ error.

Details

This is a wrapper function for get_object that will write the downloaded object to the file location specified.

Request syntax

svc$download_file(
  Bucket = "string",
  Key = "string",
  Filename = "string"
)

Examples

## Not run: 
# The following example retrieves an object from an S3 bucket. The request
# specifies the range header to retrieve a specific byte range. The text file
# is saved in a local output folder.
svc$download_file(
  Bucket = "examplebucket",
  Key = "SampleFile.txt",
  Range = "bytes=0-9",
  Filename = "./output/SampleFile.txt"
)

# The following example retrieves an object from an S3 bucket. The object is
# stored in the current directory as "HappyFace.jpg".
svc$download_file(
  Bucket = "examplebucket",
  Key = "HappyFace.jpg",
  Filename = "HappyFace.jpg"
)

## End(Not run)


Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments

Description

Generate a presigned url given a client, its method, and arguments

Usage

s3_generate_presigned_url(client_method, params=list(), expires_in=3600,
http_method = NULL)

Arguments

client_method

(character): The client method to presign for

params

(list): The parameters normally passed to client_method.

expires_in

(numeric): The number of seconds the presigned url is valid for. By default it expires in an hour (3600 seconds)

http_method

(character) The http method to use on the generated url. By default, the http method is whatever is used in the method's model.

Value

The presigned url character

Request syntax

svc$generate_signed_url(
  client_method = "string",
  params = "list",
  expires_in = "numeric",
  http_method = "string"
)

Examples

## Not run: 
# The following example generates a presigned URL that you
# can give to others so that they can retrieve an object from an S3 bucket.
svc$generate_signed_url(
  client_method = "get_object",
  Params = list(Bucket = "BUCKET_NAME", Key = "OBJECT_KEY"),
  ExpiresIn = 3600
)

## End(Not run)

This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_accelerate_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_accelerate_configuration(
  Bucket,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is retrieved.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

RequestPayer

This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_acl(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Specifies the S3 bucket whose ACL is being requested.

When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_analytics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket from which an analytics configuration is retrieved.

Id

[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_cors(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name for which to get the cors configuration.

When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket

Description

Returns the default encryption configuration for an Amazon S3 bucket. By default, all buckets have a default encryption configuration that uses server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_encryption(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket from which the server-side encryption configuration is retrieved.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(Bucket, Id)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_inventory_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configuration to retrieve.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


For an updated version of this API, see GetBucketLifecycleConfiguration

Description

For an updated version of this API, see get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration. If you configured a bucket lifecycle using the filter element, you should see the updated version of this topic. This topic is provided for backward compatibility.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_lifecycle(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket

Description

Returns the lifecycle configuration information set on the bucket. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Object Lifecycle Management.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the lifecycle information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_location(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the location.

When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_logging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_logging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name for which to get the logging information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket

Description

Retrieves the metadata table configuration for a general purpose bucket. For more information, see Accelerating data discovery with S3 Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_metadata_table_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The general purpose bucket that contains the metadata table configuration that you want to retrieve.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The expected owner of the general purpose bucket that you want to retrieve the metadata table configuration from.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_metrics_configuration(Bucket, Id, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configuration to retrieve.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_notification/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_notification(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration.

When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_notification_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_notification_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the notification configuration.

When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_ownership_controls(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to retrieve.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Returns the policy of a specified bucket

Description

Returns the policy of a specified bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_policy(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name to get the bucket policy for.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

Access points - When you use this API operation with an access point, provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name.

Object Lambda access points - When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_policy_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_policy_status(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose policy status you want to retrieve.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_replication(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name for which to get the replication information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_request_payment/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_request_payment(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the payment request configuration

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_tagging(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the tagging information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_versioning(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to get the versioning information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_bucket_website/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_bucket_website(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name for which to get the website configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Retrieves an object from Amazon S3

Description

Retrieves an object from Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object(
  Bucket,
  IfMatch = NULL,
  IfModifiedSince = NULL,
  IfNoneMatch = NULL,
  IfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
  Key,
  Range = NULL,
  ResponseCacheControl = NULL,
  ResponseContentDisposition = NULL,
  ResponseContentEncoding = NULL,
  ResponseContentLanguage = NULL,
  ResponseContentType = NULL,
  ResponseExpires = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  PartNumber = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ChecksumMode = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Object Lambda access points - When you use this action with an Object Lambda access point, you must direct requests to the Object Lambda access point hostname. The Object Lambda access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-object-lambda.Region.amazonaws.com.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

IfMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified in this header; otherwise, return a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-Match condition evaluates to true, and; If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false; then, S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and the data requested.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfModifiedSince

Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ error.

If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and; If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true; then, S3 returns ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ status code.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfNoneMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified in this header; otherwise, return a ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ error.

If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and; If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true; then, S3 returns ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ HTTP status code.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfUnmodifiedSince

Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows: If-Match condition evaluates to true, and; If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false; then, S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and the data requested.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

Key

[required] Key of the object to get.

Range

Downloads the specified byte range of an object. For more information about the HTTP Range header, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-range.

Amazon S3 doesn't support retrieving multiple ranges of data per GET request.

ResponseCacheControl

Sets the Cache-Control header of the response.

ResponseContentDisposition

Sets the Content-Disposition header of the response.

ResponseContentEncoding

Sets the Content-Encoding header of the response.

ResponseContentLanguage

Sets the Content-Language header of the response.

ResponseContentType

Sets the Content-Type header of the response.

ResponseExpires

Sets the Expires header of the response.

VersionId

Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

By default, the get_object operation returns the current version of an object. To return a different version, use the versionId subresource.

  • If you include a versionId in your request header, you must have the s3:GetObjectVersion permission to access a specific version of an object. The s3:GetObject permission is not required in this scenario.

  • If you request the current version of an object without a specific versionId in the request header, only the s3:GetObject permission is required. The s3:GetObjectVersion permission is not required in this scenario.

  • Directory buckets - S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets. For this API operation, only the null value of the version ID is supported by directory buckets. You can only specify null to the versionId query parameter in the request.

For more information about versioning, see put_bucket_versioning.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the object (for example, AES256).

If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key that you originally provided for Amazon S3 to encrypt the data before storing it. This value is used to decrypt the object when recovering it and must match the one used when storing the data. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the customer-provided encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

If you encrypt an object by using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C) when you store the object in Amazon S3, then when you GET the object, you must use the following headers:

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key

  • x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-key-MD5

For more information about SSE-C, see Server-Side Encryption (Using Customer-Provided Encryption Keys) in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
PartNumber

Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' GET request for the part specified. Useful for downloading just a part of an object.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ChecksumMode

To retrieve the checksum, this mode must be enabled.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_acl(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name that contains the object for which to get the ACL information.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key of the object for which to get the ACL information.

VersionId

Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself

Description

Retrieves all the metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This operation is useful if you're interested only in an object's metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_attributes(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  MaxParts = NULL,
  PartNumberMarker = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ObjectAttributes
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket that contains the object.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The object key.

VersionId

The version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets. For this API operation, only the null value of the version ID is supported by directory buckets. You can only specify null to the versionId query parameter in the request.

MaxParts

Sets the maximum number of parts to return.

PartNumberMarker

Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part numbers will be listed.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ObjectAttributes

[required] Specifies the fields at the root level that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned.


Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_legal_hold(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key name for the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve.

VersionId

The version ID of the object whose legal hold status you want to retrieve.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_lock_configuration(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to retrieve.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_retention/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_retention(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key name for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.

VersionId

The version ID for the object whose retention settings you want to retrieve.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_tagging(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object for which to get the tagging information.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Object key for which to get the tagging information.

VersionId

The versionId of the object for which to get the tagging information.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

RequestPayer

This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_object_torrent/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_object_torrent(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the object for which to get the torrent files.

Key

[required] The object key for which to get the information.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_get_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_get_public_access_block(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to retrieve.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it

Description

You can use this operation to determine if a bucket exists and if you have permission to access it. The action returns a ⁠200 OK⁠ if the bucket exists and you have permission to access it.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_head_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_head_bucket(Bucket, ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Object Lambda access points - When you use this API operation with an Object Lambda access point, provide the alias of the Object Lambda access point in place of the bucket name. If the Object Lambda access point alias in a request is not valid, the error code InvalidAccessPointAliasError is returned. For more information about InvalidAccessPointAliasError, see List of Error Codes.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


The HEAD operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself

Description

The HEAD operation retrieves metadata from an object without returning the object itself. This operation is useful if you're interested only in an object's metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_head_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_head_object(
  Bucket,
  IfMatch = NULL,
  IfModifiedSince = NULL,
  IfNoneMatch = NULL,
  IfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
  Key,
  Range = NULL,
  ResponseCacheControl = NULL,
  ResponseContentDisposition = NULL,
  ResponseContentEncoding = NULL,
  ResponseContentLanguage = NULL,
  ResponseContentType = NULL,
  ResponseExpires = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  PartNumber = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ChecksumMode = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket that contains the object.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

IfMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is the same as the one specified; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.

If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

  • If-Match condition evaluates to true, and;

  • If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false;

Then Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and the data requested.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfModifiedSince

Return the object only if it has been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.

If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

  • If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and;

  • If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true;

Then Amazon S3 returns the ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ response code.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfNoneMatch

Return the object only if its entity tag (ETag) is different from the one specified; otherwise, return a 304 (not modified) error.

If both of the If-None-Match and If-Modified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

  • If-None-Match condition evaluates to false, and;

  • If-Modified-Since condition evaluates to true;

Then Amazon S3 returns the ⁠304 Not Modified⁠ response code.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

IfUnmodifiedSince

Return the object only if it has not been modified since the specified time; otherwise, return a 412 (precondition failed) error.

If both of the If-Match and If-Unmodified-Since headers are present in the request as follows:

  • If-Match condition evaluates to true, and;

  • If-Unmodified-Since condition evaluates to false;

Then Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and the data requested.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232.

Key

[required] The object key.

Range

HeadObject returns only the metadata for an object. If the Range is satisfiable, only the ContentLength is affected in the response. If the Range is not satisfiable, S3 returns a ⁠416 - Requested Range Not Satisfiable⁠ error.

ResponseCacheControl

Sets the Cache-Control header of the response.

ResponseContentDisposition

Sets the Content-Disposition header of the response.

ResponseContentEncoding

Sets the Content-Encoding header of the response.

ResponseContentLanguage

Sets the Content-Language header of the response.

ResponseContentType

Sets the Content-Type header of the response.

ResponseExpires

Sets the Expires header of the response.

VersionId

Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

For directory buckets in this API operation, only the null value of the version ID is supported.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
PartNumber

Part number of the object being read. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000. Effectively performs a 'ranged' HEAD request for the part specified. Useful querying about the size of the part and the number of parts in this object.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ChecksumMode

To retrieve the checksum, this parameter must be enabled.

General purpose buckets - If you enable checksum mode and the object is uploaded with a checksum and encrypted with an Key Management Service (KMS) key, you must have permission to use the kms:Decrypt action to retrieve the checksum.

Directory buckets - If you enable ChecksumMode and the object is encrypted with Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS), you must also have the kms:GenerateDataKey and kms:Decrypt permissions in IAM identity-based policies and KMS key policies for the KMS key to retrieve the checksum of the object.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_analytics_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_bucket_analytics_configurations(
  Bucket,
  ContinuationToken = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket from which analytics configurations are retrieved.

ContinuationToken

The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request should begin.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configurations(
  Bucket,
  ContinuationToken = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.

ContinuationToken

The ContinuationToken that represents a placeholder from where this request should begin.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_inventory_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_bucket_inventory_configurations(
  Bucket,
  ContinuationToken = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the inventory configurations to retrieve.

ContinuationToken

The marker used to continue an inventory configuration listing that has been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_bucket_metrics_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_bucket_metrics_configurations(
  Bucket,
  ContinuationToken = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the metrics configurations to retrieve.

ContinuationToken

The marker that is used to continue a metrics configuration listing that has been truncated. Use the NextContinuationToken from a previously truncated list response to continue the listing. The continuation token is an opaque value that Amazon S3 understands.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_buckets/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_buckets(
  MaxBuckets = NULL,
  ContinuationToken = NULL,
  Prefix = NULL,
  BucketRegion = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxBuckets

Maximum number of buckets to be returned in response. When the number is more than the count of buckets that are owned by an Amazon Web Services account, return all the buckets in response.

ContinuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key. You can use this ContinuationToken for pagination of the list results.

Length Constraints: Minimum length of 0. Maximum length of 1024.

Required: No.

If you specify the bucket-region, prefix, or continuation-token query parameters without using max-buckets to set the maximum number of buckets returned in the response, Amazon S3 applies a default page size of 10,000 and provides a continuation token if there are more buckets.

Prefix

Limits the response to bucket names that begin with the specified bucket name prefix.

BucketRegion

Limits the response to buckets that are located in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. The Amazon Web Services Region must be expressed according to the Amazon Web Services Region code, such as us-west-2 for the US West (Oregon) Region. For a list of the valid values for all of the Amazon Web Services Regions, see Regions and Endpoints.

Requests made to a Regional endpoint that is different from the bucket-region parameter are not supported. For example, if you want to limit the response to your buckets in Region us-west-2, the request must be made to an endpoint in Region us-west-2.


Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request

Description

Returns a list of all Amazon S3 directory buckets owned by the authenticated sender of the request. For more information about directory buckets, see Directory buckets in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_directory_buckets/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_directory_buckets(ContinuationToken = NULL, MaxDirectoryBuckets = NULL)

Arguments

ContinuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on buckets in this account with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real bucket name. You can use this ContinuationToken for the pagination of the list results.

MaxDirectoryBuckets

Maximum number of buckets to be returned in response. When the number is more than the count of buckets that are owned by an Amazon Web Services account, return all the buckets in response.


This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket

Description

This operation lists in-progress multipart uploads in a bucket. An in-progress multipart upload is a multipart upload that has been initiated by the create_multipart_upload request, but has not yet been completed or aborted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_multipart_uploads/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_multipart_uploads(
  Bucket,
  Delimiter = NULL,
  EncodingType = NULL,
  KeyMarker = NULL,
  MaxUploads = NULL,
  Prefix = NULL,
  UploadIdMarker = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Delimiter

Character you use to group keys.

All keys that contain the same string between the prefix, if specified, and the first occurrence of the delimiter after the prefix are grouped under a single result element, CommonPrefixes. If you don't specify the prefix parameter, then the substring starts at the beginning of the key. The keys that are grouped under CommonPrefixes result element are not returned elsewhere in the response.

Directory buckets - For directory buckets, / is the only supported delimiter.

EncodingType
KeyMarker

Specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin.

  • General purpose buckets - For general purpose buckets, key-marker is an object key. Together with upload-id-marker, this parameter specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin.

    If upload-id-marker is not specified, only the keys lexicographically greater than the specified key-marker will be included in the list.

    If upload-id-marker is specified, any multipart uploads for a key equal to the key-marker might also be included, provided those multipart uploads have upload IDs lexicographically greater than the specified upload-id-marker.

  • Directory buckets - For directory buckets, key-marker is obfuscated and isn't a real object key. The upload-id-marker parameter isn't supported by directory buckets. To list the additional multipart uploads, you only need to set the value of key-marker to the NextKeyMarker value from the previous response.

    In the list_multipart_uploads response, the multipart uploads aren't sorted lexicographically based on the object keys.

MaxUploads

Sets the maximum number of multipart uploads, from 1 to 1,000, to return in the response body. 1,000 is the maximum number of uploads that can be returned in a response.

Prefix

Lists in-progress uploads only for those keys that begin with the specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different grouping of keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way that you'd use a folder in a file system.)

Directory buckets - For directory buckets, only prefixes that end in a delimiter (/) are supported.

UploadIdMarker

Together with key-marker, specifies the multipart upload after which listing should begin. If key-marker is not specified, the upload-id-marker parameter is ignored. Otherwise, any multipart uploads for a key equal to the key-marker might be included in the list only if they have an upload ID lexicographically greater than the specified upload-id-marker.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

RequestPayer

This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_object_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_object_versions(
  Bucket,
  Delimiter = NULL,
  EncodingType = NULL,
  KeyMarker = NULL,
  MaxKeys = NULL,
  Prefix = NULL,
  VersionIdMarker = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name that contains the objects.

Delimiter

A delimiter is a character that you specify to group keys. All keys that contain the same string between the prefix and the first occurrence of the delimiter are grouped under a single result element in CommonPrefixes. These groups are counted as one result against the max-keys limitation. These keys are not returned elsewhere in the response.

EncodingType
KeyMarker

Specifies the key to start with when listing objects in a bucket.

MaxKeys

Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default, the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more. If additional keys satisfy the search criteria, but were not returned because max-keys was exceeded, the response contains ⁠<isTruncated>true</isTruncated>⁠. To return the additional keys, see key-marker and version-id-marker.

Prefix

Use this parameter to select only those keys that begin with the specified prefix. You can use prefixes to separate a bucket into different groupings of keys. (You can think of using prefix to make groups in the same way that you'd use a folder in a file system.) You can use prefix with delimiter to roll up numerous objects into a single result under CommonPrefixes.

VersionIdMarker

Specifies the object version you want to start listing from.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

RequestPayer
OptionalObjectAttributes

Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_objects/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_objects(
  Bucket,
  Delimiter = NULL,
  EncodingType = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxKeys = NULL,
  Prefix = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket containing the objects.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Delimiter

A delimiter is a character that you use to group keys.

EncodingType
Marker

Marker is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. Marker can be any key in the bucket.

MaxKeys

Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default, the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more.

Prefix

Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.

RequestPayer

Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

OptionalObjectAttributes

Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned.


Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request

Description

Returns some or all (up to 1,000) of the objects in a bucket with each request. You can use the request parameters as selection criteria to return a subset of the objects in a bucket. A ⁠200 OK⁠ response can contain valid or invalid XML. Make sure to design your application to parse the contents of the response and handle it appropriately. For more information about listing objects, see Listing object keys programmatically in the Amazon S3 User Guide. To get a list of your buckets, see list_buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_objects_v2/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_objects_v2(
  Bucket,
  Delimiter = NULL,
  EncodingType = NULL,
  MaxKeys = NULL,
  Prefix = NULL,
  ContinuationToken = NULL,
  FetchOwner = NULL,
  StartAfter = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  OptionalObjectAttributes = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Delimiter

A delimiter is a character that you use to group keys.

  • Directory buckets - For directory buckets, / is the only supported delimiter.

  • Directory buckets - When you query list_objects_v2 with a delimiter during in-progress multipart uploads, the CommonPrefixes response parameter contains the prefixes that are associated with the in-progress multipart uploads. For more information about multipart uploads, see Multipart Upload Overview in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

EncodingType

Encoding type used by Amazon S3 to encode the object keys in the response. Responses are encoded only in UTF-8. An object key can contain any Unicode character. However, the XML 1.0 parser can't parse certain characters, such as characters with an ASCII value from 0 to 10. For characters that aren't supported in XML 1.0, you can add this parameter to request that Amazon S3 encode the keys in the response. For more information about characters to avoid in object key names, see Object key naming guidelines.

When using the URL encoding type, non-ASCII characters that are used in an object's key name will be percent-encoded according to UTF-8 code values. For example, the object ⁠test_file(3).png⁠ will appear as ⁠test_file%283%29.png⁠.

MaxKeys

Sets the maximum number of keys returned in the response. By default, the action returns up to 1,000 key names. The response might contain fewer keys but will never contain more.

Prefix

Limits the response to keys that begin with the specified prefix.

Directory buckets - For directory buckets, only prefixes that end in a delimiter (/) are supported.

ContinuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key. You can use this ContinuationToken for pagination of the list results.

FetchOwner

The owner field is not present in list_objects_v2 by default. If you want to return the owner field with each key in the result, then set the FetchOwner field to true.

Directory buckets - For directory buckets, the bucket owner is returned as the object owner for all objects.

StartAfter

StartAfter is where you want Amazon S3 to start listing from. Amazon S3 starts listing after this specified key. StartAfter can be any key in the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer

Confirms that the requester knows that she or he will be charged for the list objects request in V2 style. Bucket owners need not specify this parameter in their requests.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

OptionalObjectAttributes

Specifies the optional fields that you want returned in the response. Fields that you do not specify are not returned.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.


Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload

Description

Lists the parts that have been uploaded for a specific multipart upload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_list_parts/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_list_parts(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  MaxParts = NULL,
  PartNumberMarker = NULL,
  UploadId,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket to which the parts are being uploaded.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.

MaxParts

Sets the maximum number of parts to return.

PartNumberMarker

Specifies the part after which listing should begin. Only parts with higher part numbers will be listed.

UploadId

[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose parts are being listed.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

SSECustomerAlgorithm

The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_accelerate_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_accelerate_configuration(
  Bucket,
  AccelerateConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which the accelerate configuration is set.

AccelerateConfiguration

[required] Container for setting the transfer acceleration state.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_acl(
  ACL = NULL,
  AccessControlPolicy = NULL,
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWrite = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.

AccessControlPolicy

Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee.

Bucket

[required] The bucket to which to apply the ACL.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

GrantFullControl

Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.

GrantWrite

Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket.

For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_analytics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_analytics_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  AnalyticsConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket to which an analytics configuration is stored.

Id

[required] The ID that identifies the analytics configuration.

AnalyticsConfiguration

[required] The configuration and any analyses for the analytics filter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_cors/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_cors(
  Bucket,
  CORSConfiguration,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket impacted by the corsconfiguration.

CORSConfiguration

[required] Describes the cross-origin access configuration for objects in an Amazon S3 bucket. For more information, see Enabling Cross-Origin Resource Sharing in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket

Description

This operation configures default encryption and Amazon S3 Bucket Keys for an existing bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_encryption/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_encryption(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] Specifies default encryption for a bucket using server-side encryption with different key options.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the server-side encryption configuration.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, CRC32 is the default checksum algorithm that's used for performance.

ServerSideEncryptionConfiguration

[required]

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_intelligent_tiering_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  IntelligentTieringConfiguration
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose configuration you want to modify or retrieve.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.

IntelligentTieringConfiguration

[required] Container for S3 Intelligent-Tiering configuration.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_inventory_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_inventory_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  InventoryConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket where the inventory configuration will be stored.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the inventory configuration.

InventoryConfiguration

[required] Specifies the inventory configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_lifecycle/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_lifecycle(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  LifecycleConfiguration = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required]

ContentMD5

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

LifecycleConfiguration
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration

Description

Creates a new lifecycle configuration for the bucket or replaces an existing lifecycle configuration. Keep in mind that this will overwrite an existing lifecycle configuration, so if you want to retain any configuration details, they must be included in the new lifecycle configuration. For information about lifecycle configuration, see Managing your storage lifecycle.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(
  Bucket,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  LifecycleConfiguration = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  TransitionDefaultMinimumObjectSize = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

LifecycleConfiguration

Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations.

TransitionDefaultMinimumObjectSize

Indicates which default minimum object size behavior is applied to the lifecycle configuration.

This parameter applies to general purpose buckets only. It is not supported for directory bucket lifecycle configurations.

  • all_storage_classes_128K - Objects smaller than 128 KB will not transition to any storage class by default.

  • varies_by_storage_class - Objects smaller than 128 KB will transition to Glacier Flexible Retrieval or Glacier Deep Archive storage classes. By default, all other storage classes will prevent transitions smaller than 128 KB.

To customize the minimum object size for any transition you can add a filter that specifies a custom ObjectSizeGreaterThan or ObjectSizeLessThan in the body of your transition rule. Custom filters always take precedence over the default transition behavior.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_logging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_logging(
  Bucket,
  BucketLoggingStatus,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the logging parameters.

BucketLoggingStatus

[required] Container for logging status information.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash of the put_bucket_logging request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_metrics_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_metrics_configuration(
  Bucket,
  Id,
  MetricsConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which the metrics configuration is set.

Id

[required] The ID used to identify the metrics configuration. The ID has a 64 character limit and can only contain letters, numbers, periods, dashes, and underscores.

MetricsConfiguration

[required] Specifies the metrics configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_notification/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_notification(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  NotificationConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash of the put_public_access_block request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

NotificationConfiguration

[required] The container for the configuration.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_notification_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_notification_configuration(
  Bucket,
  NotificationConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  SkipDestinationValidation = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket.

NotificationConfiguration

[required]

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

SkipDestinationValidation

Skips validation of Amazon SQS, Amazon SNS, and Lambda destinations. True or false value.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_ownership_controls/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_ownership_controls(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  OwnershipControls
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose OwnershipControls you want to set.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash of the OwnershipControls request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

OwnershipControls

[required] The OwnershipControls (BucketOwnerEnforced, BucketOwnerPreferred, or ObjectWriter) that you want to apply to this Amazon S3 bucket.


Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket

Description

Applies an Amazon S3 bucket policy to an Amazon S3 bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_policy(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess = NULL,
  Policy,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use path-style requests in the format ⁠https://s3express-control.region-code.amazonaws.com/bucket-name ⁠. Virtual-hosted-style requests aren't supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must also follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, DOC-EXAMPLE-BUCKET--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash of the request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum-algorithm or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠.

For the x-amz-checksum-algorithm header, replace algorithm with the supported algorithm from the following list:

  • CRC32

  • CRC32C

  • CRC64NVME

  • SHA1

  • SHA256

For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If the individual checksum value you provide through x-amz-checksum-algorithm doesn't match the checksum algorithm you set through x-amz-sdk-checksum-algorithm, Amazon S3 fails the request with a BadDigest error.

For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, CRC32 is the default checksum algorithm that's used for performance.

ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess

Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change this bucket policy in the future.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

Policy

[required] The bucket policy as a JSON document.

For directory buckets, the only IAM action supported in the bucket policy is s3express:CreateSession.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

For directory buckets, this header is not supported in this API operation. If you specify this header, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠501 Not Implemented⁠.


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_replication(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ReplicationConfiguration,
  Token = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ReplicationConfiguration

[required]

Token

A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_request_payment/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_request_payment(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  RequestPaymentConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

RequestPaymentConfiguration

[required] Container for Payer.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_tagging(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  Tagging,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

Tagging

[required] Container for the TagSet and Tag elements.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_versioning(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  MFA = NULL,
  VersioningConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

ContentMD5

\>The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

MFA

The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device.

VersioningConfiguration

[required] Container for setting the versioning state.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_bucket_website/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_bucket_website(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  WebsiteConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. You must use this header as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, see RFC 1864.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the request when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

WebsiteConfiguration

[required] Container for the request.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Adds an object to a bucket

Description

Adds an object to a bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object(
  ACL = NULL,
  Body = NULL,
  Bucket,
  CacheControl = NULL,
  ContentDisposition = NULL,
  ContentEncoding = NULL,
  ContentLanguage = NULL,
  ContentLength = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ContentType = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
  Expires = NULL,
  IfMatch = NULL,
  IfNoneMatch = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  Key,
  WriteOffsetBytes = NULL,
  Metadata = NULL,
  ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
  StorageClass = NULL,
  WebsiteRedirectLocation = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
  SSEKMSEncryptionContext = NULL,
  BucketKeyEnabled = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  Tagging = NULL,
  ObjectLockMode = NULL,
  ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
  ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

When adding a new object, you can use headers to grant ACL-based permissions to individual Amazon Web Services accounts or to predefined groups defined by Amazon S3. These permissions are then added to the ACL on the object. By default, all objects are private. Only the owner has full access control. For more information, see Access Control List (ACL) Overview and Managing ACLs Using the REST API in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If the bucket that you're uploading objects to uses the bucket owner enforced setting for S3 Object Ownership, ACLs are disabled and no longer affect permissions. Buckets that use this setting only accept PUT requests that don't specify an ACL or PUT requests that specify bucket owner full control ACLs, such as the bucket-owner-full-control canned ACL or an equivalent form of this ACL expressed in the XML format. PUT requests that contain other ACLs (for example, custom grants to certain Amazon Web Services accounts) fail and return a 400 error with the error code AccessControlListNotSupported. For more information, see Controlling ownership of objects and disabling ACLs in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Body

Object data.

Bucket

[required] The bucket name to which the PUT action was initiated.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

CacheControl

Can be used to specify caching behavior along the request/reply chain. For more information, see http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616-sec14.html#sec14.9.

ContentDisposition

Specifies presentational information for the object. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc6266#section-4.

ContentEncoding

Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#field.content-encoding.

ContentLanguage

The language the content is in.

ContentLength

Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-content-length.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the message (without the headers) according to RFC 1864. This header can be used as a message integrity check to verify that the data is the same data that was originally sent. Although it is optional, we recommend using the Content-MD5 mechanism as an end-to-end integrity check. For more information about REST request authentication, see REST Authentication.

The Content-MD5 or x-amz-sdk-checksum-algorithm header is required for any request to upload an object with a retention period configured using Amazon S3 Object Lock. For more information, see Uploading objects to an Object Lock enabled bucket in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ContentType

A standard MIME type describing the format of the contents. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc9110.html#name-content-type.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum-algorithm or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠.

For the x-amz-checksum-algorithm header, replace algorithm with the supported algorithm from the following list:

  • CRC32

  • CRC32C

  • CRC64NVME

  • SHA1

  • SHA256

For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If the individual checksum value you provide through x-amz-checksum-algorithm doesn't match the checksum algorithm you set through x-amz-sdk-checksum-algorithm, Amazon S3 fails the request with a BadDigest error.

The Content-MD5 or x-amz-sdk-checksum-algorithm header is required for any request to upload an object with a retention period configured using Amazon S3 Object Lock. For more information, see Uploading objects to an Object Lock enabled bucket in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

For directory buckets, when you use Amazon Web Services SDKs, CRC32 is the default checksum algorithm that's used for performance.

ChecksumCRC32

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC32C

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC64NVME

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit CRC64NVME checksum of the object. The CRC64NVME checksum is always a full object checksum. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA1

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit SHA1 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA256

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit SHA256 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Expires

The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable. For more information, see https://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc7234#section-5.3.

IfMatch

Uploads the object only if the ETag (entity tag) value provided during the WRITE operation matches the ETag of the object in S3. If the ETag values do not match, the operation returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a ⁠409 ConditionalRequestConflict⁠ response. On a 409 failure you should fetch the object's ETag and retry the upload.

Expects the ETag value as a string.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

IfNoneMatch

Uploads the object only if the object key name does not already exist in the bucket specified. Otherwise, Amazon S3 returns a ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ error.

If a conflicting operation occurs during the upload S3 returns a ⁠409 ConditionalRequestConflict⁠ response. On a 409 failure you should retry the upload.

Expects the '*' (asterisk) character.

For more information about conditional requests, see RFC 7232, or Conditional requests in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

GrantFullControl

Gives the grantee READ, READ_ACP, and WRITE_ACP permissions on the object.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to read the object data and its metadata.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the object ACL.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable object.

  • This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

  • This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Key

[required] Object key for which the PUT action was initiated.

WriteOffsetBytes

Specifies the offset for appending data to existing objects in bytes. The offset must be equal to the size of the existing object being appended to. If no object exists, setting this header to 0 will create a new object.

This functionality is only supported for objects in the Amazon S3 Express One Zone storage class in directory buckets.

Metadata

A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.

ServerSideEncryption

The server-side encryption algorithm that was used when you store this object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms, aws:kms:dsse).

  • General purpose buckets - You have four mutually exclusive options to protect data using server-side encryption in Amazon S3, depending on how you choose to manage the encryption keys. Specifically, the encryption key options are Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3), Amazon Web Services KMS keys (SSE-KMS or DSSE-KMS), and customer-provided keys (SSE-C). Amazon S3 encrypts data with server-side encryption by using Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) by default. You can optionally tell Amazon S3 to encrypt data at rest by using server-side encryption with other key options. For more information, see Using Server-Side Encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

  • Directory buckets - For directory buckets, there are only two supported options for server-side encryption: server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys (SSE-S3) (AES256) and server-side encryption with KMS keys (SSE-KMS) (aws:kms). We recommend that the bucket's default encryption uses the desired encryption configuration and you don't override the bucket default encryption in your create_session requests or PUT object requests. Then, new objects are automatically encrypted with the desired encryption settings. For more information, see Protecting data with server-side encryption in the Amazon S3 User Guide. For more information about the encryption overriding behaviors in directory buckets, see Specifying server-side encryption with KMS for new object uploads.

    In the Zonal endpoint API calls (except copy_object and upload_part_copy) using the REST API, the encryption request headers must match the encryption settings that are specified in the create_session request. You can't override the values of the encryption settings (x-amz-server-side-encryption, x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, x-amz-server-side-encryption-context, and x-amz-server-side-encryption-bucket-key-enabled) that are specified in the create_session request. You don't need to explicitly specify these encryption settings values in Zonal endpoint API calls, and Amazon S3 will use the encryption settings values from the create_session request to protect new objects in the directory bucket.

    When you use the CLI or the Amazon Web Services SDKs, for create_session, the session token refreshes automatically to avoid service interruptions when a session expires. The CLI or the Amazon Web Services SDKs use the bucket's default encryption configuration for the create_session request. It's not supported to override the encryption settings values in the create_session request. So in the Zonal endpoint API calls (except copy_object and upload_part_copy), the encryption request headers must match the default encryption configuration of the directory bucket.

StorageClass

By default, Amazon S3 uses the STANDARD Storage Class to store newly created objects. The STANDARD storage class provides high durability and high availability. Depending on performance needs, you can specify a different Storage Class. For more information, see Storage Classes in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

  • For directory buckets, only the S3 Express One Zone storage class is supported to store newly created objects.

  • Amazon S3 on Outposts only uses the OUTPOSTS Storage Class.

WebsiteRedirectLocation

If the bucket is configured as a website, redirects requests for this object to another object in the same bucket or to an external URL. Amazon S3 stores the value of this header in the object metadata. For information about object metadata, see Object Key and Metadata in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

In the following example, the request header sets the redirect to an object (anotherPage.html) in the same bucket:

⁠x-amz-website-redirect-location: /anotherPage.html⁠

In the following example, the request header sets the object redirect to another website:

⁠x-amz-website-redirect-location: http://www.example.com/⁠

For more information about website hosting in Amazon S3, see Hosting Websites on Amazon S3 and How to Configure Website Page Redirects in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSEKMSKeyId

Specifies the KMS key ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) to use for object encryption. If the KMS key doesn't exist in the same account that's issuing the command, you must use the full Key ARN not the Key ID.

General purpose buckets - If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption with aws:kms or aws:kms:dsse, this header specifies the ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) of the KMS key to use. If you specify x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms or x-amz-server-side-encryption:aws:kms:dsse, but do not provide x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id, Amazon S3 uses the Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) to protect the data.

Directory buckets - To encrypt data using SSE-KMS, it's recommended to specify the x-amz-server-side-encryption header to aws:kms. Then, the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header implicitly uses the bucket's default KMS customer managed key ID. If you want to explicitly set the x-amz-server-side-encryption-aws-kms-key-id header, it must match the bucket's default customer managed key (using key ID or ARN, not alias). Your SSE-KMS configuration can only support 1 customer managed key per directory bucket's lifetime. The Amazon Web Services managed key (aws/s3) isn't supported. Incorrect key specification results in an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error.

SSEKMSEncryptionContext

Specifies the Amazon Web Services KMS Encryption Context as an additional encryption context to use for object encryption. The value of this header is a Base64 encoded string of a UTF-8 encoded JSON, which contains the encryption context as key-value pairs. This value is stored as object metadata and automatically gets passed on to Amazon Web Services KMS for future get_object operations on this object.

General purpose buckets - This value must be explicitly added during copy_object operations if you want an additional encryption context for your object. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Directory buckets - You can optionally provide an explicit encryption context value. The value must match the default encryption context - the bucket Amazon Resource Name (ARN). An additional encryption context value is not supported.

BucketKeyEnabled

Specifies whether Amazon S3 should use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with server-side encryption using Key Management Service (KMS) keys (SSE-KMS).

General purpose buckets - Setting this header to true causes Amazon S3 to use an S3 Bucket Key for object encryption with SSE-KMS. Also, specifying this header with a PUT action doesn't affect bucket-level settings for S3 Bucket Key.

Directory buckets - S3 Bucket Keys are always enabled for GET and PUT operations in a directory bucket and can’t be disabled. S3 Bucket Keys aren't supported, when you copy SSE-KMS encrypted objects from general purpose buckets to directory buckets, from directory buckets to general purpose buckets, or between directory buckets, through copy_object, upload_part_copy, the Copy operation in Batch Operations, or the import jobs. In this case, Amazon S3 makes a call to KMS every time a copy request is made for a KMS-encrypted object.

RequestPayer
Tagging

The tag-set for the object. The tag-set must be encoded as URL Query parameters. (For example, "Key1=Value1")

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockMode

The Object Lock mode that you want to apply to this object.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockRetainUntilDate

The date and time when you want this object's Object Lock to expire. Must be formatted as a timestamp parameter.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

Specifies whether a legal hold will be applied to this object. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object_acl(
  ACL = NULL,
  AccessControlPolicy = NULL,
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWrite = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  Key,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the object. For more information, see Canned ACL.

AccessControlPolicy

Contains the elements that set the ACL permissions for an object per grantee.

Bucket

[required] The bucket name that contains the object to which you want to attach the ACL.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the data. This header must be used as a message integrity check to verify that the request body was not corrupted in transit. For more information, go to RFC 1864.\>

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

GrantFullControl

Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.

This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.

This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

GrantWrite

Allows grantee to create new objects in the bucket.

For the bucket and object owners of existing objects, also allows deletions and overwrites of those objects.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.

This functionality is not supported for Amazon S3 on Outposts.

Key

[required] Key for which the PUT action was initiated.

RequestPayer
VersionId

Version ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_legal_hold/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object_legal_hold(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  LegalHold = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object that you want to place a legal hold on.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key name for the object that you want to place a legal hold on.

LegalHold

Container element for the legal hold configuration you want to apply to the specified object.

RequestPayer
VersionId

The version ID of the object that you want to place a legal hold on.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash for the request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_lock_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object_lock_configuration(
  Bucket,
  ObjectLockConfiguration = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  Token = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket whose Object Lock configuration you want to create or replace.

ObjectLockConfiguration

The Object Lock configuration that you want to apply to the specified bucket.

RequestPayer
Token

A token to allow Object Lock to be enabled for an existing bucket.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash for the request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_retention/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object_retention(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  Retention = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name that contains the object you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] The key name for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.

Retention

The container element for the Object Retention configuration.

RequestPayer
VersionId

The version ID for the object that you want to apply this Object Retention configuration to.

BypassGovernanceRetention

Indicates whether this action should bypass Governance-mode restrictions.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash for the request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_object_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_object_tagging(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  Tagging,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Name of the object key.

VersionId

The versionId of the object that the tag-set will be added to.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash for the request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

Tagging

[required] Container for the TagSet and Tag elements

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

RequestPayer

This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_put_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_put_public_access_block(
  Bucket,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  PublicAccessBlockConfiguration,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to set.

ContentMD5

The MD5 hash of the put_public_access_block request body.

For requests made using the Amazon Web Services Command Line Interface (CLI) or Amazon Web Services SDKs, this field is calculated automatically.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

PublicAccessBlockConfiguration

[required] The PublicAccessBlock configuration that you want to apply to this Amazon S3 bucket. You can enable the configuration options in any combination. For more information about when Amazon S3 considers a bucket or object public, see The Meaning of "Public" in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_restore_object/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_restore_object(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  VersionId = NULL,
  RestoreRequest = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name containing the object to restore.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Object key for which the action was initiated.

VersionId

VersionId used to reference a specific version of the object.

RestoreRequest
RequestPayer
ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_select_object_content/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_select_object_content(
  Bucket,
  Key,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  Expression,
  ExpressionType,
  RequestProgress = NULL,
  InputSerialization,
  OutputSerialization,
  ScanRange = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The S3 bucket.

Key

[required] The object key.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

The server-side encryption (SSE) algorithm used to encrypt the object. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

SSECustomerKey

The server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

The MD5 server-side encryption (SSE) customer managed key. This parameter is needed only when the object was created using a checksum algorithm. For more information, see Protecting data using SSE-C keys in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Expression

[required] The expression that is used to query the object.

ExpressionType

[required] The type of the provided expression (for example, SQL).

RequestProgress

Specifies if periodic request progress information should be enabled.

InputSerialization

[required] Describes the format of the data in the object that is being queried.

OutputSerialization

[required] Describes the format of the data that you want Amazon S3 to return in response.

ScanRange

Specifies the byte range of the object to get the records from. A record is processed when its first byte is contained by the range. This parameter is optional, but when specified, it must not be empty. See RFC 2616, Section 14.35.1 about how to specify the start and end of the range.

ScanRangemay be used in the following ways:

  • ⁠<scanrange><start>50</start><end>100</end></scanrange>⁠ - process only the records starting between the bytes 50 and 100 (inclusive, counting from zero)

  • ⁠<scanrange><start>50</start></scanrange>⁠ - process only the records starting after the byte 50

  • ⁠<scanrange><end>50</end></scanrange>⁠ - process only the records within the last 50 bytes of the file.

ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Uploads a part in a multipart upload

Description

Uploads a part in a multipart upload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_upload_part/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_upload_part(
  Body = NULL,
  Bucket,
  ContentLength = NULL,
  ContentMD5 = NULL,
  ChecksumAlgorithm = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
  Key,
  PartNumber,
  UploadId,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Body

Object data.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket to which the multipart upload was initiated.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ContentLength

Size of the body in bytes. This parameter is useful when the size of the body cannot be determined automatically.

ContentMD5

The Base64 encoded 128-bit MD5 digest of the part data. This parameter is auto-populated when using the command from the CLI. This parameter is required if object lock parameters are specified.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

ChecksumAlgorithm

Indicates the algorithm used to create the checksum for the object when you use the SDK. This header will not provide any additional functionality if you don't use the SDK. When you send this header, there must be a corresponding x-amz-checksum or x-amz-trailer header sent. Otherwise, Amazon S3 fails the request with the HTTP status code ⁠400 Bad Request⁠. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

If you provide an individual checksum, Amazon S3 ignores any provided ChecksumAlgorithm parameter.

This checksum algorithm must be the same for all parts and it match the checksum value supplied in the create_multipart_upload request.

ChecksumCRC32

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC32C

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumCRC64NVME

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit CRC64NVME checksum of the part. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA1

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit SHA1 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA256

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit SHA256 digest of the object. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Key

[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.

PartNumber

[required] Part number of part being uploaded. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.

UploadId

[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being uploaded.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the ⁠x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header⁠. This must be the same encryption key specified in the initiate multipart upload request.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported for directory buckets.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source

Description

Uploads a part by copying data from an existing object as data source. To specify the data source, you add the request header x-amz-copy-source in your request. To specify a byte range, you add the request header x-amz-copy-source-range in your request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_upload_part_copy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_upload_part_copy(
  Bucket,
  CopySource,
  CopySourceIfMatch = NULL,
  CopySourceIfModifiedSince = NULL,
  CopySourceIfNoneMatch = NULL,
  CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince = NULL,
  CopySourceRange = NULL,
  Key,
  PartNumber,
  UploadId,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSECustomerKey = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerKey = NULL,
  CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  RequestPayer = NULL,
  ExpectedBucketOwner = NULL,
  ExpectedSourceBucketOwner = NULL
)

Arguments

Bucket

[required] The bucket name.

Directory buckets - When you use this operation with a directory bucket, you must use virtual-hosted-style requests in the format Bucket-name.s3express-zone-id.region-code.amazonaws.com. Path-style requests are not supported. Directory bucket names must be unique in the chosen Zone (Availability Zone or Local Zone). Bucket names must follow the format bucket-base-name--zone-id--x-s3 (for example, amzn-s3-demo-bucket--usw2-az1--x-s3). For information about bucket naming restrictions, see Directory bucket naming rules in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Copying objects across different Amazon Web Services Regions isn't supported when the source or destination bucket is in Amazon Web Services Local Zones. The source and destination buckets must have the same parent Amazon Web Services Region. Otherwise, you get an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error with the error code InvalidRequest.

Access points - When you use this action with an access point, you must provide the alias of the access point in place of the bucket name or specify the access point ARN. When using the access point ARN, you must direct requests to the access point hostname. The access point hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.s3-accesspoint.Region.amazonaws.com. When using this action with an access point through the Amazon Web Services SDKs, you provide the access point ARN in place of the bucket name. For more information about access point ARNs, see Using access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access points and Object Lambda access points are not supported by directory buckets.

S3 on Outposts - When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, you must direct requests to the S3 on Outposts hostname. The S3 on Outposts hostname takes the form AccessPointName-AccountId.outpostID.s3-outposts.Region.amazonaws.com. When you use this action with S3 on Outposts, the destination bucket must be the Outposts access point ARN or the access point alias. For more information about S3 on Outposts, see What is S3 on Outposts? in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

CopySource

[required] Specifies the source object for the copy operation. You specify the value in one of two formats, depending on whether you want to access the source object through an access point:

  • For objects not accessed through an access point, specify the name of the source bucket and key of the source object, separated by a slash (/). For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf from the bucket awsexamplebucket, use awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded.

  • For objects accessed through access points, specify the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the object as accessed through the access point, in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3:<Region>:<account-id>:accesspoint/<access-point-name>/object/<key>⁠. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through access point my-access-point owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3:us-west-2:123456789012:accesspoint/my-access-point/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL encoded.

    • Amazon S3 supports copy operations using Access points only when the source and destination buckets are in the same Amazon Web Services Region.

    • Access points are not supported by directory buckets.

    Alternatively, for objects accessed through Amazon S3 on Outposts, specify the ARN of the object as accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/object/<key>⁠. For example, to copy the object reports/january.pdf through outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/object/reports/january.pdf. The value must be URL-encoded.

If your bucket has versioning enabled, you could have multiple versions of the same object. By default, x-amz-copy-source identifies the current version of the source object to copy. To copy a specific version of the source object to copy, append ⁠?versionId=<version-id>⁠ to the x-amz-copy-source request header (for example, ⁠x-amz-copy-source: /awsexamplebucket/reports/january.pdf?versionId=QUpfdndhfd8438MNFDN93jdnJFkdmqnh893⁠).

If the current version is a delete marker and you don't specify a versionId in the x-amz-copy-source request header, Amazon S3 returns a ⁠404 Not Found⁠ error, because the object does not exist. If you specify versionId in the x-amz-copy-source and the versionId is a delete marker, Amazon S3 returns an HTTP ⁠400 Bad Request⁠ error, because you are not allowed to specify a delete marker as a version for the x-amz-copy-source.

Directory buckets - S3 Versioning isn't enabled and supported for directory buckets.

CopySourceIfMatch

Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) matches the specified tag.

If both of the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ headers are present in the request as follows:

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ condition evaluates to true, and;

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ condition evaluates to false;

Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and copies the data.

CopySourceIfModifiedSince

Copies the object if it has been modified since the specified time.

If both of the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ headers are present in the request as follows:

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ condition evaluates to false, and;

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ condition evaluates to true;

Amazon S3 returns ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ response code.

CopySourceIfNoneMatch

Copies the object if its entity tag (ETag) is different than the specified ETag.

If both of the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ headers are present in the request as follows:

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-none-match⁠ condition evaluates to false, and;

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-modified-since⁠ condition evaluates to true;

Amazon S3 returns ⁠412 Precondition Failed⁠ response code.

CopySourceIfUnmodifiedSince

Copies the object if it hasn't been modified since the specified time.

If both of the ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ and ⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ headers are present in the request as follows:

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-match⁠ condition evaluates to true, and;

⁠x-amz-copy-source-if-unmodified-since⁠ condition evaluates to false;

Amazon S3 returns ⁠200 OK⁠ and copies the data.

CopySourceRange

The range of bytes to copy from the source object. The range value must use the form bytes=first-last, where the first and last are the zero-based byte offsets to copy. For example, bytes=0-9 indicates that you want to copy the first 10 bytes of the source. You can copy a range only if the source object is greater than 5 MB.

Key

[required] Object key for which the multipart upload was initiated.

PartNumber

[required] Part number of part being copied. This is a positive integer between 1 and 10,000.

UploadId

[required] Upload ID identifying the multipart upload whose part is being copied.

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when encrypting the object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

SSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use in encrypting data. This value is used to store the object and then it is discarded; Amazon S3 does not store the encryption key. The key must be appropriate for use with the algorithm specified in the x-amz-server-side-encryption-customer-algorithm header. This must be the same encryption key specified in the initiate multipart upload request.

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported when the destination bucket is a directory bucket.

CopySourceSSECustomerAlgorithm

Specifies the algorithm to use when decrypting the source object (for example, AES256).

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

CopySourceSSECustomerKey

Specifies the customer-provided encryption key for Amazon S3 to use to decrypt the source object. The encryption key provided in this header must be one that was used when the source object was created.

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

CopySourceSSECustomerKeyMD5

Specifies the 128-bit MD5 digest of the encryption key according to RFC 1321. Amazon S3 uses this header for a message integrity check to ensure that the encryption key was transmitted without error.

This functionality is not supported when the source object is in a directory bucket.

RequestPayer
ExpectedBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected destination bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the destination bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).

ExpectedSourceBucketOwner

The account ID of the expected source bucket owner. If the account ID that you provide does not match the actual owner of the source bucket, the request fails with the HTTP status code ⁠403 Forbidden⁠ (access denied).


This operation is not supported for directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported for directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3_write_get_object_response/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3_write_get_object_response(
  RequestRoute,
  RequestToken,
  Body = NULL,
  StatusCode = NULL,
  ErrorCode = NULL,
  ErrorMessage = NULL,
  AcceptRanges = NULL,
  CacheControl = NULL,
  ContentDisposition = NULL,
  ContentEncoding = NULL,
  ContentLanguage = NULL,
  ContentLength = NULL,
  ContentRange = NULL,
  ContentType = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32 = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC32C = NULL,
  ChecksumCRC64NVME = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA1 = NULL,
  ChecksumSHA256 = NULL,
  DeleteMarker = NULL,
  ETag = NULL,
  Expires = NULL,
  Expiration = NULL,
  LastModified = NULL,
  MissingMeta = NULL,
  Metadata = NULL,
  ObjectLockMode = NULL,
  ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus = NULL,
  ObjectLockRetainUntilDate = NULL,
  PartsCount = NULL,
  ReplicationStatus = NULL,
  RequestCharged = NULL,
  Restore = NULL,
  ServerSideEncryption = NULL,
  SSECustomerAlgorithm = NULL,
  SSEKMSKeyId = NULL,
  SSECustomerKeyMD5 = NULL,
  StorageClass = NULL,
  TagCount = NULL,
  VersionId = NULL,
  BucketKeyEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

RequestRoute

[required] Route prefix to the HTTP URL generated.

RequestToken

[required] A single use encrypted token that maps write_get_object_response to the end user get_object request.

Body

The object data.

StatusCode

The integer status code for an HTTP response of a corresponding get_object request. The following is a list of status codes.

  • 200 - OK

  • ⁠206 - Partial Content⁠

  • ⁠304 - Not Modified⁠

  • ⁠400 - Bad Request⁠

  • 401 - Unauthorized

  • 403 - Forbidden

  • ⁠404 - Not Found⁠

  • ⁠405 - Method Not Allowed⁠

  • 409 - Conflict

  • ⁠411 - Length Required⁠

  • ⁠412 - Precondition Failed⁠

  • ⁠416 - Range Not Satisfiable⁠

  • ⁠500 - Internal Server Error⁠

  • ⁠503 - Service Unavailable⁠

ErrorCode

A string that uniquely identifies an error condition. Returned in the \<Code\> tag of the error XML response for a corresponding get_object call. Cannot be used with a successful StatusCode header or when the transformed object is provided in the body. All error codes from S3 are sentence-cased. The regular expression (regex) value is "^[A-Z][a-zA-Z]+$".

ErrorMessage

Contains a generic description of the error condition. Returned in the \<Message\> tag of the error XML response for a corresponding get_object call. Cannot be used with a successful StatusCode header or when the transformed object is provided in body.

AcceptRanges

Indicates that a range of bytes was specified.

CacheControl

Specifies caching behavior along the request/reply chain.

ContentDisposition

Specifies presentational information for the object.

ContentEncoding

Specifies what content encodings have been applied to the object and thus what decoding mechanisms must be applied to obtain the media-type referenced by the Content-Type header field.

ContentLanguage

The language the content is in.

ContentLength

The size of the content body in bytes.

ContentRange

The portion of the object returned in the response.

ContentType

A standard MIME type describing the format of the object data.

ChecksumCRC32

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32 checksum of the object returned by the Object Lambda function. This may not match the checksum for the object stored in Amazon S3. Amazon S3 will perform validation of the checksum values only when the original get_object request required checksum validation. For more information about checksums, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail.

ChecksumCRC32C

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies the Base64 encoded, 32-bit CRC32C checksum of the object returned by the Object Lambda function. This may not match the checksum for the object stored in Amazon S3. Amazon S3 will perform validation of the checksum values only when the original get_object request required checksum validation. For more information about checksums, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail.

ChecksumCRC64NVME

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This header specifies the Base64 encoded, 64-bit CRC64NVME checksum of the part. For more information, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

ChecksumSHA1

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies the Base64 encoded, 160-bit SHA1 digest of the object returned by the Object Lambda function. This may not match the checksum for the object stored in Amazon S3. Amazon S3 will perform validation of the checksum values only when the original get_object request required checksum validation. For more information about checksums, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail.

ChecksumSHA256

This header can be used as a data integrity check to verify that the data received is the same data that was originally sent. This specifies the Base64 encoded, 256-bit SHA256 digest of the object returned by the Object Lambda function. This may not match the checksum for the object stored in Amazon S3. Amazon S3 will perform validation of the checksum values only when the original get_object request required checksum validation. For more information about checksums, see Checking object integrity in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Only one checksum header can be specified at a time. If you supply multiple checksum headers, this request will fail.

DeleteMarker

Specifies whether an object stored in Amazon S3 is (true) or is not (false) a delete marker. To learn more about delete markers, see Working with delete markers.

ETag

An opaque identifier assigned by a web server to a specific version of a resource found at a URL.

Expires

The date and time at which the object is no longer cacheable.

Expiration

If the object expiration is configured (see PUT Bucket lifecycle), the response includes this header. It includes the expiry-date and rule-id key-value pairs that provide the object expiration information. The value of the rule-id is URL-encoded.

LastModified

The date and time that the object was last modified.

MissingMeta

Set to the number of metadata entries not returned in x-amz-meta headers. This can happen if you create metadata using an API like SOAP that supports more flexible metadata than the REST API. For example, using SOAP, you can create metadata whose values are not legal HTTP headers.

Metadata

A map of metadata to store with the object in S3.

ObjectLockMode

Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has Object Lock enabled. For more information about S3 Object Lock, see Object Lock.

ObjectLockLegalHoldStatus

Indicates whether an object stored in Amazon S3 has an active legal hold.

ObjectLockRetainUntilDate

The date and time when Object Lock is configured to expire.

PartsCount

The count of parts this object has.

ReplicationStatus

Indicates if request involves bucket that is either a source or destination in a Replication rule. For more information about S3 Replication, see Replication.

RequestCharged
Restore

Provides information about object restoration operation and expiration time of the restored object copy.

ServerSideEncryption

The server-side encryption algorithm used when storing requested object in Amazon S3 (for example, AES256, aws:kms).

SSECustomerAlgorithm

Encryption algorithm used if server-side encryption with a customer-provided encryption key was specified for object stored in Amazon S3.

SSEKMSKeyId

If present, specifies the ID (Key ID, Key ARN, or Key Alias) of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (Amazon Web Services KMS) symmetric encryption customer managed key that was used for stored in Amazon S3 object.

SSECustomerKeyMD5

128-bit MD5 digest of customer-provided encryption key used in Amazon S3 to encrypt data stored in S3. For more information, see Protecting data using server-side encryption with customer-provided encryption keys (SSE-C).

StorageClass

Provides storage class information of the object. Amazon S3 returns this header for all objects except for S3 Standard storage class objects.

For more information, see Storage Classes.

TagCount

The number of tags, if any, on the object.

VersionId

An ID used to reference a specific version of the object.

BucketKeyEnabled

Indicates whether the object stored in Amazon S3 uses an S3 bucket key for server-side encryption with Amazon Web Services KMS (SSE-KMS).


AWS S3 Control

Description

Amazon Web Services S3 Control provides access to Amazon S3 control plane actions.

Usage

s3control(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- s3control(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

associate_access_grants_identity_center Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance
create_access_grant Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data
create_access_grants_instance Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants
create_access_grants_location The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance
create_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
create_access_point_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
create_bucket This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
create_job This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job
create_multi_region_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
create_storage_lens_group Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID
delete_access_grant Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance
delete_access_grants_instance Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance
delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
delete_access_grants_location Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance
delete_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_access_point_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_access_point_policy This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_bucket This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration
delete_bucket_policy This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy
delete_bucket_replication This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
delete_bucket_tagging This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags
delete_job_tagging Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job
delete_multi_region_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_public_access_block This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_storage_lens_configuration This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging This operation is not supported by directory buckets
delete_storage_lens_group Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group
describe_job Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job
describe_multi_region_access_point_operation This operation is not supported by directory buckets
dissociate_access_grants_identity_center Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance
get_access_grant Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance
get_access_grants_instance Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account
get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix
get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
get_access_grants_location Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance
get_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_policy This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_policy_status This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_bucket Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration
get_bucket_policy This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
get_bucket_replication This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
get_bucket_tagging This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags
get_bucket_versioning This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only
get_data_access Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application
get_job_tagging Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job
get_multi_region_access_point This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_multi_region_access_point_policy This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_multi_region_access_point_routes This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_public_access_block This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_storage_lens_configuration This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging This operation is not supported by directory buckets
get_storage_lens_group Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details
list_access_grants Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance
list_access_grants_instances Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances
list_access_grants_locations Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance
list_access_points This operation is not supported by directory buckets
list_access_points_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
list_caller_access_grants Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants
list_jobs Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request
list_multi_region_access_points This operation is not supported by directory buckets
list_regional_buckets This operation is not supported by directory buckets
list_storage_lens_configurations This operation is not supported by directory buckets
list_storage_lens_groups Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region
list_tags_for_resource This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource
put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance
put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_access_point_policy This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
put_bucket_policy This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
put_bucket_replication This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration
put_bucket_tagging This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket
put_bucket_versioning This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only
put_job_tagging Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job
put_multi_region_access_point_policy This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_public_access_block This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_storage_lens_configuration This operation is not supported by directory buckets
put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging This operation is not supported by directory buckets
submit_multi_region_access_point_routes This operation is not supported by directory buckets
tag_resource Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag
untag_resource This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource
update_access_grants_location Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance
update_job_priority Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority
update_job_status Updates the status for the specified job
update_storage_lens_group Updates the existing Storage Lens group

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- s3control()
svc$associate_access_grants_identity_center(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance

Description

Associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance. Use this action if you want to create access grants for users or groups from your corporate identity directory. First, you must add your corporate identity directory to Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center. Then, you can associate this IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_associate_access_grants_identity_center/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_associate_access_grants_identity_center(AccountId, IdentityCenterArn)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

IdentityCenterArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance that you are associating with your S3 Access Grants instance. An IAM Identity Center instance is your corporate identity directory that you added to the IAM Identity Center. You can use the ListInstances API operation to retrieve a list of your Identity Center instances and their ARNs.


Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data

Description

Creates an access grant that gives a grantee access to your S3 data. The grantee can be an IAM user or role or a directory user, or group. Before you can create a grant, you must have an S3 Access Grants instance in the same Region as the S3 data. You can create an S3 Access Grants instance using the create_access_grants_instance. You must also have registered at least one S3 data location in your S3 Access Grants instance using create_access_grants_location.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grant/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_access_grant(
  AccountId,
  AccessGrantsLocationId,
  AccessGrantsLocationConfiguration = NULL,
  Grantee,
  Permission,
  ApplicationArn = NULL,
  S3PrefixType = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantsLocationId

[required] The ID of the registered location to which you are granting access. S3 Access Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID default to the default location ⁠s3://⁠ and assigns an auto-generated ID to other locations that you register.

If you are passing the default location, you cannot create an access grant for the entire default location. You must also specify a bucket or a bucket and prefix in the Subprefix field.

AccessGrantsLocationConfiguration

The configuration options of the grant location. The grant location is the S3 path to the data to which you are granting access. It contains the S3SubPrefix field. The grant scope is the result of appending the subprefix to the location scope of the registered location.

Grantee

[required] The user, group, or role to which you are granting access. You can grant access to an IAM user or role. If you have added your corporate directory to Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center and associated your Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance, the grantee can also be a corporate directory user or group.

Permission

[required] The type of access that you are granting to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:

  • READ – Grant read-only access to the S3 data.

  • WRITE – Grant write-only access to the S3 data.

  • READWRITE – Grant both read and write access to the S3 data.

ApplicationArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center application associated with your Identity Center instance. If an application ARN is included in the request to create an access grant, the grantee can only access the S3 data through this application.

S3PrefixType

The type of S3SubPrefix. The only possible value is Object. Pass this value if the access grant scope is an object. Do not pass this value if the access grant scope is a bucket or a bucket and a prefix.

Tags

The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the access grant. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.


Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants

Description

Creates an S3 Access Grants instance, which serves as a logical grouping for access grants. You can create one S3 Access Grants instance per Region per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_access_grants_instance(
  AccountId,
  IdentityCenterArn = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

IdentityCenterArn

If you would like to associate your S3 Access Grants instance with an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance, use this field to pass the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance that you are associating with your S3 Access Grants instance. An IAM Identity Center instance is your corporate identity directory that you added to the IAM Identity Center. You can use the ListInstances API operation to retrieve a list of your Identity Center instances and their ARNs.

Tags

The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the S3 Access Grants instance. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.


The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

The S3 data location that you would like to register in your S3 Access Grants instance. Your S3 data must be in the same Region as your S3 Access Grants instance. The location can be one of the following:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_access_grants_location(
  AccountId,
  LocationScope,
  IAMRoleArn,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

LocationScope

[required] The S3 path to the location that you are registering. The location scope can be the default S3 location ⁠s3://⁠, the S3 path to a bucket ⁠s3://<bucket>⁠, or the S3 path to a bucket and prefix ⁠s3://<bucket>/<prefix>⁠. A prefix in S3 is a string of characters at the beginning of an object key name used to organize the objects that you store in your S3 buckets. For example, object key names that start with the ⁠engineering/⁠ prefix or object key names that start with the ⁠marketing/campaigns/⁠ prefix.

IAMRoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role for the registered location. S3 Access Grants assumes this role to manage access to the registered location.

Tags

The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you are adding to the S3 Access Grants location. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_access_point(
  AccountId,
  Name,
  Bucket,
  VpcConfiguration = NULL,
  PublicAccessBlockConfiguration = NULL,
  BucketAccountId = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name you want to assign to this access point.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket that you want to associate this access point with.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.

VpcConfiguration

If you include this field, Amazon S3 restricts access to this access point to requests from the specified virtual private cloud (VPC).

This is required for creating an access point for Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

PublicAccessBlockConfiguration

The PublicAccessBlock configuration that you want to apply to the access point.

BucketAccountId

The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 bucket associated with this access point.

For same account access point when your bucket and access point belong to the same account owner, the BucketAccountId is not required. For cross-account access point when your bucket and access point are not in the same account, the BucketAccountId is required.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name, Configuration)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for owner of the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name you want to assign to this Object Lambda Access Point.

Configuration

[required] Object Lambda Access Point configuration as a JSON document.


This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To create an S3 bucket, see Create Bucket in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_bucket(
  ACL = NULL,
  Bucket,
  CreateBucketConfiguration = NULL,
  GrantFullControl = NULL,
  GrantRead = NULL,
  GrantReadACP = NULL,
  GrantWrite = NULL,
  GrantWriteACP = NULL,
  ObjectLockEnabledForBucket = NULL,
  OutpostId = NULL
)

Arguments

ACL

The canned ACL to apply to the bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket.

CreateBucketConfiguration

The configuration information for the bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

GrantFullControl

Allows grantee the read, write, read ACP, and write ACP permissions on the bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

GrantRead

Allows grantee to list the objects in the bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

GrantReadACP

Allows grantee to read the bucket ACL.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

GrantWrite

Allows grantee to create, overwrite, and delete any object in the bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

GrantWriteACP

Allows grantee to write the ACL for the applicable bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

ObjectLockEnabledForBucket

Specifies whether you want S3 Object Lock to be enabled for the new bucket.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

OutpostId

The ID of the Outposts where the bucket is being created.

This ID is required by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.


This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job

Description

This operation creates an S3 Batch Operations job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_job(
  AccountId,
  ConfirmationRequired = NULL,
  Operation,
  Report,
  ClientRequestToken,
  Manifest = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  Priority,
  RoleArn,
  Tags = NULL,
  ManifestGenerator = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that creates the job.

ConfirmationRequired

Indicates whether confirmation is required before Amazon S3 runs the job. Confirmation is only required for jobs created through the Amazon S3 console.

Operation

[required] The action that you want this job to perform on every object listed in the manifest. For more information about the available actions, see Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Report

[required] Configuration parameters for the optional job-completion report.

ClientRequestToken

[required] An idempotency token to ensure that you don't accidentally submit the same request twice. You can use any string up to the maximum length.

Manifest

Configuration parameters for the manifest.

Description

A description for this job. You can use any string within the permitted length. Descriptions don't need to be unique and can be used for multiple jobs.

Priority

[required] The numerical priority for this job. Higher numbers indicate higher priority.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that Batch Operations will use to run this job's action on every object in the manifest.

Tags

A set of tags to associate with the S3 Batch Operations job. This is an optional parameter.

ManifestGenerator

The attribute container for the ManifestGenerator details. Jobs must be created with either a manifest file or a ManifestGenerator, but not both.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point. The owner of the Multi-Region Access Point also must own the underlying buckets.

ClientToken

[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique.

Details

[required] A container element containing details about the Multi-Region Access Point.


Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID

Description

Creates a new S3 Storage Lens group and associates it with the specified Amazon Web Services account ID. An S3 Storage Lens group is a custom grouping of objects based on prefix, suffix, object tags, object size, object age, or a combination of these filters. For each Storage Lens group that you’ve created, you can also optionally add Amazon Web Services resource tags. For more information about S3 Storage Lens groups, see Working with S3 Storage Lens groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_create_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_create_storage_lens_group(AccountId, StorageLensGroup, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that the Storage Lens group is created from and associated with.

StorageLensGroup

[required] The Storage Lens group configuration.

Tags

The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you're adding to your Storage Lens group. This parameter is optional.


Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Deletes the access grant from the S3 Access Grants instance. You cannot undo an access grant deletion and the grantee will no longer have access to the S3 data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grant/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_grant(AccountId, AccessGrantId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantId

[required] The ID of the access grant. S3 Access Grants auto-generates this ID when you create the access grant.


Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Deletes your S3 Access Grants instance. You must first delete the access grants and locations before S3 Access Grants can delete the instance. See delete_access_grant and delete_access_grants_location. If you have associated an IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance, you must first dissassociate the Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance before you can delete the S3 Access Grants instance. See associate_access_grants_identity_center and dissociate_access_grants_identity_center.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_grants_instance(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.


Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Deletes the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance. The resource policy is used to manage cross-account access to your S3 Access Grants instance. By deleting the resource policy, you delete any cross-account permissions to your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.


Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Deregisters a location from your S3 Access Grants instance. You can only delete a location registration from an S3 Access Grants instance if there are no grants associated with this location. See Delete a grant for information on how to delete grants. You need to have at least one registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance in order to create access grants.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_grants_location(AccountId, AccessGrantsLocationId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantsLocationId

[required] The ID of the registered location that you are deregistering from your S3 Access Grants instance. S3 Access Grants assigned this ID when you registered the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID default to the default location ⁠s3://⁠ and assigns an auto-generated ID to other locations that you register.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_point(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point you want to delete.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/accesspoint/<my-accesspoint-name>⁠. For example, to access the access point reports-ap through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/accesspoint/reports-ap. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point you want to delete.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point whose policy you want to delete.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/accesspoint/<my-accesspoint-name>⁠. For example, to access the access point reports-ap through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/accesspoint/reports-ap. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point you want to delete the policy for.


This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To delete an S3 bucket, see delete_bucket in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_bucket(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID that owns the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket being deleted.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration

Description

This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration. To delete an S3 bucket's lifecycle configuration, see DeleteBucketLifecycle in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the lifecycle configuration to delete.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy

Description

This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket policy. To delete an S3 bucket policy, see delete_bucket_policy in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_bucket_policy(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration

Description

This operation deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To delete an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see delete_bucket_replication in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket to delete the replication configuration for.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the S3 on Outposts bucket to delete the replication configuration for.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags

Description

This action deletes an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags. To delete an S3 bucket tags, see delete_bucket_tagging in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket tag set to be removed.

Bucket

[required] The bucket ARN that has the tag set to be removed.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job

Description

Removes the entire tag set from the specified S3 Batch Operations job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_job_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to delete.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

ClientToken

[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique.

Details

[required] A container element containing details about the Multi-Region Access Point.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_public_access_block(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to remove.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration(ConfigId, AccountId)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.


Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group

Description

Deletes an existing S3 Storage Lens group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_delete_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_delete_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you're trying to delete.

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID used to create the Storage Lens group that you're trying to delete.


Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job

Description

Retrieves the configuration parameters and status for a Batch Operations job. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_describe_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_describe_job(AccountId, JobId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID for the job whose information you want to retrieve.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_describe_multi_region_access_point_operation/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_describe_multi_region_access_point_operation(
  AccountId,
  RequestTokenARN
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

RequestTokenARN

[required] The request token associated with the request you want to know about. This request token is returned as part of the response when you make an asynchronous request. You provide this token to query about the status of the asynchronous action.


Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Dissociates the Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance from the S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_dissociate_access_grants_identity_center/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_dissociate_access_grants_identity_center(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.


Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Get the details of an access grant from your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grant/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_grant(AccountId, AccessGrantId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantId

[required] The ID of the access grant. S3 Access Grants auto-generates this ID when you create the access grant.


Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account

Description

Retrieves the S3 Access Grants instance for a Region in your account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_grants_instance(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.


Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix

Description

Retrieve the S3 Access Grants instance that contains a particular prefix.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_grants_instance_for_prefix(AccountId, S3Prefix)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that is making this request.

S3Prefix

[required] The S3 prefix of the access grants that you would like to retrieve.


Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Returns the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.


Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Retrieves the details of a particular location registered in your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_grants_location(AccountId, AccessGrantsLocationId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantsLocationId

[required] The ID of the registered location that you are retrieving. S3 Access Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID default to the default location ⁠s3://⁠ and assigns an auto-generated ID to other locations that you register.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point whose configuration information you want to retrieve.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/accesspoint/<my-accesspoint-name>⁠. For example, to access the access point reports-ap through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/accesspoint/reports-ap. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point you want to return the configuration for.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point whose policy you want to retrieve.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/accesspoint/<my-accesspoint-name>⁠. For example, to access the access point reports-ap through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/accesspoint/reports-ap. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_policy_status(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point whose policy status you want to retrieve.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_access_point_policy_status_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point.


Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

Gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. For more information, see Using Amazon S3 on Outposts in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration

Description

This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's lifecycle configuration. To get an S3 bucket's lifecycle configuration, see get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action gets a bucket policy for an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To get a policy for an S3 bucket, see get_bucket_policy in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket_policy(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration

Description

This operation gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To get an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see get_bucket_replication in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket to get the replication information for.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags

Description

This action gets an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's tags. To get an S3 bucket tags, see get_bucket_tagging in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.


This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only

Description

This operation returns the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only. To return the versioning state for an S3 bucket, see get_bucket_versioning in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_bucket_versioning(AccountId, Bucket)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 on Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] The S3 on Outposts bucket to return the versioning state for.


Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application

Description

Returns a temporary access credential from S3 Access Grants to the grantee or client application. The temporary credential is an Amazon Web Services STS token that grants them access to the S3 data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_data_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_data_access(
  AccountId,
  Target,
  Permission,
  DurationSeconds = NULL,
  Privilege = NULL,
  TargetType = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

Target

[required] The S3 URI path of the data to which you are requesting temporary access credentials. If the requesting account has an access grant for this data, S3 Access Grants vends temporary access credentials in the response.

Permission

[required] The type of permission granted to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:

  • READ – Grant read-only access to the S3 data.

  • WRITE – Grant write-only access to the S3 data.

  • READWRITE – Grant both read and write access to the S3 data.

DurationSeconds

The session duration, in seconds, of the temporary access credential that S3 Access Grants vends to the grantee or client application. The default value is 1 hour, but the grantee can specify a range from 900 seconds (15 minutes) up to 43200 seconds (12 hours). If the grantee requests a value higher than this maximum, the operation fails.

Privilege

The scope of the temporary access credential that S3 Access Grants vends to the grantee or client application.

  • Default – The scope of the returned temporary access token is the scope of the grant that is closest to the target scope.

  • Minimal – The scope of the returned temporary access token is the same as the requested target scope as long as the requested scope is the same as or a subset of the grant scope.

TargetType

The type of Target. The only possible value is Object. Pass this value if the target data that you would like to access is a path to an object. Do not pass this value if the target data is a bucket or a bucket and a prefix.


Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job

Description

Returns the tags on an S3 Batch Operations job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_job_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to retrieve.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_multi_region_access_point(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Multi-Region Access Point whose configuration information you want to receive. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

Name

[required] Specifies the Multi-Region Access Point. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_policy_status(AccountId, Name)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

Name

[required] Specifies the Multi-Region Access Point. The name of the Multi-Region Access Point is different from the alias. For more information about the distinction between the name and the alias of an Multi-Region Access Point, see Rules for naming Amazon S3 Multi-Region Access Points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_routes/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_multi_region_access_point_routes(AccountId, Mrap)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

Mrap

[required] The Multi-Region Access Point ARN.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_public_access_block(AccountId)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to retrieve.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration(ConfigId, AccountId)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the Amazon S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the Amazon S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.


Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details

Description

Retrieves the Storage Lens group configuration details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_get_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_get_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you're trying to retrieve the configuration details for.

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the Storage Lens group that you're trying to retrieve the details for.


Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Returns the list of access grants in your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_access_grants(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  GranteeType = NULL,
  GranteeIdentifier = NULL,
  Permission = NULL,
  GrantScope = NULL,
  ApplicationArn = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value into a subsequent ⁠List Access Grants⁠ request in order to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the ⁠List Access Grants⁠ response. If the results include the pagination token NextToken, make another call using the NextToken to determine if there are more results.

GranteeType

The type of the grantee to which access has been granted. It can be one of the following values:

  • IAM - An IAM user or role.

  • DIRECTORY_USER - Your corporate directory user. You can use this option if you have added your corporate identity directory to IAM Identity Center and associated the IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance.

  • DIRECTORY_GROUP - Your corporate directory group. You can use this option if you have added your corporate identity directory to IAM Identity Center and associated the IAM Identity Center instance with your S3 Access Grants instance.

GranteeIdentifier

The unique identifer of the Grantee. If the grantee type is IAM, the identifier is the IAM Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the user or role. If the grantee type is a directory user or group, the identifier is 128-bit universally unique identifier (UUID) in the format ⁠a1b2c3d4-5678-90ab-cdef-EXAMPLE11111⁠. You can obtain this UUID from your Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center instance.

Permission

The type of permission granted to your S3 data, which can be set to one of the following values:

  • READ – Grant read-only access to the S3 data.

  • WRITE – Grant write-only access to the S3 data.

  • READWRITE – Grant both read and write access to the S3 data.

GrantScope

The S3 path of the data to which you are granting access. It is the result of appending the Subprefix to the location scope.

ApplicationArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an Amazon Web Services IAM Identity Center application associated with your Identity Center instance. If the grant includes an application ARN, the grantee can only access the S3 data through this application.


Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances

Description

Returns a list of S3 Access Grants instances. An S3 Access Grants instance serves as a logical grouping for your individual access grants. You can only have one S3 Access Grants instance per Region per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants_instances/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_access_grants_instances(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value into a subsequent ⁠List Access Grants Instances⁠ request in order to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the ⁠List Access Grants⁠ response. If the results include the pagination token NextToken, make another call using the NextToken to determine if there are more results.


Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Returns a list of the locations registered in your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_grants_locations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_access_grants_locations(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  LocationScope = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value into a subsequent ⁠List Access Grants Locations⁠ request in order to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the ⁠List Access Grants⁠ response. If the results include the pagination token NextToken, make another call using the NextToken to determine if there are more results.

LocationScope

The S3 path to the location that you are registering. The location scope can be the default S3 location ⁠s3://⁠, the S3 path to a bucket ⁠s3://<bucket>⁠, or the S3 path to a bucket and prefix ⁠s3://<bucket>/<prefix>⁠. A prefix in S3 is a string of characters at the beginning of an object key name used to organize the objects that you store in your S3 buckets. For example, object key names that start with the ⁠engineering/⁠ prefix or object key names that start with the ⁠marketing/campaigns/⁠ prefix.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_access_points(
  AccountId,
  Bucket = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the account that owns the specified access points.

Bucket

The name of the bucket whose associated access points you want to list.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.

NextToken

A continuation token. If a previous call to list_access_points returned a continuation token in the NextToken field, then providing that value here causes Amazon S3 to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access points that you want to include in the list. If the specified bucket has more than this number of access points, then the response will include a continuation token in the NextToken field that you can use to retrieve the next page of access points.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_access_points_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_access_points_for_object_lambda(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

NextToken

If the list has more access points than can be returned in one call to this API, this field contains a continuation token that you can provide in subsequent calls to this API to retrieve additional access points.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access points that you want to include in the list. The response may contain fewer access points but will never contain more. If there are more than this number of access points, then the response will include a continuation token in the NextToken field that you can use to retrieve the next page of access points.


Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants

Description

Use this API to list the access grants that grant the caller access to Amazon S3 data through S3 Access Grants. The caller (grantee) can be an Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity or Amazon Web Services Identity Center corporate directory identity. You must pass the Amazon Web Services account of the S3 data owner (grantor) in the request. You can, optionally, narrow the results by GrantScope, using a fragment of the data's S3 path, and S3 Access Grants will return only the grants with a path that contains the path fragment. You can also pass the AllowedByApplication filter in the request, which returns only the grants authorized for applications, whether the application is the caller's Identity Center application or any other application (ALL). For more information, see List the caller's access grants in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_caller_access_grants/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_caller_access_grants(
  AccountId,
  GrantScope = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  AllowedByApplication = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

GrantScope

The S3 path of the data that you would like to access. Must start with ⁠s3://⁠. You can optionally pass only the beginning characters of a path, and S3 Access Grants will search for all applicable grants for the path fragment.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results. Pass this value into a subsequent ⁠List Caller Access Grants⁠ request in order to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of access grants that you would like returned in the ⁠List Caller Access Grants⁠ response. If the results include the pagination token NextToken, make another call using the NextToken to determine if there are more results.

AllowedByApplication

If this optional parameter is passed in the request, a filter is applied to the results. The results will include only the access grants for the caller's Identity Center application or for any other applications (ALL).


Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request

Description

Lists current S3 Batch Operations jobs as well as the jobs that have ended within the last 90 days for the Amazon Web Services account making the request. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_jobs(
  AccountId,
  JobStatuses = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobStatuses

The ⁠List Jobs⁠ request returns jobs that match the statuses listed in this element.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results. Use the token that Amazon S3 returned in the NextToken element of the ListJobsResult from the previous ⁠List Jobs⁠ request.

MaxResults

The maximum number of jobs that Amazon S3 will include in the ⁠List Jobs⁠ response. If there are more jobs than this number, the response will include a pagination token in the NextToken field to enable you to retrieve the next page of results.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_multi_region_access_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_multi_region_access_points(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

NextToken

Not currently used. Do not use this parameter.

MaxResults

Not currently used. Do not use this parameter.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_regional_buckets/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_regional_buckets(
  AccountId,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  OutpostId = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

NextToken
MaxResults
OutpostId

The ID of the Outposts resource.

This ID is required by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_storage_lens_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_storage_lens_configurations(AccountId, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.

NextToken

A pagination token to request the next page of results.


Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region

Description

Lists all the Storage Lens groups in the specified home Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_storage_lens_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_storage_lens_groups(AccountId, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the Storage Lens groups.

NextToken

The token for the next set of results, or null if there are no more results.


This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource

Description

This operation allows you to list all the Amazon Web Services resource tags for a specified resource. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_list_tags_for_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the resource owner.

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you want to list the tags for. The tagged resource can be an S3 Storage Lens group or S3 Access Grants instance, registered location, or grant.


Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Updates the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_access_grants_instance_resource_policy(
  AccountId,
  Policy,
  Organization = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

Policy

[required] The resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance that you are updating.

Organization

The Organization of the resource policy of the S3 Access Grants instance.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_access_point_configuration_for_object_lambda(
  AccountId,
  Name,
  Configuration
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point.

Configuration

[required] Object Lambda Access Point configuration document.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_access_point_policy(AccountId, Name, Policy)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for owner of the bucket associated with the specified access point.

Name

[required] The name of the access point that you want to associate with the specified policy.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the access point accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/accesspoint/<my-accesspoint-name>⁠. For example, to access the access point reports-ap through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/accesspoint/reports-ap. The value must be URL encoded.

Policy

[required] The policy that you want to apply to the specified access point. For more information about access point policies, see Managing data access with Amazon S3 access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_access_point_policy_for_object_lambda(AccountId, Name, Policy)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the account that owns the specified Object Lambda Access Point.

Name

[required] The name of the Object Lambda Access Point.

Policy

[required] Object Lambda Access Point resource policy document.


This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action puts a lifecycle configuration to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put a lifecycle configuration to an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_bucket_lifecycle_configuration(
  AccountId,
  Bucket,
  LifecycleConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] The name of the bucket for which to set the configuration.

LifecycleConfiguration

Container for lifecycle rules. You can add as many as 1,000 rules.


This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action puts a bucket policy to an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put a policy on an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_policy in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_bucket_policy(
  AccountId,
  Bucket,
  ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess = NULL,
  Policy
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.

ConfirmRemoveSelfBucketAccess

Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change this bucket policy in the future.

This is not supported by Amazon S3 on Outposts buckets.

Policy

[required] The bucket policy as a JSON document.


This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration

Description

This action creates an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket's replication configuration. To create an S3 bucket's replication configuration, see put_bucket_replication in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_bucket_replication(AccountId, Bucket, ReplicationConfiguration)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] Specifies the S3 on Outposts bucket to set the configuration for.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.

ReplicationConfiguration

[required]


This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket

Description

This action puts tags on an Amazon S3 on Outposts bucket. To put tags on an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_tagging in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_bucket_tagging(AccountId, Bucket, Tagging)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the bucket.

For using this parameter with Amazon S3 on Outposts with the REST API, you must specify the name and the x-amz-outpost-id as well.

For using this parameter with S3 on Outposts with the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, you must specify the ARN of the bucket accessed in the format ⁠arn:aws:s3-outposts:<Region>:<account-id>:outpost/<outpost-id>/bucket/<my-bucket-name>⁠. For example, to access the bucket reports through Outpost my-outpost owned by account 123456789012 in Region us-west-2, use the URL encoding of arn:aws:s3-outposts:us-west-2:123456789012:outpost/my-outpost/bucket/reports. The value must be URL encoded.

Tagging

[required]


This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only

Description

This operation sets the versioning state for S3 on Outposts buckets only. To set the versioning state for an S3 bucket, see put_bucket_versioning in the Amazon S3 API Reference.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_bucket_versioning/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_bucket_versioning(
  AccountId,
  Bucket,
  MFA = NULL,
  VersioningConfiguration
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 on Outposts bucket.

Bucket

[required] The S3 on Outposts bucket to set the versioning state for.

MFA

The concatenation of the authentication device's serial number, a space, and the value that is displayed on your authentication device.

VersioningConfiguration

[required] The root-level tag for the VersioningConfiguration parameters.


Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job

Description

Sets the supplied tag-set on an S3 Batch Operations job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_job_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_job_tagging(AccountId, JobId, Tags)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID for the S3 Batch Operations job whose tags you want to replace.

Tags

[required] The set of tags to associate with the S3 Batch Operations job.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_multi_region_access_point_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_multi_region_access_point_policy(AccountId, ClientToken, Details)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

ClientToken

[required] An idempotency token used to identify the request and guarantee that requests are unique.

Details

[required] A container element containing the details of the policy for the Multi-Region Access Point.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_public_access_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_public_access_block(PublicAccessBlockConfiguration, AccountId)

Arguments

PublicAccessBlockConfiguration

[required] The PublicAccessBlock configuration that you want to apply to the specified Amazon Web Services account.

AccountId

[required] The account ID for the Amazon Web Services account whose PublicAccessBlock configuration you want to set.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration(
  ConfigId,
  AccountId,
  StorageLensConfiguration,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.

StorageLensConfiguration

[required] The S3 Storage Lens configuration.

Tags

The tag set of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

You can set up to a maximum of 50 tags.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_put_storage_lens_configuration_tagging(ConfigId, AccountId, Tags)

Arguments

ConfigId

[required] The ID of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

AccountId

[required] The account ID of the requester.

Tags

[required] The tag set of the S3 Storage Lens configuration.

You can set up to a maximum of 50 tags.


This operation is not supported by directory buckets

Description

This operation is not supported by directory buckets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_submit_multi_region_access_point_routes/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_submit_multi_region_access_point_routes(
  AccountId,
  Mrap,
  RouteUpdates
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID for the owner of the Multi-Region Access Point.

Mrap

[required] The Multi-Region Access Point ARN.

RouteUpdates

[required] The different routes that make up the new route configuration. Active routes return a value of 100, and passive routes return a value of 0.


Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag

Description

Creates a new Amazon Web Services resource tag or updates an existing resource tag. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources. You can add up to 50 Amazon Web Services resource tags for each S3 resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_tag_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that created the S3 resource that you're trying to add tags to or the requester's account ID.

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you're trying to add tags to. The tagged resource can be an S3 Storage Lens group or S3 Access Grants instance, registered location, or grant.

Tags

[required] The Amazon Web Services resource tags that you want to add to the specified S3 resource.


This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource

Description

This operation removes the specified Amazon Web Services resource tags from an S3 resource. Each tag is a label consisting of a user-defined key and value. Tags can help you manage, identify, organize, search for, and filter resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_untag_resource(AccountId, ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the resource that you're trying to remove the tags from.

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 resource that you're trying to remove the tags from.

TagKeys

[required] The array of tag key-value pairs that you're trying to remove from of the S3 resource.


Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance

Description

Updates the IAM role of a registered location in your S3 Access Grants instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_access_grants_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_update_access_grants_location(
  AccountId,
  AccessGrantsLocationId,
  IAMRoleArn
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the S3 Access Grants instance.

AccessGrantsLocationId

[required] The ID of the registered location that you are updating. S3 Access Grants assigns this ID when you register the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID default to the default location ⁠s3://⁠ and assigns an auto-generated ID to other locations that you register.

The ID of the registered location to which you are granting access. S3 Access Grants assigned this ID when you registered the location. S3 Access Grants assigns the ID default to the default location ⁠s3://⁠ and assigns an auto-generated ID to other locations that you register.

If you are passing the default location, you cannot create an access grant for the entire default location. You must also specify a bucket or a bucket and prefix in the Subprefix field.

IAMRoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role for the registered location. S3 Access Grants assumes this role to manage access to the registered location.


Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority

Description

Updates an existing S3 Batch Operations job's priority. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_job_priority/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_update_job_priority(AccountId, JobId, Priority)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID for the job whose priority you want to update.

Priority

[required] The priority you want to assign to this job.


Updates the status for the specified job

Description

Updates the status for the specified job. Use this operation to confirm that you want to run a job or to cancel an existing job. For more information, see S3 Batch Operations in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_job_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_update_job_status(
  AccountId,
  JobId,
  RequestedJobStatus,
  StatusUpdateReason = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID associated with the S3 Batch Operations job.

JobId

[required] The ID of the job whose status you want to update.

RequestedJobStatus

[required] The status that you want to move the specified job to.

StatusUpdateReason

A description of the reason why you want to change the specified job's status. This field can be any string up to the maximum length.


Updates the existing Storage Lens group

Description

Updates the existing Storage Lens group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3control_update_storage_lens_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3control_update_storage_lens_group(Name, AccountId, StorageLensGroup)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the Storage Lens group that you want to update.

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID of the Storage Lens group owner.

StorageLensGroup

[required] The JSON file that contains the Storage Lens group configuration.


Amazon S3 on Outposts

Description

Amazon S3 on Outposts provides access to S3 on Outposts operations.

Usage

s3outposts(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- s3outposts(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_endpoint Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost
delete_endpoint Deletes an endpoint
list_endpoints Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost
list_outposts_with_s3 Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account
list_shared_endpoints Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM)

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- s3outposts()
svc$create_endpoint(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost

Description

Creates an endpoint and associates it with the specified Outpost.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_create_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3outposts_create_endpoint(
  OutpostId,
  SubnetId,
  SecurityGroupId,
  AccessType = NULL,
  CustomerOwnedIpv4Pool = NULL
)

Arguments

OutpostId

[required] The ID of the Outposts.

SubnetId

[required] The ID of the subnet in the selected VPC. The endpoint subnet must belong to the Outpost that has Amazon S3 on Outposts provisioned.

SecurityGroupId

[required] The ID of the security group to use with the endpoint.

AccessType

The type of access for the network connectivity for the Amazon S3 on Outposts endpoint. To use the Amazon Web Services VPC, choose Private. To use the endpoint with an on-premises network, choose CustomerOwnedIp. If you choose CustomerOwnedIp, you must also provide the customer-owned IP address pool (CoIP pool).

Private is the default access type value.

CustomerOwnedIpv4Pool

The ID of the customer-owned IPv4 address pool (CoIP pool) for the endpoint. IP addresses are allocated from this pool for the endpoint.


Deletes an endpoint

Description

Deletes an endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_delete_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3outposts_delete_endpoint(EndpointId, OutpostId)

Arguments

EndpointId

[required] The ID of the endpoint.

OutpostId

[required] The ID of the Outposts.


Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost

Description

Lists endpoints associated with the specified Outpost.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3outposts_list_endpoints(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

If a previous response from this operation included a NextToken value, provide that value here to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of endpoints that will be returned in the response.


Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account

Description

Lists the Outposts with S3 on Outposts capacity for your Amazon Web Services account. Includes S3 on Outposts that you have access to as the Outposts owner, or as a shared user from Resource Access Manager (RAM).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_outposts_with_s3/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3outposts_list_outposts_with_s3(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

When you can get additional results from the list_outposts_with_s3 call, a NextToken parameter is returned in the output. You can then pass in a subsequent command to the NextToken parameter to continue listing additional Outposts.

MaxResults

The maximum number of Outposts to return. The limit is 100.


Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM)

Description

Lists all endpoints associated with an Outpost that has been shared by Amazon Web Services Resource Access Manager (RAM).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3outposts_list_shared_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3outposts_list_shared_endpoints(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  OutpostId
)

Arguments

NextToken

If a previous response from this operation included a NextToken value, you can provide that value here to retrieve the next page of results.

MaxResults

The maximum number of endpoints that will be returned in the response.

OutpostId

[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services Outpost.


Amazon S3 Tables

Description

An Amazon S3 table represents a structured dataset consisting of tabular data in Apache Parquet format and related metadata. This data is stored inside an S3 table as a subresource. All tables in a table bucket are stored in the Apache Iceberg table format. Through integration with the AWS Glue Data Catalog you can interact with your tables using AWS analytics services, such as Amazon Athena and Amazon Redshift. Amazon S3 manages maintenance of your tables through automatic file compaction and snapshot management. For more information, see Amazon S3 table buckets.

Usage

s3tables(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- s3tables(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_namespace Creates a namespace
create_table Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket
create_table_bucket Creates a table bucket
delete_namespace Deletes a namespace
delete_table Deletes a table
delete_table_bucket Deletes a table bucket
delete_table_bucket_policy Deletes a table bucket policy
delete_table_policy Deletes a table policy
get_namespace Gets details about a namespace
get_table Gets details about a table
get_table_bucket Gets details on a table bucket
get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket
get_table_bucket_policy Gets details about a table bucket policy
get_table_maintenance_configuration Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table
get_table_maintenance_job_status Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table
get_table_metadata_location Gets the location of the table metadata
get_table_policy Gets details about a table policy
list_namespaces Lists the namespaces within a table bucket
list_table_buckets Lists table buckets for your account
list_tables List tables in the given table bucket
put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket
put_table_bucket_policy Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket
put_table_maintenance_configuration Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table
put_table_policy Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table
rename_table Renames a table or a namespace
update_table_metadata_location Updates the metadata location for a table

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- s3tables()
svc$create_namespace(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates a namespace

Description

Creates a namespace. A namespace is a logical grouping of tables within your table bucket, which you can use to organize tables. For more information, see Create a namespace in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_create_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket to create the namespace in.

namespace

[required] A name for the namespace.


Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket

Description

Creates a new table associated with the given namespace in a table bucket. For more information, see Creating an Amazon S3 table in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_create_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, format, metadata = NULL)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket to create the table in.

namespace

[required] The namespace to associated with the table.

name

[required] The name for the table.

format

[required] The format for the table.

metadata

The metadata for the table.


Creates a table bucket

Description

Creates a table bucket. For more information, see Creating a table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_create_table_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_create_table_bucket(name)

Arguments

name

[required] The name for the table bucket.


Deletes a namespace

Description

Deletes a namespace. For more information, see Delete a namespace in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_delete_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the namespace.

namespace

[required] The name of the namespace.


Deletes a table

Description

Deletes a table. For more information, see Deleting an Amazon S3 table in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_delete_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, versionToken = NULL)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.

versionToken

The version token of the table.


Deletes a table bucket

Description

Deletes a table bucket. For more information, see Deleting a table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_delete_table_bucket(tableBucketARN)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.


Deletes a table bucket policy

Description

Deletes a table bucket policy. For more information, see Deleting a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_delete_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.


Deletes a table policy

Description

Deletes a table policy. For more information, see Deleting a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_delete_table_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_delete_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The table name.


Gets details about a namespace

Description

Gets details about a namespace. For more information, see Table namespaces in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_namespace(tableBucketARN, namespace)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The name of the namespace.


Gets details about a table

Description

Gets details about a table. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the table.

namespace

[required] The name of the namespace the table is associated with.

name

[required] The name of the table.


Gets details on a table bucket

Description

Gets details on a table bucket. For more information, see Viewing details about an Amazon S3 table bucket in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_bucket(tableBucketARN)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.


Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket

Description

Gets details about a maintenance configuration for a given table bucket. For more information, see Amazon S3 table bucket maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration(tableBucketARN)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the maintenance configuration.


Gets details about a table bucket policy

Description

Gets details about a table bucket policy. For more information, see Viewing a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.


Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table

Description

Gets details about the maintenance configuration of a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_maintenance_configuration(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.


Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table

Description

Gets the status of a maintenance job for a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_maintenance_job_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_maintenance_job_status(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The name of the namespace the table is associated with.

</p>
name

[required] The name of the maintenance job.


Gets the location of the table metadata

Description

Gets the location of the table metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_metadata_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_metadata_location(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The namespace of the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.


Gets details about a table policy

Description

Gets details about a table policy. For more information, see Viewing a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_get_table_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_get_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.


Lists the namespaces within a table bucket

Description

Lists the namespaces within a table bucket. For more information, see Table namespaces in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_namespaces/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_list_namespaces(
  tableBucketARN,
  prefix = NULL,
  continuationToken = NULL,
  maxNamespaces = NULL
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

prefix

The prefix of the namespaces.

continuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key. You can use this ContinuationToken for pagination of the list results.

maxNamespaces

The maximum number of namespaces to return in the list.


Lists table buckets for your account

Description

Lists table buckets for your account. For more information, see S3 Table buckets in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_table_buckets/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_list_table_buckets(
  prefix = NULL,
  continuationToken = NULL,
  maxBuckets = NULL
)

Arguments

prefix

The prefix of the table buckets.

continuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key. You can use this ContinuationToken for pagination of the list results.

maxBuckets

The maximum number of table buckets to return in the list.


List tables in the given table bucket

Description

List tables in the given table bucket. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_list_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_list_tables(
  tableBucketARN,
  namespace = NULL,
  prefix = NULL,
  continuationToken = NULL,
  maxTables = NULL
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

The namespace of the tables.

prefix

The prefix of the tables.

continuationToken

ContinuationToken indicates to Amazon S3 that the list is being continued on this bucket with a token. ContinuationToken is obfuscated and is not a real key. You can use this ContinuationToken for pagination of the list results.

maxTables

The maximum number of tables to return.


Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket

Description

Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table bucket. For more information, see Amazon S3 table bucket maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_put_table_bucket_maintenance_configuration(
  tableBucketARN,
  type,
  value
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket associated with the maintenance configuration.

type

[required] The type of the maintenance configuration.

value

[required] Defines the values of the maintenance configuration for the table bucket.


Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket

Description

Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table bucket policy for a table bucket. For more information, see Adding a table bucket policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_bucket_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_put_table_bucket_policy(tableBucketARN, resourcePolicy)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

resourcePolicy

[required] The JSON that defines the policy.


Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table

Description

Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing maintenance configuration for a table. For more information, see S3 Tables maintenance in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_maintenance_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_put_table_maintenance_configuration(
  tableBucketARN,
  namespace,
  name,
  type,
  value
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table associated with the maintenance configuration.

namespace

[required] The namespace of the table.

name

[required] The name of the maintenance configuration.

type

[required] The type of the maintenance configuration.

value

[required] Defines the values of the maintenance configuration for the table.


Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table

Description

Creates a new maintenance configuration or replaces an existing table policy for a table. For more information, see Adding a table policy in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_put_table_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_put_table_policy(tableBucketARN, namespace, name, resourcePolicy)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket that contains the table.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.

resourcePolicy

[required] The JSON that defines the policy.


Renames a table or a namespace

Description

Renames a table or a namespace. For more information, see S3 Tables in the Amazon Simple Storage Service User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_rename_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_rename_table(
  tableBucketARN,
  namespace,
  name,
  newNamespaceName = NULL,
  newName = NULL,
  versionToken = NULL
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The namespace associated with the table.

name

[required] The current name of the table.

newNamespaceName

The new name for the namespace.

newName

The new name for the table.

versionToken

The version token of the table.


Updates the metadata location for a table

Description

Updates the metadata location for a table. The metadata location of a table must be an S3 URI that begins with the table's warehouse location. The metadata location for an Apache Iceberg table must end with .metadata.json, or if the metadata file is Gzip-compressed, .metadata.json.gz.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/s3tables_update_table_metadata_location/ for full documentation.

Usage

s3tables_update_table_metadata_location(
  tableBucketARN,
  namespace,
  name,
  versionToken,
  metadataLocation
)

Arguments

tableBucketARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table bucket.

namespace

[required] The namespace of the table.

name

[required] The name of the table.

versionToken

[required] The version token of the table.

metadataLocation

[required] The new metadata location for the table.


AWS Storage Gateway

Description

Storage Gateway Service

Amazon FSx File Gateway is no longer available to new customers. Existing customers of FSx File Gateway can continue to use the service normally. For capabilities similar to FSx File Gateway, visit this blog post.

Storage Gateway is the service that connects an on-premises software appliance with cloud-based storage to provide seamless and secure integration between an organization's on-premises IT environment and the Amazon Web Services storage infrastructure. The service enables you to securely upload data to the Amazon Web Services Cloud for cost effective backup and rapid disaster recovery.

Use the following links to get started using the Storage Gateway Service API Reference:

Storage Gateway resource IDs are in uppercase. When you use these resource IDs with the Amazon EC2 API, EC2 expects resource IDs in lowercase. You must change your resource ID to lowercase to use it with the EC2 API. For example, in Storage Gateway the ID for a volume might be vol-AA22BB012345DAF670. When you use this ID with the EC2 API, you must change it to vol-aa22bb012345daf670. Otherwise, the EC2 API might not behave as expected.

IDs for Storage Gateway volumes and Amazon EBS snapshots created from gateway volumes are changing to a longer format. Starting in December 2016, all new volumes and snapshots will be created with a 17-character string. Starting in April 2016, you will be able to use these longer IDs so you can test your systems with the new format. For more information, see Longer EC2 and EBS resource IDs.

For example, a volume Amazon Resource Name (ARN) with the longer volume ID format looks like the following:

⁠arn:aws:storagegateway:us-west-2:111122223333:gateway/sgw-12A3456B/volume/vol-1122AABBCCDDEEFFG⁠.

A snapshot ID with the longer ID format looks like the following: ⁠snap-78e226633445566ee⁠.

For more information, see Announcement: Heads-up – Longer Storage Gateway volume and snapshot IDs coming in 2016.

Usage

storagegateway(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- storagegateway(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

activate_gateway Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host
add_cache Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway
add_tags_to_resource Adds one or more tags to the specified resource
add_upload_buffer Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway
add_working_storage Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway
assign_tape_pool Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving
associate_file_system Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway
attach_volume Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway
cancel_archival Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated
cancel_cache_report Cancels generation of a specified cache report
cancel_retrieval Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated
create_cachedi_scsi_volume Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway
create_nfs_file_share Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway
create_smb_file_share Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway
create_snapshot Initiates a snapshot of a volume
create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point
create_storedi_scsi_volume Creates a volume on a specified gateway
create_tape_pool Creates a new custom tape pool
create_tapes Creates one or more virtual tapes
create_tape_with_barcode Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode
delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway
delete_bandwidth_rate_limit Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
delete_cache_report Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database
delete_chap_credentials Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair
delete_file_share Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway
delete_gateway Deletes a gateway
delete_snapshot_schedule Deletes a snapshot of a volume
delete_tape Deletes the specified virtual tape
delete_tape_archive Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS)
delete_tape_pool Delete a custom tape pool
delete_volume Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the CreateCachediSCSIVolume or CreateStorediSCSIVolume API
describe_availability_monitor_test Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster
describe_bandwidth_rate_limit Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway
describe_cache Returns information about the cache of a gateway
describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request
describe_cache_report Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress
describe_chap_credentials Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair
describe_file_system_associations Gets the file system association information
describe_gateway_information Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version
describe_maintenance_start_time Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply
describe_nfs_file_shares Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway
describe_smb_file_shares Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway
describe_smb_settings Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway
describe_snapshot_schedule Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume
describe_storedi_scsi_volumes Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request
describe_tape_archives Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS)
describe_tape_recovery_points Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway
describe_tapes Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)
describe_upload_buffer Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway
describe_vtl_devices Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway
describe_working_storage Returns information about the working storage of a gateway
detach_volume Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway
disable_gateway Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning
disassociate_file_system Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway
join_domain Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain
list_automatic_tape_creation_policies Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway
list_cache_reports Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account
list_file_shares Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account
list_file_system_associations Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary objects
list_gateways Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request
list_local_disks Returns a list of the gateway's local disks
list_tags_for_resource Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource
list_tape_pools Lists custom tape pools
list_tapes Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS)
list_volume_initiators Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume
list_volume_recovery_points Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway
list_volumes Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway
notify_when_uploaded Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3
refresh_cache Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share
remove_tags_from_resource Removes one or more tags from the specified resource
reset_cache Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage
retrieve_tape_archive Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway
retrieve_tape_recovery_point Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape
set_local_console_password Sets the password for your VM local console
set_smb_guest_password Sets the password for the guest user smbguest
shutdown_gateway Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway
start_availability_monitor_test Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment
start_cache_report Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share
start_gateway Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see ShutdownGateway)
update_automatic_tape_creation_policy Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway
update_bandwidth_rate_limit Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway
update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway
update_chap_credentials Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target
update_file_system_association Updates a file system association
update_gateway_information Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size
update_gateway_software_now Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software
update_maintenance_start_time Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply
update_nfs_file_share Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share
update_smb_file_share Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share
update_smb_file_share_visibility Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list
update_smb_local_groups Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway
update_smb_security_strategy Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway
update_snapshot_schedule Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume
update_vtl_device_type Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- storagegateway()
# Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host.
svc$activate_gateway(
  ActivationKey = "29AV1-3OFV9-VVIUB-NKT0I-LRO6V",
  GatewayName = "My_Gateway",
  GatewayRegion = "us-east-1",
  GatewayTimezone = "GMT-12:00",
  GatewayType = "STORED",
  MediumChangerType = "AWS-Gateway-VTL",
  TapeDriveType = "IBM-ULT3580-TD5"
)

## End(Not run)


Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host

Description

Activates the gateway you previously deployed on your host. In the activation process, you specify information such as the Amazon Web Services Region that you want to use for storing snapshots or tapes, the time zone for scheduled snapshots the gateway snapshot schedule window, an activation key, and a name for your gateway. The activation process also associates your gateway with your account. For more information, see update_gateway_information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_activate_gateway/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_activate_gateway(
  ActivationKey,
  GatewayName,
  GatewayTimezone,
  GatewayRegion,
  GatewayType = NULL,
  TapeDriveType = NULL,
  MediumChangerType = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ActivationKey

[required] Your gateway activation key. You can obtain the activation key by sending an HTTP GET request with redirects enabled to the gateway IP address (port 80). The redirect URL returned in the response provides you the activation key for your gateway in the query string parameter activationKey. It may also include other activation-related parameters, however, these are merely defaults – the arguments you pass to the activate_gateway API call determine the actual configuration of your gateway.

For more information, see Getting activation key in the Storage Gateway User Guide.

GatewayName

[required] The name you configured for your gateway.

GatewayTimezone

[required] A value that indicates the time zone you want to set for the gateway. The time zone is of the format "GMT", "GMT-hr:mm", or "GMT+hr:mm". For example, GMT indicates Greenwich Mean Time without any offset. GMT-4:00 indicates the time is 4 hours behind GMT. GMT+2:00 indicates the time is 2 hours ahead of GMT. The time zone is used, for example, for scheduling snapshots and your gateway's maintenance schedule.

GatewayRegion

[required] A value that indicates the Amazon Web Services Region where you want to store your data. The gateway Amazon Web Services Region specified must be the same Amazon Web Services Region as the Amazon Web Services Region in your Host header in the request. For more information about available Amazon Web Services Regions and endpoints for Storage Gateway, see Storage Gateway endpoints and quotas in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

Valid Values: See Storage Gateway endpoints and quotas in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

GatewayType

A value that defines the type of gateway to activate. The type specified is critical to all later functions of the gateway and cannot be changed after activation. The default value is CACHED.

Amazon FSx File Gateway is no longer available to new customers. Existing customers of FSx File Gateway can continue to use the service normally. For capabilities similar to FSx File Gateway, visit this blog post.

Valid Values: STORED | CACHED | VTL | FILE_S3 | FILE_FSX_SMB

TapeDriveType

The value that indicates the type of tape drive to use for tape gateway. This field is optional.

Valid Values: IBM-ULT3580-TD5

MediumChangerType

The value that indicates the type of medium changer to use for tape gateway. This field is optional.

Valid Values: STK-L700 | AWS-Gateway-VTL | ⁠IBM-03584L32-0402⁠

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that you can assign to the gateway. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers that can be represented in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256 characters.


Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway

Description

Configures one or more gateway local disks as cache for a gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume, tape, and file gateway type (see How Storage Gateway works (architecture).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_add_cache(GatewayARN, DiskIds)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

DiskIds

[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the list_local_disks API.


Adds one or more tags to the specified resource

Description

Adds one or more tags to the specified resource. You use tags to add metadata to resources, which you can use to categorize these resources. For example, you can categorize resources by purpose, owner, environment, or team. Each tag consists of a key and a value, which you define. You can add tags to the following Storage Gateway resources:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource you want to add tags to.

Tags

[required] The key-value pair that represents the tag you want to add to the resource. The value can be an empty string.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway

Description

Configures one or more gateway local disks as upload buffer for a specified gateway. This operation is supported for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_upload_buffer/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_add_upload_buffer(GatewayARN, DiskIds)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

DiskIds

[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the list_local_disks API.


Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway

Description

Configures one or more gateway local disks as working storage for a gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volume gateway type. This operation is deprecated in cached volume API version 20120630. Use add_upload_buffer instead.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_add_working_storage/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_add_working_storage(GatewayARN, DiskIds)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

DiskIds

[required] An array of strings that identify disks that are to be configured as working storage. Each string has a minimum length of 1 and maximum length of 300. You can get the disk IDs from the list_local_disks API.


Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving

Description

Assigns a tape to a tape pool for archiving. The tape assigned to a pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the S3 storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_assign_tape_pool/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_assign_tape_pool(
  TapeARN,
  PoolId,
  BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL
)

Arguments

TapeARN

[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape that you want to add to the tape pool.

PoolId

[required] The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.

BypassGovernanceRetention

Set permissions to bypass governance retention. If the lock type of the archived tape is Governance, the tape's archived age is not older than RetentionLockInDays, and the user does not already have BypassGovernanceRetention, setting this to TRUE enables the user to bypass the retention lock. This parameter is set to true by default for calls from the console.

Valid values: TRUE | FALSE


Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway

Description

Associate an Amazon FSx file system with the FSx File Gateway. After the association process is complete, the file shares on the Amazon FSx file system are available for access through the gateway. This operation only supports the FSx File Gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_associate_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_associate_file_system(
  UserName,
  Password,
  ClientToken,
  GatewayARN,
  LocationARN,
  Tags = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL,
  EndpointNetworkConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

UserName

[required] The user name of the user credential that has permission to access the root share D$ of the Amazon FSx file system. The user account must belong to the Amazon FSx delegated admin user group.

Password

[required] The password of the user credential.

ClientToken

[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by the FSx File Gateway to ensure idempotent file system association creation.

GatewayARN

[required]

LocationARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon FSx file system to associate with the FSx File Gateway.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the file system association. Each tag is a key-value pair.

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for the audit logs.

CacheAttributes
EndpointNetworkConfiguration

Specifies the network configuration information for the gateway associated with the Amazon FSx file system.

If multiple file systems are associated with this gateway, this parameter's IpAddresses field is required.


Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway

Description

Connects a volume to an iSCSI connection and then attaches the volume to the specified gateway. Detaching and attaching a volume enables you to recover your data from one gateway to a different gateway without creating a snapshot. It also makes it easier to move your volumes from an on-premises gateway to a gateway hosted on an Amazon EC2 instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_attach_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_attach_volume(
  GatewayARN,
  TargetName = NULL,
  VolumeARN,
  NetworkInterfaceId,
  DiskId = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway that you want to attach the volume to.

TargetName

The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying TargetName as myvolume results in the target ARN of ⁠arn:aws:storagegateway:us-east-2:111122223333:gateway/sgw-12A3456B/target/iqn.1997-05.com.amazon:myvolume⁠. The target name must be unique across all volumes on a gateway.

If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name.

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume to attach to the specified gateway.

NetworkInterfaceId

[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use describe_gateway_information to get a list of the network interfaces available on a gateway.

Valid Values: A valid IP address.

DiskId

The unique device ID or other distinguishing data that identifies the local disk used to create the volume. This value is only required when you are attaching a stored volume.


Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated

Description

Cancels archiving of a virtual tape to the virtual tape shelf (VTS) after the archiving process is initiated. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_archival/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_cancel_archival(GatewayARN, TapeARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to cancel archiving for.


Cancels generation of a specified cache report

Description

Cancels generation of a specified cache report. You can use this operation to manually cancel an IN-PROGRESS report for any reason. This action changes the report status from IN-PROGRESS to CANCELLED. You can only cancel in-progress reports. If the the report you attempt to cancel is in FAILED, ERROR, or COMPLETED state, the cancel operation returns an error.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_cache_report/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_cancel_cache_report(CacheReportARN)

Arguments

CacheReportARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to cancel.


Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated

Description

Cancels retrieval of a virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a gateway after the retrieval process is initiated. The virtual tape is returned to the VTS. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_cancel_retrieval/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_cancel_retrieval(GatewayARN, TapeARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to cancel retrieval for.


Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway

Description

Creates a cached volume on a specified cached volume gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_cachedi_scsi_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_cachedi_scsi_volume(
  GatewayARN,
  VolumeSizeInBytes,
  SnapshotId = NULL,
  TargetName,
  SourceVolumeARN = NULL,
  NetworkInterfaceId,
  ClientToken,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

VolumeSizeInBytes

[required] The size of the volume in bytes.

SnapshotId

The snapshot ID (e.g. "snap-1122aabb") of the snapshot to restore as the new cached volume. Specify this field if you want to create the iSCSI storage volume from a snapshot; otherwise, do not include this field. To list snapshots for your account use DescribeSnapshots in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud API Reference.

TargetName

[required] The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying TargetName as myvolume results in the target ARN of ⁠arn:aws:storagegateway:us-east-2:111122223333:gateway/sgw-12A3456B/target/iqn.1997-05.com.amazon:myvolume⁠. The target name must be unique across all volumes on a gateway.

If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name.

SourceVolumeARN

The ARN for an existing volume. Specifying this ARN makes the new volume into an exact copy of the specified existing volume's latest recovery point. The VolumeSizeInBytes value for this new volume must be equal to or larger than the size of the existing volume, in bytes.

NetworkInterfaceId

[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use describe_gateway_information to get a list of the network interfaces available on a gateway.

Valid Values: A valid IP address.

ClientToken

[required] A unique identifier that you use to retry a request. If you retry a request, use the same ClientToken you specified in the initial request.

KMSEncrypted

Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key, or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3. Optional.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when KMSEncrypted is true. Optional.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that you can assign to a cached volume. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers that you can represent in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256 characters.


Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway

Description

Creates a Network File System (NFS) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway. In Storage Gateway, a file share is a file system mount point backed by Amazon S3 cloud storage. Storage Gateway exposes file shares using an NFS interface. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_nfs_file_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_nfs_file_share(
  ClientToken,
  NFSFileShareDefaults = NULL,
  GatewayARN,
  EncryptionType = NULL,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  Role,
  LocationARN,
  DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
  ObjectACL = NULL,
  ClientList = NULL,
  Squash = NULL,
  ReadOnly = NULL,
  GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
  RequesterPays = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  FileShareName = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL,
  NotificationPolicy = NULL,
  VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
  BucketRegion = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken

[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by S3 File Gateway to ensure idempotent file share creation.

NFSFileShareDefaults

File share default values. Optional.

GatewayARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 File Gateway on which you want to create a file share.

EncryptionType

A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

KMSEncrypted

Optional. Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key (SSE-KMS), or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3 (SSE-S3). To use dual-layer encryption (DSSE-KMS), set the EncryptionType parameter instead.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if KMSEncrypted is true, or if EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms.

Role

[required] The ARN of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that an S3 File Gateway assumes when it accesses the underlying storage.

LocationARN

[required] A custom ARN for the backend storage used for storing data for file shares. It includes a resource ARN with an optional prefix concatenation. The prefix must end with a forward slash (/).

You can specify LocationARN as a bucket ARN, access point ARN or access point alias, as shown in the following examples.

Bucket ARN:

⁠arn:aws:s3:::amzn-s3-demo-bucket/prefix/⁠

Access point ARN:

⁠arn:aws:s3:region:account-id:accesspoint/access-point-name/prefix/⁠

If you specify an access point, the bucket policy must be configured to delegate access control to the access point. For information, see Delegating access control to access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access point alias:

test-ap-ab123cdef4gehijklmn5opqrstuvuse1a-s3alias

DefaultStorageClass

The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by the S3 File Gateway. The default value is S3_STANDARD. Optional.

Valid Values: S3_STANDARD | S3_INTELLIGENT_TIERING | S3_STANDARD_IA | S3_ONEZONE_IA

ObjectACL

A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default value is private.

ClientList

The list of clients that are allowed to access the S3 File Gateway. The list must contain either valid IP addresses or valid CIDR blocks.

Squash

A value that maps a user to anonymous user.

Valid values are the following:

  • RootSquash: Only root is mapped to anonymous user.

  • NoSquash: No one is mapped to anonymous user.

  • AllSquash: Everyone is mapped to anonymous user.

ReadOnly

A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to true to set the write status to read-only, otherwise set to false.

Valid Values: true | false

GuessMIMETypeEnabled

A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects based on file extensions. Set this value to true to enable MIME type guessing, otherwise set to false. The default value is true.

Valid Values: true | false

RequesterPays

A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set to true, the requester pays the costs; otherwise, the S3 bucket owner pays. However, the S3 bucket owner always pays the cost of storing data.

RequesterPays is a configuration for the S3 bucket that backs the file share, so make sure that the configuration on the file share is the same as the S3 bucket configuration.

Valid Values: true | false

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the NFS file share. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.

FileShareName

The name of the file share. Optional.

FileShareName must be set if an S3 prefix name is set in LocationARN, or if an access point or access point alias is used.

A valid NFS file share name can only contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -, ., and ⁠_⁠.

CacheAttributes

Specifies refresh cache information for the file share.

NotificationPolicy

The notification policy of the file share. SettlingTimeInSeconds controls the number of seconds to wait after the last point in time a client wrote to a file before generating an ObjectUploaded notification. Because clients can make many small writes to files, it's best to set this parameter for as long as possible to avoid generating multiple notifications for the same file in a small time period.

SettlingTimeInSeconds has no effect on the timing of the object uploading to Amazon S3, only the timing of the notification.

This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications.

The following example sets NotificationPolicy on with SettlingTimeInSeconds set to 60.

⁠{\"Upload\": {\"SettlingTimeInSeconds\": 60}}⁠

The following example sets NotificationPolicy off.

{}

VPCEndpointDNSName

Specifies the DNS name for the VPC endpoint that the NFS file share uses to connect to Amazon S3.

This parameter is required for NFS file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point.

BucketRegion

Specifies the Region of the S3 bucket where the NFS file share stores files.

This parameter is required for NFS file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point.

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs.


Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway

Description

Creates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share on an existing S3 File Gateway. In Storage Gateway, a file share is a file system mount point backed by Amazon S3 cloud storage. Storage Gateway exposes file shares using an SMB interface. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_smb_file_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_smb_file_share(
  ClientToken,
  GatewayARN,
  EncryptionType = NULL,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  Role,
  LocationARN,
  DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
  ObjectACL = NULL,
  ReadOnly = NULL,
  GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
  RequesterPays = NULL,
  SMBACLEnabled = NULL,
  AccessBasedEnumeration = NULL,
  AdminUserList = NULL,
  ValidUserList = NULL,
  InvalidUserList = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
  Authentication = NULL,
  CaseSensitivity = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  FileShareName = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL,
  NotificationPolicy = NULL,
  VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
  BucketRegion = NULL,
  OplocksEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken

[required] A unique string value that you supply that is used by S3 File Gateway to ensure idempotent file share creation.

GatewayARN

[required] The ARN of the S3 File Gateway on which you want to create a file share.

EncryptionType

A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

KMSEncrypted

Optional. Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key (SSE-KMS), or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3 (SSE-S3). To use dual-layer encryption (DSSE-KMS), set the EncryptionType parameter instead.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if KMSEncrypted is true, or if EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms.

Role

[required] The ARN of the Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that an S3 File Gateway assumes when it accesses the underlying storage.

LocationARN

[required] A custom ARN for the backend storage used for storing data for file shares. It includes a resource ARN with an optional prefix concatenation. The prefix must end with a forward slash (/).

You can specify LocationARN as a bucket ARN, access point ARN or access point alias, as shown in the following examples.

Bucket ARN:

⁠arn:aws:s3:::amzn-s3-demo-bucket/prefix/⁠

Access point ARN:

⁠arn:aws:s3:region:account-id:accesspoint/access-point-name/prefix/⁠

If you specify an access point, the bucket policy must be configured to delegate access control to the access point. For information, see Delegating access control to access points in the Amazon S3 User Guide.

Access point alias:

test-ap-ab123cdef4gehijklmn5opqrstuvuse1a-s3alias

DefaultStorageClass

The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by the S3 File Gateway. The default value is S3_STANDARD. Optional.

Valid Values: S3_STANDARD | S3_INTELLIGENT_TIERING | S3_STANDARD_IA | S3_ONEZONE_IA

ObjectACL

A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default value is private.

ReadOnly

A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to true to set the write status to read-only, otherwise set to false.

Valid Values: true | false

GuessMIMETypeEnabled

A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects based on file extensions. Set this value to true to enable MIME type guessing, otherwise set to false. The default value is true.

Valid Values: true | false

RequesterPays

A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set to true, the requester pays the costs; otherwise, the S3 bucket owner pays. However, the S3 bucket owner always pays the cost of storing data.

RequesterPays is a configuration for the S3 bucket that backs the file share, so make sure that the configuration on the file share is the same as the S3 bucket configuration.

Valid Values: true | false

SMBACLEnabled

Set this value to true to enable access control list (ACL) on the SMB file share. Set it to false to map file and directory permissions to the POSIX permissions.

For more information, see Using Windows ACLs to limit SMB file share access in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide.

Valid Values: true | false

AccessBasedEnumeration

The files and folders on this share will only be visible to users with read access.

AdminUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that will be granted administrator privileges on the file share. These users can do all file operations as the super-user. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠.

Use this option very carefully, because any user in this list can do anything they like on the file share, regardless of file permissions.

ValidUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are allowed to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠. Can only be set if Authentication is set to ActiveDirectory.

InvalidUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are not allowed to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠. Can only be set if Authentication is set to ActiveDirectory.

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs.

Authentication

The authentication method that users use to access the file share. The default is ActiveDirectory.

Valid Values: ActiveDirectory | GuestAccess

CaseSensitivity

The case of an object name in an Amazon S3 bucket. For ClientSpecified, the client determines the case sensitivity. For CaseSensitive, the gateway determines the case sensitivity. The default value is ClientSpecified.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to the NFS file share. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.

FileShareName

The name of the file share. Optional.

FileShareName must be set if an S3 prefix name is set in LocationARN, or if an access point or access point alias is used.

A valid SMB file share name cannot contain the following characters: [,⁠]⁠,⁠#⁠,⁠;⁠,<,>,:,⁠\"⁠,⁠\⁠,/,|,⁠?⁠,*,+, or ASCII control characters 1-31.

CacheAttributes

Specifies refresh cache information for the file share.

NotificationPolicy

The notification policy of the file share. SettlingTimeInSeconds controls the number of seconds to wait after the last point in time a client wrote to a file before generating an ObjectUploaded notification. Because clients can make many small writes to files, it's best to set this parameter for as long as possible to avoid generating multiple notifications for the same file in a small time period.

SettlingTimeInSeconds has no effect on the timing of the object uploading to Amazon S3, only the timing of the notification.

This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications.

The following example sets NotificationPolicy on with SettlingTimeInSeconds set to 60.

⁠{\"Upload\": {\"SettlingTimeInSeconds\": 60}}⁠

The following example sets NotificationPolicy off.

{}

VPCEndpointDNSName

Specifies the DNS name for the VPC endpoint that the SMB file share uses to connect to Amazon S3.

This parameter is required for SMB file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point.

BucketRegion

Specifies the Region of the S3 bucket where the SMB file share stores files.

This parameter is required for SMB file shares that connect to Amazon S3 through a VPC endpoint, a VPC access point, or an access point alias that points to a VPC access point.

OplocksEnabled

Specifies whether opportunistic locking is enabled for the SMB file share.

Enabling opportunistic locking on case-sensitive shares is not recommended for workloads that involve access to files with the same name in different case.

Valid Values: true | false


Initiates a snapshot of a volume

Description

Initiates a snapshot of a volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_snapshot(VolumeARN, SnapshotDescription, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the list_volumes operation to return a list of gateway volumes.

SnapshotDescription

[required] Textual description of the snapshot that appears in the Amazon EC2 console, Elastic Block Store snapshots panel in the Description field, and in the Storage Gateway snapshot Details pane, Description field.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point

Description

Initiates a snapshot of a gateway from a volume recovery point. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_snapshot_from_volume_recovery_point(
  VolumeARN,
  SnapshotDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes operation to return to retrieve the TargetARN for specified VolumeARN.

SnapshotDescription

[required] Textual description of the snapshot that appears in the Amazon EC2 console, Elastic Block Store snapshots panel in the Description field, and in the Storage Gateway snapshot Details pane, Description field.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Creates a volume on a specified gateway

Description

Creates a volume on a specified gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_storedi_scsi_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_storedi_scsi_volume(
  GatewayARN,
  DiskId,
  SnapshotId = NULL,
  PreserveExistingData,
  TargetName,
  NetworkInterfaceId,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

DiskId

[required] The unique identifier for the gateway local disk that is configured as a stored volume. Use list_local_disks to list disk IDs for a gateway.

SnapshotId

The snapshot ID (e.g., "snap-1122aabb") of the snapshot to restore as the new stored volume. Specify this field if you want to create the iSCSI storage volume from a snapshot; otherwise, do not include this field. To list snapshots for your account use DescribeSnapshots in the Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud API Reference.

PreserveExistingData

[required] Set to true if you want to preserve the data on the local disk. Otherwise, set to false to create an empty volume.

Valid Values: true | false

TargetName

[required] The name of the iSCSI target used by an initiator to connect to a volume and used as a suffix for the target ARN. For example, specifying TargetName as myvolume results in the target ARN of ⁠arn:aws:storagegateway:us-east-2:111122223333:gateway/sgw-12A3456B/target/iqn.1997-05.com.amazon:myvolume⁠. The target name must be unique across all volumes on a gateway.

If you don't specify a value, Storage Gateway uses the value that was previously used for this volume as the new target name.

NetworkInterfaceId

[required] The network interface of the gateway on which to expose the iSCSI target. Only IPv4 addresses are accepted. Use describe_gateway_information to get a list of the network interfaces available on a gateway.

Valid Values: A valid IP address.

KMSEncrypted

Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key, or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3. Optional.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when KMSEncrypted is true. Optional.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a stored volume. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Creates a new custom tape pool

Description

Creates a new custom tape pool. You can use custom tape pool to enable tape retention lock on tapes that are archived in the custom pool.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tape_pool/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_tape_pool(
  PoolName,
  StorageClass,
  RetentionLockType = NULL,
  RetentionLockTimeInDays = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

PoolName

[required] The name of the new custom tape pool.

StorageClass

[required] The storage class that is associated with the new custom pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.

RetentionLockType

Tape retention lock can be configured in two modes. When configured in governance mode, Amazon Web Services accounts with specific IAM permissions are authorized to remove the tape retention lock from archived virtual tapes. When configured in compliance mode, the tape retention lock cannot be removed by any user, including the root Amazon Web Services account.

RetentionLockTimeInDays

Tape retention lock time is set in days. Tape retention lock can be enabled for up to 100 years (36,500 days).

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to tape pool. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode

Description

Creates a virtual tape by using your own barcode. You write data to the virtual tape and then archive the tape. A barcode is unique and cannot be reused if it has already been used on a tape. This applies to barcodes used on deleted tapes. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tape_with_barcode/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_tape_with_barcode(
  GatewayARN,
  TapeSizeInBytes,
  TapeBarcode,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  PoolId = NULL,
  Worm = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that represents the gateway to associate the virtual tape with. Use the list_gateways operation to return a list of gateways for your account and Amazon Web Services Region.

TapeSizeInBytes

[required] The size, in bytes, of the virtual tape that you want to create.

The size must be aligned by gigabyte (102410241024 bytes).

TapeBarcode

[required] The barcode that you want to assign to the tape.

Barcodes cannot be reused. This includes barcodes used for tapes that have been deleted.

KMSEncrypted

Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key, or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3. Optional.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when KMSEncrypted is true. Optional.

PoolId

The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.

Worm

Set to TRUE if the tape you are creating is to be configured as a write-once-read-many (WORM) tape.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a virtual tape that has a barcode. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Creates one or more virtual tapes

Description

Creates one or more virtual tapes. You write data to the virtual tapes and then archive the tapes. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_create_tapes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_create_tapes(
  GatewayARN,
  TapeSizeInBytes,
  ClientToken,
  NumTapesToCreate,
  TapeBarcodePrefix,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  PoolId = NULL,
  Worm = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that represents the gateway to associate the virtual tapes with. Use the list_gateways operation to return a list of gateways for your account and Amazon Web Services Region.

TapeSizeInBytes

[required] The size, in bytes, of the virtual tapes that you want to create.

The size must be aligned by gigabyte (102410241024 bytes).

ClientToken

[required] A unique identifier that you use to retry a request. If you retry a request, use the same ClientToken you specified in the initial request.

Using the same ClientToken prevents creating the tape multiple times.

NumTapesToCreate

[required] The number of virtual tapes that you want to create.

TapeBarcodePrefix

[required] A prefix that you append to the barcode of the virtual tape you are creating. This prefix makes the barcode unique.

The prefix must be 1-4 characters in length and must be one of the uppercase letters from A to Z.

KMSEncrypted

Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key, or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3. Optional.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value can only be set when KMSEncrypted is true. Optional.

PoolId

The ID of the pool that you want to add your tape to for archiving. The tape in this pool is archived in the S3 storage class that is associated with the pool. When you use your backup application to eject the tape, the tape is archived directly into the storage class (S3 Glacier or S3 Glacier Deep Archive) that corresponds to the pool.

Worm

Set to TRUE if the tape you are creating is to be configured as a write-once-read-many (WORM) tape.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a virtual tape. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway

Description

Deletes the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway. If you delete this policy, new virtual tapes must be created manually. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request to remove the policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_automatic_tape_creation_policy(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway

Description

Deletes the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. You can delete either the upload and download bandwidth rate limit, or you can delete both. If you delete only one of the limits, the other limit remains unchanged. To specify which gateway to work with, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_bandwidth_rate_limit(GatewayARN, BandwidthType)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

BandwidthType

[required] One of the BandwidthType values that indicates the gateway bandwidth rate limit to delete.

Valid Values: UPLOAD | DOWNLOAD | ALL


Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database

Description

Deletes the specified cache report and any associated tags from the Storage Gateway database. You can only delete completed reports. If the status of the report you attempt to delete still IN-PROGRESS, the delete operation returns an error. You can use cancel_cache_report to cancel an IN-PROGRESS report.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_cache_report/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_cache_report(CacheReportARN)

Arguments

CacheReportARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to delete.


Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair

Description

Deletes Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target and initiator pair. This operation is supported in volume and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_chap_credentials(TargetARN, InitiatorName)

Arguments

TargetARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes operation to return to retrieve the TargetARN for specified VolumeARN.

InitiatorName

[required] The iSCSI initiator that connects to the target.


Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway

Description

Deletes a file share from an S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_file_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_file_share(FileShareARN, ForceDelete = NULL)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share to be deleted.

ForceDelete

If this value is set to true, the operation deletes a file share immediately and aborts all data uploads to Amazon Web Services. Otherwise, the file share is not deleted until all data is uploaded to Amazon Web Services. This process aborts the data upload process, and the file share enters the FORCE_DELETING status.

Valid Values: true | false


Deletes a gateway

Description

Deletes a gateway. To specify which gateway to delete, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request. The operation deletes the gateway; however, it does not delete the gateway virtual machine (VM) from your host computer.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_gateway/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_gateway(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Deletes a snapshot of a volume

Description

Deletes a snapshot of a volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_snapshot_schedule(VolumeARN)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The volume which snapshot schedule to delete.


Deletes the specified virtual tape

Description

Deletes the specified virtual tape. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_tape(
  GatewayARN,
  TapeARN,
  BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The unique Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway that the virtual tape to delete is associated with. Use the list_gateways operation to return a list of gateways for your account and Amazon Web Services Region.

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape to delete.

BypassGovernanceRetention

Set to TRUE to delete an archived tape that belongs to a custom pool with tape retention lock. Only archived tapes with tape retention lock set to governance can be deleted. Archived tapes with tape retention lock set to compliance can't be deleted.


Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS)

Description

Deletes the specified virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS). This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape_archive/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_tape_archive(TapeARN, BypassGovernanceRetention = NULL)

Arguments

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape to delete from the virtual tape shelf (VTS).

BypassGovernanceRetention

Set to TRUE to delete an archived tape that belongs to a custom pool with tape retention lock. Only archived tapes with tape retention lock set to governance can be deleted. Archived tapes with tape retention lock set to compliance can't be deleted.


Delete a custom tape pool

Description

Delete a custom tape pool. A custom tape pool can only be deleted if there are no tapes in the pool and if there are no automatic tape creation policies that reference the custom tape pool.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_tape_pool/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_tape_pool(PoolARN)

Arguments

PoolARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the custom tape pool to delete.


Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the CreateCachediSCSIVolume or CreateStorediSCSIVolume API

Description

Deletes the specified storage volume that you previously created using the create_cachedi_scsi_volume or create_storedi_scsi_volume API. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume types. For stored volume gateways, the local disk that was configured as the storage volume is not deleted. You can reuse the local disk to create another storage volume.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_delete_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_delete_volume(VolumeARN)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the list_volumes operation to return a list of gateway volumes.


Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster

Description

Returns information about the most recent high availability monitoring test that was performed on the host in a cluster. If a test isn't performed, the status and start time in the response would be null.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_availability_monitor_test/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_availability_monitor_test(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway

Description

Returns the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. By default, these limits are not set, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types. To describe bandwidth rate limits for S3 file gateways, use describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway

Description

Returns information about the bandwidth rate limit schedule of a gateway. By default, gateways do not have bandwidth rate limit schedules, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. This operation is supported only for volume, tape and S3 file gateways. FSx file gateways do not support bandwidth rate limits.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns information about the cache of a gateway

Description

Returns information about the cache of a gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume, tape, and file gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_cache(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress

Description

Returns information about the specified cache report, including completion status and generation progress.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cache_report/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_cache_report(CacheReportARN)

Arguments

CacheReportARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the cache report you want to describe.


Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request

Description

Returns a description of the gateway volumes specified in the request. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes(VolumeARNs)

Arguments

VolumeARNs

[required] An array of strings where each string represents the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a cached volume. All of the specified cached volumes must be from the same gateway. Use list_volumes to get volume ARNs for a gateway.


Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair

Description

Returns an array of Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials information for a specified iSCSI target, one for each target-initiator pair. This operation is supported in the volume and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_chap_credentials(TargetARN)

Arguments

TargetARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes operation to return to retrieve the TargetARN for specified VolumeARN.


Gets the file system association information

Description

Gets the file system association information. This operation is only supported for FSx File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_file_system_associations/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_file_system_associations(FileSystemAssociationARNList)

Arguments

FileSystemAssociationARNList

[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file system association to be described.


Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version

Description

Returns metadata about a gateway such as its name, network interfaces, time zone, status, and software version. To specify which gateway to describe, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_gateway_information/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_gateway_information(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply

Description

Returns your gateway's maintenance window schedule information, with values for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply. Time values returned are for the gateway's time zone.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_maintenance_start_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_maintenance_start_time(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway

Description

Gets a description for one or more Network File System (NFS) file shares from an S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_nfs_file_shares/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_nfs_file_shares(FileShareARNList)

Arguments

FileShareARNList

[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file share to be described.


Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway

Description

Gets a description for one or more Server Message Block (SMB) file shares from a S3 File Gateway. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_smb_file_shares/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_smb_file_shares(FileShareARNList)

Arguments

FileShareARNList

[required] An array containing the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each file share to be described.


Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway

Description

Gets a description of a Server Message Block (SMB) file share settings from a file gateway. This operation is only supported for file gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_smb_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_smb_settings(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume

Description

Describes the snapshot schedule for the specified gateway volume. The snapshot schedule information includes intervals at which snapshots are automatically initiated on the volume. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_snapshot_schedule(VolumeARN)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the list_volumes operation to return a list of gateway volumes.


Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request

Description

Returns the description of the gateway volumes specified in the request. The list of gateway volumes in the request must be from one gateway. In the response, Storage Gateway returns volume information sorted by volume ARNs. This operation is only supported in stored volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_storedi_scsi_volumes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_storedi_scsi_volumes(VolumeARNs)

Arguments

VolumeARNs

[required] An array of strings where each string represents the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a stored volume. All of the specified stored volumes must be from the same gateway. Use list_volumes to get volume ARNs for a gateway.


Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS)

Description

Returns a description of specified virtual tapes in the virtual tape shelf (VTS). This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tape_archives/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_tape_archives(
  TapeARNs = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  Limit = NULL
)

Arguments

TapeARNs

Specifies one or more unique Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) that represent the virtual tapes you want to describe.

Marker

An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing virtual tapes.

Limit

Specifies that the number of virtual tapes described be limited to the specified number.


Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway

Description

Returns a list of virtual tape recovery points that are available for the specified tape gateway.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tape_recovery_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_tape_recovery_points(
  GatewayARN,
  Marker = NULL,
  Limit = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

Marker

An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing the virtual tape recovery points.

Limit

Specifies that the number of virtual tape recovery points that are described be limited to the specified number.


Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs)

Description

Returns a description of virtual tapes that correspond to the specified Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If TapeARN is not specified, returns a description of the virtual tapes associated with the specified gateway. This operation is only supported for the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_tapes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_tapes(
  GatewayARN,
  TapeARNs = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  Limit = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

TapeARNs

Specifies one or more unique Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) that represent the virtual tapes you want to describe. If this parameter is not specified, Tape gateway returns a description of all virtual tapes associated with the specified gateway.

Marker

A marker value, obtained in a previous call to describe_tapes. This marker indicates which page of results to retrieve.

If not specified, the first page of results is retrieved.

Limit

Specifies that the number of virtual tapes described be limited to the specified number.

Amazon Web Services may impose its own limit, if this field is not set.


Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway

Description

Returns information about the upload buffer of a gateway. This operation is supported for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_upload_buffer/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_upload_buffer(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway

Description

Returns a description of virtual tape library (VTL) devices for the specified tape gateway. In the response, Storage Gateway returns VTL device information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_vtl_devices/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_vtl_devices(
  GatewayARN,
  VTLDeviceARNs = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  Limit = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

VTLDeviceARNs

An array of strings, where each string represents the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a VTL device.

All of the specified VTL devices must be from the same gateway. If no VTL devices are specified, the result will contain all devices on the specified gateway.

Marker

An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin describing the VTL devices.

Limit

Specifies that the number of VTL devices described be limited to the specified number.


Returns information about the working storage of a gateway

Description

Returns information about the working storage of a gateway. This operation is only supported in the stored volumes gateway type. This operation is deprecated in cached volumes API version (20120630). Use DescribeUploadBuffer instead.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_describe_working_storage/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_describe_working_storage(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway

Description

Disconnects a volume from an iSCSI connection and then detaches the volume from the specified gateway. Detaching and attaching a volume enables you to recover your data from one gateway to a different gateway without creating a snapshot. It also makes it easier to move your volumes from an on-premises gateway to a gateway hosted on an Amazon EC2 instance. This operation is only supported in the volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_detach_volume/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_detach_volume(VolumeARN, ForceDetach = NULL)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume to detach from the gateway.

ForceDetach

Set to true to forcibly remove the iSCSI connection of the target volume and detach the volume. The default is false. If this value is set to false, you must manually disconnect the iSCSI connection from the target volume.

Valid Values: true | false


Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning

Description

Disables a tape gateway when the gateway is no longer functioning. For example, if your gateway VM is damaged, you can disable the gateway so you can recover virtual tapes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_disable_gateway/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_disable_gateway(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway

Description

Disassociates an Amazon FSx file system from the specified gateway. After the disassociation process finishes, the gateway can no longer access the Amazon FSx file system. This operation is only supported in the FSx File Gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_disassociate_file_system/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_disassociate_file_system(
  FileSystemAssociationARN,
  ForceDelete = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemAssociationARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file system association to be deleted.

ForceDelete

If this value is set to true, the operation disassociates an Amazon FSx file system immediately. It ends all data uploads to the file system, and the file system association enters the FORCE_DELETING status. If this value is set to false, the Amazon FSx file system does not disassociate until all data is uploaded.


Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain

Description

Adds a file gateway to an Active Directory domain. This operation is only supported for file gateways that support the SMB file protocol.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_join_domain/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_join_domain(
  GatewayARN,
  DomainName,
  OrganizationalUnit = NULL,
  DomainControllers = NULL,
  TimeoutInSeconds = NULL,
  UserName,
  Password
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway. Use the list_gateways operation to return a list of gateways for your account and Amazon Web Services Region.

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain that you want the gateway to join.

OrganizationalUnit

The organizational unit (OU) is a container in an Active Directory that can hold users, groups, computers, and other OUs and this parameter specifies the OU that the gateway will join within the AD domain.

DomainControllers

List of IPv4 addresses, NetBIOS names, or host names of your domain server. If you need to specify the port number include it after the colon (“:”). For example, mydc.mydomain.com:389.

TimeoutInSeconds

Specifies the time in seconds, in which the join_domain operation must complete. The default is 20 seconds.

UserName

[required] Sets the user name of user who has permission to add the gateway to the Active Directory domain. The domain user account should be enabled to join computers to the domain. For example, you can use the domain administrator account or an account with delegated permissions to join computers to the domain.

Password

[required] Sets the password of the user who has permission to add the gateway to the Active Directory domain.


Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway

Description

Lists the automatic tape creation policies for a gateway. If there are no automatic tape creation policies for the gateway, it returns an empty list.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_automatic_tape_creation_policies/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_automatic_tape_creation_policies(GatewayARN = NULL)

Arguments

GatewayARN

Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account

Description

Returns a list of existing cache reports for all file shares associated with your Amazon Web Services account. This list includes all information provided by the describe_cache_report action, such as report name, status, completion progress, start time, end time, filters, and tags.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_cache_reports/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_cache_reports(Marker = NULL)

Arguments

Marker

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous list_cache_reports operation. If present, Marker specifies where to continue the list from after a previous call to list_cache_reports. Optional.


Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account

Description

Gets a list of the file shares for a specific S3 File Gateway, or the list of file shares that belong to the calling Amazon Web Services account. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_file_shares/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_file_shares(GatewayARN = NULL, Limit = NULL, Marker = NULL)

Arguments

GatewayARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway whose file shares you want to list. If this field is not present, all file shares under your account are listed.

Limit

The maximum number of file shares to return in the response. The value must be an integer with a value greater than zero. Optional.

Marker

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous ListFileShares operation. If present, Marker specifies where to continue the list from after a previous call to ListFileShares. Optional.


Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary objects

Description

Gets a list of FileSystemAssociationSummary objects. Each object contains a summary of a file system association. This operation is only supported for FSx File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_file_system_associations/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_file_system_associations(
  GatewayARN = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN
Limit

The maximum number of file system associations to return in the response. If present, Limit must be an integer with a value greater than zero. Optional.

Marker

Opaque pagination token returned from a previous list_file_system_associations operation. If present, Marker specifies where to continue the list from after a previous call to list_file_system_associations. Optional.


Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request

Description

Lists gateways owned by an Amazon Web Services account in an Amazon Web Services Region specified in the request. The returned list is ordered by gateway Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_gateways/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_gateways(Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

Marker

An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of gateways.

Limit

Specifies that the list of gateways returned be limited to the specified number of items.


Returns a list of the gateway's local disks

Description

Returns a list of the gateway's local disks. To specify which gateway to describe, you use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in the body of the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_local_disks/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_local_disks(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource

Description

Lists the tags that have been added to the specified resource. This operation is supported in storage gateways of all types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want to list tags.

Marker

An opaque string that indicates the position at which to begin returning the list of tags.

Limit

Specifies that the list of tags returned be limited to the specified number of items.


Lists custom tape pools

Description

Lists custom tape pools. You specify custom tape pools to list by specifying one or more custom tape pool Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If you don't specify a custom tape pool ARN, the operation lists all custom tape pools.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tape_pools/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_tape_pools(PoolARNs = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

PoolARNs

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of each of the custom tape pools you want to list. If you don't specify a custom tape pool ARN, the response lists all custom tape pools.

Marker

A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of tape pools.

Limit

An optional number limit for the tape pools in the list returned by this call.


Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS)

Description

Lists virtual tapes in your virtual tape library (VTL) and your virtual tape shelf (VTS). You specify the tapes to list by specifying one or more tape Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). If you don't specify a tape ARN, the operation lists all virtual tapes in both your VTL and VTS.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_tapes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_tapes(TapeARNs = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

TapeARNs
Marker

A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of tapes.

Limit

An optional number limit for the tapes in the list returned by this call.


Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume

Description

Lists iSCSI initiators that are connected to a volume. You can use this operation to determine whether a volume is being used or not. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volume_initiators/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_volume_initiators(VolumeARN)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the list_volumes operation to return a list of gateway volumes for the gateway.


Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway

Description

Lists the recovery points for a specified gateway. This operation is only supported in the cached volume gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volume_recovery_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_volume_recovery_points(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway

Description

Lists the iSCSI stored volumes of a gateway. Results are sorted by volume ARN. The response includes only the volume ARNs. If you want additional volume information, use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes or the describe_cachedi_scsi_volumes API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_list_volumes/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_list_volumes(GatewayARN = NULL, Marker = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

GatewayARN
Marker

A string that indicates the position at which to begin the returned list of volumes. Obtain the marker from the response of a previous List iSCSI Volumes request.

Limit

Specifies that the list of volumes returned be limited to the specified number of items.


Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3

Description

Sends you notification through Amazon EventBridge when all files written to your file share have been uploaded to Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_notify_when_uploaded/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_notify_when_uploaded(FileShareARN)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required]


Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share

Description

Refreshes the cached inventory of objects for the specified file share. This operation finds objects in the Amazon S3 bucket that were added, removed, or replaced since the gateway last listed the bucket's contents and cached the results. This operation does not import files into the S3 File Gateway cache storage. It only updates the cached inventory to reflect changes in the inventory of the objects in the S3 bucket. This operation is only supported in the S3 File Gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_refresh_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_refresh_cache(FileShareARN, FolderList = NULL, Recursive = NULL)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share you want to refresh.

FolderList

A comma-separated list of the paths of folders to refresh in the cache. The default is ["/"]. The default refreshes objects and folders at the root of the Amazon S3 bucket. If Recursive is set to true, the entire S3 bucket that the file share has access to is refreshed.

Do not include / when specifying folder names. For example, you would specify samplefolder rather than ⁠samplefolder/⁠.

Recursive

A value that specifies whether to recursively refresh folders in the cache. The refresh includes folders that were in the cache the last time the gateway listed the folder's contents. If this value set to true, each folder that is listed in FolderList is recursively updated. Otherwise, subfolders listed in FolderList are not refreshed. Only objects that are in folders listed directly under FolderList are found and used for the update. The default is true.

Valid Values: true | false


Removes one or more tags from the specified resource

Description

Removes one or more tags from the specified resource. This operation is supported in storage gateways of all types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource you want to remove the tags from.

TagKeys

[required] The keys of the tags you want to remove from the specified resource. A tag is composed of a key-value pair.


Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage

Description

Resets all cache disks that have encountered an error and makes the disks available for reconfiguration as cache storage. If your cache disk encounters an error, the gateway prevents read and write operations on virtual tapes in the gateway. For example, an error can occur when a disk is corrupted or removed from the gateway. When a cache is reset, the gateway loses its cache storage. At this point, you can reconfigure the disks as cache disks. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and tape types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_reset_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_reset_cache(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway

Description

Retrieves an archived virtual tape from the virtual tape shelf (VTS) to a tape gateway. Virtual tapes archived in the VTS are not associated with any gateway. However after a tape is retrieved, it is associated with a gateway, even though it is also listed in the VTS, that is, archive. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_retrieve_tape_archive/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_retrieve_tape_archive(TapeARN, GatewayARN)

Arguments

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape you want to retrieve from the virtual tape shelf (VTS).

GatewayARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway you want to retrieve the virtual tape to. Use the list_gateways operation to return a list of gateways for your account and Amazon Web Services Region.

You retrieve archived virtual tapes to only one gateway and the gateway must be a tape gateway.


Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape

Description

Retrieves the recovery point for the specified virtual tape. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_retrieve_tape_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_retrieve_tape_recovery_point(TapeARN, GatewayARN)

Arguments

TapeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the virtual tape for which you want to retrieve the recovery point.

GatewayARN

[required]


Sets the password for your VM local console

Description

Sets the password for your VM local console. When you log in to the local console for the first time, you log in to the VM with the default credentials. We recommend that you set a new password. You don't need to know the default password to set a new password.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_set_local_console_password/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_set_local_console_password(GatewayARN, LocalConsolePassword)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

LocalConsolePassword

[required] The password you want to set for your VM local console.


Sets the password for the guest user smbguest

Description

Sets the password for the guest user smbguest. The smbguest user is the user when the authentication method for the file share is set to GuestAccess. This operation only supported for S3 File Gateways

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_set_smb_guest_password/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_set_smb_guest_password(GatewayARN, Password)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the S3 File Gateway the SMB file share is associated with.

Password

[required] The password that you want to set for your SMB server.


Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway

Description

Shuts down a Tape Gateway or Volume Gateway. To specify which gateway to shut down, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in the body of your request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_shutdown_gateway/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_shutdown_gateway(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment

Description

Start a test that verifies that the specified gateway is configured for High Availability monitoring in your host environment. This request only initiates the test and that a successful response only indicates that the test was started. It doesn't indicate that the test passed. For the status of the test, invoke the describe_availability_monitor_test API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_availability_monitor_test/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_start_availability_monitor_test(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share

Description

Starts generating a report of the file metadata currently cached by an S3 File Gateway for a specific file share. You can use this report to identify and resolve issues if you have files failing upload from your gateway to Amazon S3. The report is a CSV file containing a list of files which match the set of filter parameters you specify in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_cache_report/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_start_cache_report(
  FileShareARN,
  Role,
  LocationARN,
  BucketRegion,
  VPCEndpointDNSName = NULL,
  InclusionFilters = NULL,
  ExclusionFilters = NULL,
  ClientToken,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required]

Role

[required] The ARN of the IAM role used when saving the cache report to Amazon S3.

LocationARN

[required] The ARN of the Amazon S3 bucket where the cache report will be saved.

We do not recommend saving the cache report to the same Amazon S3 bucket for which you are generating the report.

This field does not accept access point ARNs.

BucketRegion

[required] The Amazon Web Services Region of the Amazon S3 bucket associated with the file share for which you want to generate the cache report.

VPCEndpointDNSName

The DNS name of the VPC endpoint associated with the Amazon S3 where you want to save the cache report. Optional.

InclusionFilters

The list of filters and parameters that determine which files are included in the report. You must specify at least one value for InclusionFilters or ExclusionFilters in a start_cache_report request.

ExclusionFilters

The list of filters and parameters that determine which files are excluded from the report. You must specify at least one value for InclusionFilters or ExclusionFilters in a start_cache_report request.

ClientToken

[required] A unique identifier that you use to ensure idempotent report generation if you need to retry an unsuccessful start_cache_report request. If you retry a request, use the same ClientToken you specified in the initial request.

Tags

A list of up to 50 key/value tags that you can assign to the cache report. Using tags can help you categorize your reports and more easily locate them in search results.


Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see ShutdownGateway)

Description

Starts a gateway that you previously shut down (see shutdown_gateway). After the gateway starts, you can then make other API calls, your applications can read from or write to the gateway's storage volumes and you will be able to take snapshot backups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_start_gateway/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_start_gateway(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway

Description

Updates the automatic tape creation policy of a gateway. Use this to update the policy with a new set of automatic tape creation rules. This is only supported for tape gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_automatic_tape_creation_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_automatic_tape_creation_policy(
  AutomaticTapeCreationRules,
  GatewayARN
)

Arguments

AutomaticTapeCreationRules

[required] An automatic tape creation policy consists of a list of automatic tape creation rules. The rules determine when and how to automatically create new tapes.

GatewayARN

[required]


Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway

Description

Updates the bandwidth rate limits of a gateway. You can update both the upload and download bandwidth rate limit or specify only one of the two. If you don't set a bandwidth rate limit, the existing rate limit remains. This operation is supported only for the stored volume, cached volume, and tape gateway types. To update bandwidth rate limits for S3 file gateways, use update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit(
  GatewayARN,
  AverageUploadRateLimitInBitsPerSec = NULL,
  AverageDownloadRateLimitInBitsPerSec = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

AverageUploadRateLimitInBitsPerSec

The average upload bandwidth rate limit in bits per second.

AverageDownloadRateLimitInBitsPerSec

The average download bandwidth rate limit in bits per second.


Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway

Description

Updates the bandwidth rate limit schedule for a specified gateway. By default, gateways do not have bandwidth rate limit schedules, which means no bandwidth rate limiting is in effect. Use this to initiate or update a gateway's bandwidth rate limit schedule. This operation is supported for volume, tape, and S3 file gateways. S3 file gateways support bandwidth rate limits for upload only. FSx file gateways do not support bandwidth rate limits.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_bandwidth_rate_limit_schedule(
  GatewayARN,
  BandwidthRateLimitIntervals
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

BandwidthRateLimitIntervals

[required] An array containing bandwidth rate limit schedule intervals for a gateway. When no bandwidth rate limit intervals have been scheduled, the array is empty.


Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target

Description

Updates the Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) credentials for a specified iSCSI target. By default, a gateway does not have CHAP enabled; however, for added security, you might use it. This operation is supported in the volume and tape gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_chap_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_chap_credentials(
  TargetARN,
  SecretToAuthenticateInitiator,
  InitiatorName,
  SecretToAuthenticateTarget = NULL
)

Arguments

TargetARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the iSCSI volume target. Use the describe_storedi_scsi_volumes operation to return the TargetARN for specified VolumeARN.

SecretToAuthenticateInitiator

[required] The secret key that the initiator (for example, the Windows client) must provide to participate in mutual CHAP with the target.

The secret key must be between 12 and 16 bytes when encoded in UTF-8.

InitiatorName

[required] The iSCSI initiator that connects to the target.

SecretToAuthenticateTarget

The secret key that the target must provide to participate in mutual CHAP with the initiator (e.g. Windows client).

Byte constraints: Minimum bytes of 12. Maximum bytes of 16.

The secret key must be between 12 and 16 bytes when encoded in UTF-8.


Updates a file system association

Description

Updates a file system association. This operation is only supported in the FSx File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_file_system_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_file_system_association(
  FileSystemAssociationARN,
  UserName = NULL,
  Password = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL
)

Arguments

FileSystemAssociationARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file system association that you want to update.

UserName

The user name of the user credential that has permission to access the root share D$ of the Amazon FSx file system. The user account must belong to the Amazon FSx delegated admin user group.

Password

The password of the user credential.

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for the audit logs.

CacheAttributes

Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size

Description

Updates a gateway's metadata, which includes the gateway's name, time zone, and metadata cache size. To specify which gateway to update, use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the gateway in your request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_gateway_information/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_gateway_information(
  GatewayARN,
  GatewayName = NULL,
  GatewayTimezone = NULL,
  CloudWatchLogGroupARN = NULL,
  GatewayCapacity = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

GatewayName
GatewayTimezone

A value that indicates the time zone of the gateway.

CloudWatchLogGroupARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon CloudWatch log group that you want to use to monitor and log events in the gateway.

For more information, see What is Amazon CloudWatch Logs?

GatewayCapacity

Specifies the size of the gateway's metadata cache. This setting impacts gateway performance and hardware recommendations. For more information, see Performance guidance for gateways with multiple file shares in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide.


Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software

Description

Updates the gateway virtual machine (VM) software. The request immediately triggers the software update.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_gateway_software_now/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_gateway_software_now(GatewayARN)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]


Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply

Description

Updates a gateway's maintenance window schedule, with settings for monthly or weekly cadence, specific day and time to begin maintenance, and which types of updates to apply. Time configuration uses the gateway's time zone. You can pass values for a complete maintenance schedule, or update policy, or both. Previous values will persist for whichever setting you choose not to modify. If an incomplete or invalid maintenance schedule is passed, the entire request will be rejected with an error and no changes will occur.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_maintenance_start_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_maintenance_start_time(
  GatewayARN,
  HourOfDay = NULL,
  MinuteOfHour = NULL,
  DayOfWeek = NULL,
  DayOfMonth = NULL,
  SoftwareUpdatePreferences = NULL
)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

HourOfDay

The hour component of the maintenance start time represented as hh, where hh is the hour (00 to 23). The hour of the day is in the time zone of the gateway.

MinuteOfHour

The minute component of the maintenance start time represented as mm, where mm is the minute (00 to 59). The minute of the hour is in the time zone of the gateway.

DayOfWeek

The day of the week component of the maintenance start time week represented as an ordinal number from 0 to 6, where 0 represents Sunday and 6 represents Saturday.

DayOfMonth

The day of the month component of the maintenance start time represented as an ordinal number from 1 to 28, where 1 represents the first day of the month. It is not possible to set the maintenance schedule to start on days 29 through 31.

SoftwareUpdatePreferences

A set of variables indicating the software update preferences for the gateway.

Includes AutomaticUpdatePolicy field with the following inputs:

ALL_VERSIONS - Enables regular gateway maintenance updates.

EMERGENCY_VERSIONS_ONLY - Disables regular gateway maintenance updates. The gateway will still receive emergency version updates on rare occasions if necessary to remedy highly critical security or durability issues. You will be notified before an emergency version update is applied. These updates are applied during your gateway's scheduled maintenance window.


Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share

Description

Updates a Network File System (NFS) file share. This operation is only supported in S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_nfs_file_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_nfs_file_share(
  FileShareARN,
  EncryptionType = NULL,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  NFSFileShareDefaults = NULL,
  DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
  ObjectACL = NULL,
  ClientList = NULL,
  Squash = NULL,
  ReadOnly = NULL,
  GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
  RequesterPays = NULL,
  FileShareName = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL,
  NotificationPolicy = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL
)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the file share to be updated.

EncryptionType

A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

KMSEncrypted

Optional. Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key (SSE-KMS), or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3 (SSE-S3). To use dual-layer encryption (DSSE-KMS), set the EncryptionType parameter instead.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if KMSEncrypted is true, or if EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms.

NFSFileShareDefaults

The default values for the file share. Optional.

DefaultStorageClass

The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by the S3 File Gateway. The default value is S3_STANDARD. Optional.

Valid Values: S3_STANDARD | S3_INTELLIGENT_TIERING | S3_STANDARD_IA | S3_ONEZONE_IA

ObjectACL

A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default value is private.

ClientList

The list of clients that are allowed to access the S3 File Gateway. The list must contain either valid IP addresses or valid CIDR blocks.

Squash

The user mapped to anonymous user.

Valid values are the following:

  • RootSquash: Only root is mapped to anonymous user.

  • NoSquash: No one is mapped to anonymous user.

  • AllSquash: Everyone is mapped to anonymous user.

ReadOnly

A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to true to set the write status to read-only, otherwise set to false.

Valid Values: true | false

GuessMIMETypeEnabled

A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects based on file extensions. Set this value to true to enable MIME type guessing, otherwise set to false. The default value is true.

Valid Values: true | false

RequesterPays

A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set to true, the requester pays the costs; otherwise, the S3 bucket owner pays. However, the S3 bucket owner always pays the cost of storing data.

RequesterPays is a configuration for the S3 bucket that backs the file share, so make sure that the configuration on the file share is the same as the S3 bucket configuration.

Valid Values: true | false

FileShareName

The name of the file share. Optional.

FileShareName must be set if an S3 prefix name is set in LocationARN, or if an access point or access point alias is used.

A valid NFS file share name can only contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -, ., and ⁠_⁠.

CacheAttributes

Specifies refresh cache information for the file share.

NotificationPolicy

The notification policy of the file share. SettlingTimeInSeconds controls the number of seconds to wait after the last point in time a client wrote to a file before generating an ObjectUploaded notification. Because clients can make many small writes to files, it's best to set this parameter for as long as possible to avoid generating multiple notifications for the same file in a small time period.

SettlingTimeInSeconds has no effect on the timing of the object uploading to Amazon S3, only the timing of the notification.

This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications.

The following example sets NotificationPolicy on with SettlingTimeInSeconds set to 60.

⁠{\"Upload\": {\"SettlingTimeInSeconds\": 60}}⁠

The following example sets NotificationPolicy off.

{}

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs.


Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share

Description

Updates a Server Message Block (SMB) file share. This operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_file_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_smb_file_share(
  FileShareARN,
  EncryptionType = NULL,
  KMSEncrypted = NULL,
  KMSKey = NULL,
  DefaultStorageClass = NULL,
  ObjectACL = NULL,
  ReadOnly = NULL,
  GuessMIMETypeEnabled = NULL,
  RequesterPays = NULL,
  SMBACLEnabled = NULL,
  AccessBasedEnumeration = NULL,
  AdminUserList = NULL,
  ValidUserList = NULL,
  InvalidUserList = NULL,
  AuditDestinationARN = NULL,
  CaseSensitivity = NULL,
  FileShareName = NULL,
  CacheAttributes = NULL,
  NotificationPolicy = NULL,
  OplocksEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

FileShareARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SMB file share that you want to update.

EncryptionType

A value that specifies the type of server-side encryption that the file share will use for the data that it stores in Amazon S3.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

KMSEncrypted

Optional. Set to true to use Amazon S3 server-side encryption with your own KMS key (SSE-KMS), or false to use a key managed by Amazon S3 (SSE-S3). To use dual-layer encryption (DSSE-KMS), set the EncryptionType parameter instead.

We recommend using EncryptionType instead of KMSEncrypted to set the file share encryption method. You do not need to provide values for both parameters.

If values for both parameters exist in the same request, then the specified encryption methods must not conflict. For example, if EncryptionType is SseS3, then KMSEncrypted must be false. If EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms, then KMSEncrypted must be true.

Valid Values: true | false

KMSKey

Optional. The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of a symmetric customer master key (CMK) used for Amazon S3 server-side encryption. Storage Gateway does not support asymmetric CMKs. This value must be set if KMSEncrypted is true, or if EncryptionType is SseKms or DsseKms.

DefaultStorageClass

The default storage class for objects put into an Amazon S3 bucket by the S3 File Gateway. The default value is S3_STANDARD. Optional.

Valid Values: S3_STANDARD | S3_INTELLIGENT_TIERING | S3_STANDARD_IA | S3_ONEZONE_IA

ObjectACL

A value that sets the access control list (ACL) permission for objects in the S3 bucket that a S3 File Gateway puts objects into. The default value is private.

ReadOnly

A value that sets the write status of a file share. Set this value to true to set write status to read-only, otherwise set to false.

Valid Values: true | false

GuessMIMETypeEnabled

A value that enables guessing of the MIME type for uploaded objects based on file extensions. Set this value to true to enable MIME type guessing, otherwise set to false. The default value is true.

Valid Values: true | false

RequesterPays

A value that sets who pays the cost of the request and the cost associated with data download from the S3 bucket. If this value is set to true, the requester pays the costs; otherwise, the S3 bucket owner pays. However, the S3 bucket owner always pays the cost of storing data.

RequesterPays is a configuration for the S3 bucket that backs the file share, so make sure that the configuration on the file share is the same as the S3 bucket configuration.

Valid Values: true | false

SMBACLEnabled

Set this value to true to enable access control list (ACL) on the SMB file share. Set it to false to map file and directory permissions to the POSIX permissions.

For more information, see Using Windows ACLs to limit SMB file share access in the Amazon S3 File Gateway User Guide.

Valid Values: true | false

AccessBasedEnumeration

The files and folders on this share will only be visible to users with read access.

AdminUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that have administrator rights to the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠. Can only be set if Authentication is set to ActiveDirectory.

ValidUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are allowed to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠. Can only be set if Authentication is set to ActiveDirectory.

InvalidUserList

A list of users or groups in the Active Directory that are not allowed to access the file share. A group must be prefixed with the @ character. Acceptable formats include: ⁠DOMAIN\\User1⁠, user1, ⁠@group1⁠, and ⁠@DOMAIN\\group1⁠. Can only be set if Authentication is set to ActiveDirectory.

AuditDestinationARN

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the storage used for audit logs.

CaseSensitivity

The case of an object name in an Amazon S3 bucket. For ClientSpecified, the client determines the case sensitivity. For CaseSensitive, the gateway determines the case sensitivity. The default value is ClientSpecified.

FileShareName

The name of the file share. Optional.

FileShareName must be set if an S3 prefix name is set in LocationARN, or if an access point or access point alias is used.

A valid SMB file share name cannot contain the following characters: [,⁠]⁠,⁠#⁠,⁠;⁠,<,>,:,⁠\"⁠,⁠\⁠,/,|,⁠?⁠,*,+, or ASCII control characters 1-31.

CacheAttributes

Specifies refresh cache information for the file share.

NotificationPolicy

The notification policy of the file share. SettlingTimeInSeconds controls the number of seconds to wait after the last point in time a client wrote to a file before generating an ObjectUploaded notification. Because clients can make many small writes to files, it's best to set this parameter for as long as possible to avoid generating multiple notifications for the same file in a small time period.

SettlingTimeInSeconds has no effect on the timing of the object uploading to Amazon S3, only the timing of the notification.

This setting is not meant to specify an exact time at which the notification will be sent. In some cases, the gateway might require more than the specified delay time to generate and send notifications.

The following example sets NotificationPolicy on with SettlingTimeInSeconds set to 60.

⁠{\"Upload\": {\"SettlingTimeInSeconds\": 60}}⁠

The following example sets NotificationPolicy off.

{}

OplocksEnabled

Specifies whether opportunistic locking is enabled for the SMB file share.

Enabling opportunistic locking on case-sensitive shares is not recommended for workloads that involve access to files with the same name in different case.

Valid Values: true | false


Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list

Description

Controls whether the shares on an S3 File Gateway are visible in a net view or browse list. The operation is only supported for S3 File Gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_file_share_visibility/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_smb_file_share_visibility(GatewayARN, FileSharesVisible)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

FileSharesVisible

[required] The shares on this gateway appear when listing shares.


Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway

Description

Updates the list of Active Directory users and groups that have special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_local_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_smb_local_groups(GatewayARN, SMBLocalGroups)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

SMBLocalGroups

[required] A list of Active Directory users and groups that you want to grant special permissions for SMB file shares on the gateway.


Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway

Description

Updates the SMB security strategy level for an Amazon S3 file gateway. This action is only supported for Amazon S3 file gateways.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_smb_security_strategy/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_smb_security_strategy(GatewayARN, SMBSecurityStrategy)

Arguments

GatewayARN

[required]

SMBSecurityStrategy

[required] Specifies the type of security strategy.

ClientSpecified: If you choose this option, requests are established based on what is negotiated by the client. This option is recommended when you want to maximize compatibility across different clients in your environment. Supported only for S3 File Gateway.

MandatorySigning: If you choose this option, File Gateway only allows connections from SMBv2 or SMBv3 clients that have signing enabled. This option works with SMB clients on Microsoft Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008 or newer.

MandatoryEncryption: If you choose this option, File Gateway only allows connections from SMBv3 clients that have encryption enabled. This option is recommended for environments that handle sensitive data. This option works with SMB clients on Microsoft Windows 8, Windows Server 2012 or newer.

MandatoryEncryptionNoAes128: If you choose this option, File Gateway only allows connections from SMBv3 clients that use 256-bit AES encryption algorithms. 128-bit algorithms are not allowed. This option is recommended for environments that handle sensitive data. It works with SMB clients on Microsoft Windows 8, Windows Server 2012, or later.


Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume

Description

Updates a snapshot schedule configured for a gateway volume. This operation is only supported in the cached volume and stored volume gateway types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_snapshot_schedule(
  VolumeARN,
  StartAt,
  RecurrenceInHours,
  Description = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

VolumeARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the volume. Use the list_volumes operation to return a list of gateway volumes.

StartAt

[required] The hour of the day at which the snapshot schedule begins represented as hh, where hh is the hour (0 to 23). The hour of the day is in the time zone of the gateway.

RecurrenceInHours

[required] Frequency of snapshots. Specify the number of hours between snapshots.

Description

Optional description of the snapshot that overwrites the existing description.

Tags

A list of up to 50 tags that can be assigned to a snapshot. Each tag is a key-value pair.

Valid characters for key and value are letters, spaces, and numbers representable in UTF-8 format, and the following special characters: + - = . _ : / @. The maximum length of a tag's key is 128 characters, and the maximum length for a tag's value is 256.


Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway

Description

Updates the type of medium changer in a tape gateway. When you activate a tape gateway, you select a medium changer type for the tape gateway. This operation enables you to select a different type of medium changer after a tape gateway is activated. This operation is only supported in the tape gateway type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/storagegateway_update_vtl_device_type/ for full documentation.

Usage

storagegateway_update_vtl_device_type(VTLDeviceARN, DeviceType)

Arguments

VTLDeviceARN

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the medium changer you want to select.

DeviceType

[required] The type of medium changer you want to select.

Valid Values: STK-L700 | AWS-Gateway-VTL | ⁠IBM-03584L32-0402⁠